REF615 5.0 IEC Application Manual - N
REF615 5.0 IEC Application Manual - N
REF615 5.0 IEC Application Manual - N
Trademarks
ABB and Relion are registered trademarks of the ABB Group. All other brand or
product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective holders.
Warranty
Please inquire about the terms of warranty from your nearest ABB representative.
http://www.abb.com/substationautomation
Disclaimer
The data, examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for the concept
or product description and are not to be deemed as a statement of guaranteed
properties. All persons responsible for applying the equipment addressed in this
manual must satisfy themselves that each intended application is suitable and
acceptable, including that any applicable safety or other operational requirements
are complied with. In particular, any risks in applications where a system failure and/
or product failure would create a risk for harm to property or persons (including but
not limited to personal injuries or death) shall be the sole responsibility of the
person or entity applying the equipment, and those so responsible are hereby
requested to ensure that all measures are taken to exclude or mitigate such risks.
This product has been designed to be connected and communicate data and
information via a network interface which should be connected to a secure
network. It is the sole responsibility of the person or entity responsible for network
administration to ensure a secure connection to the network and to take the
necessary measures (such as, but not limited to, installation of firewalls, application
of authentication measures, encryption of data, installation of anti virus programs,
etc.) to protect the product and the network, its system and interface included,
against any kind of security breaches, unauthorized access, interference, intrusion,
leakage and/or theft of data or information. ABB is not liable for any such damages
and/or losses.
This document has been carefully checked by ABB but deviations cannot be
completely ruled out. In case any errors are detected, the reader is kindly requested
to notify the manufacturer. Other than under explicit contractual commitments, in
no event shall ABB be responsible or liable for any loss or damage resulting from
the use of this manual or the application of the equipment.
Conformity
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European
Communities on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to
electromagnetic compatibility (EMC Directive 2004/108/EC) and concerning
electrical equipment for use within specified voltage limits (Low-voltage directive
2006/95/EC). This conformity is the result of tests conducted by ABB in
accordance with the product standards EN 50263 and EN 60255-26 for the EMC
directive, and with the product standards EN 60255-1 and EN 60255-27 for the low
voltage directive. The product is designed in accordance with the international
standards of the IEC 60255 series.
Table of contents
Table of contents
Section 1 Introduction.......................................................................7
This manual........................................................................................7
Intended audience..............................................................................7
Product documentation.......................................................................8
Product documentation set............................................................8
Document revision history.............................................................8
Related documentation..................................................................9
Symbols and conventions...................................................................9
Symbols.........................................................................................9
Document conventions................................................................10
Functions, codes and symbols....................................................10
REF615 1
Application Manual
Table of contents
2 REF615
Application Manual
Table of contents
REF615 3
Application Manual
Table of contents
4 REF615
Application Manual
Table of contents
REF615 5
Application Manual
Table of contents
Section 6 Glossary.......................................................................393
6 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 1
Introduction
Section 1 Introduction
This manual addresses the protection and control engineer responsible for
planning, pre-engineering and engineering.
REF615 7
Application Manual
Section 1 1MRS756378 N
Introduction
Maintenance
Engineering
Planning &
Installation
Operation
Quick start guide purchase
Quick installation guide
Brochure
Product guide
Operation manual
Installation manual
Connection diagram
Engineering manual
Technical manual
Application manual c
Communication protocol manual c
IEC 61850 Engineering guide
Point list manual
GUID-12DC16B2-2DC1-48DF-8734-0C8B7116124C V1 EN
Figure 1: The intended use of documents during the product life cycle
8 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 1
Introduction
1.4.1 Symbols
REF615 9
Application Manual
Section 1 1MRS756378 N
Introduction
The tip icon indicates advice on, for example, how to design your
project or how to use a certain function.
• Abbreviations and acronyms are spelled out in the glossary. The glossary also
contains definitions of important terms.
• Push button navigation in the LHMI menu structure is presented by using the
push button icons.
To navigate between the options, use and .
• Menu paths are presented in bold.
Select Main menu/Settings.
• LHMI messages are shown in Courier font.
To save the changes in non-volatile memory, select Yes and press .
• Parameter names are shown in italics.
The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting.
• Parameter values are indicated with quotation marks.
The corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".
• IED input/output messages and monitored data names are shown in Courier font.
When the function starts, the START output is set to TRUE.
• This document assumes that the parameter setting visibility is "Advanced".
10 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 1
Introduction
Admittance based earth-fault protection1) EFPADM1 Yo> -> (1) 21YN (1)
EFPADM2 Yo> -> (2) 21YN (2)
EFPADM3 Yo> -> (3) 21YN (3)
Wattmetric based earth-fault protection1) WPWDE1 Po> -> (1) 32N (1)
WPWDE2 Po> -> (2) 32N (2)
WPWDE3 Po> -> (3) 32N (3)
Transient / intermittent earth-fault protection INTRPTEF1 Io> -> IEF (1) 67NIEF (1)
REF615 11
Application Manual
Section 1 1MRS756378 N
Introduction
12 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 1
Introduction
1) One of the following can be ordered as an option: Admittance based E/F, Wattmetric based E/F or
Harmonics based E/F. The option is an addition to the existing E/F of the original configuration. The
optional E/F has also a predefined configuration in the IED. The optional E/F can be set on or off.
2) For example, used for RTD/mA based protection or analog GOOSE
3) Only available with redundant Ethernet communication modules
REF615 13
Application Manual
14
1MRS756378 N Section 2
REF615 overview
2.1 Overview
REF615 is a dedicated feeder IED (intelligent electronic device) designed for the
protection, control, measurement and supervision of utility substations and
industrial power systems including radial, looped and meshed distribution networks
with or without distributed power generation. REF615 is a member of ABB’s
Relion® product family and part of its 615 protection and control product series.
The 615 series IEDs are characterized by their compactness and withdrawable-unit
design.
Re-engineered from the ground up, the 615 series has been designed to unleash the
full potential of the IEC 61850 standard for communication and interoperability
between substation automation devices.
The IED provides main protection for overhead lines and cable feeders in
distribution networks. The IED is also used as back-up protection in applications,
where an independent and redundant protection system is required.
Depending on the chosen standard configuration, the IED is adapted for the
protection of overhead line and cable feeders in isolated neutral, resistance earthed,
compensated and solidly earthed networks. Once the standard configuration IED
has been given the application-specific settings, it can directly be put into service.
The 615 series IEDs support a range of communication protocols including IEC
61850 with GOOSE messaging, IEC 61850-9-2 LE (except in RED615), IEC
60870-5-103, Modbus® and DNP3. Profibus DPV1 communication protocol is
supported by using the protocol converter SPA-ZC 302.
REF615 15
Application Manual
Section 2 1MRS756378 N
REF615 overview
16 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 2
REF615 overview
REF615 17
Application Manual
Section 2 1MRS756378 N
REF615 overview
• AR Sequence Visualizer
• Label Printing
• IEC 61850 Configuration
The IED consists of two main parts: plug-in unit and case. The content depends on
the ordered functionality.
18 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 2
REF615 overview
1) The 0.2/1 A input is normally used in applications requiring sensitive earth-fault protection and
featuring core-balance current transformers.
REF615 19
Application Manual
Section 2 1MRS756378 N
REF615 overview
Rated values of the current and voltage inputs are basic setting parameters of the
IED. The binary input thresholds are selectable within the range 16…176 V DC by
adjusting the binary input setting parameters.
The connection diagrams of different hardware modules are presented in this manual.
See the installation manual for more information about the case and
the plug-in unit.
20 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 2
REF615 overview
The LHMI is used for setting, monitoring and controlling the IED. The LHMI
comprises the display, buttons, LED indicators and communication port.
REF615
Overcurrent
Dir. earth-fault
Voltage protection
Phase unbalance
Thermal overload
Breaker failure
Disturb. rec. Triggered
CB condition monitoring
Supervision
Arc detected
Autoreclose shot in progr.
A070704 V4 EN
REF615 21
Application Manual
Section 2 1MRS756378 N
REF615 overview
2.4.1 Display
The LHMI includes a graphical display that supports two character sizes. The
character size depends on the selected language. The amount of characters and
rows fitting the view depends on the character size.
3 4
A070705 V3 EN
1 Header
2 Icon
3 Content
4 Scroll bar (displayed when needed)
22 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 2
REF615 overview
2.4.2 LEDs
The LHMI includes three protection indicators above the display: Ready, Start and
Trip.
There are 11 matrix programmable LEDs on front of the LHMI. The LEDs can be
configured with PCM600 and the operation mode can be selected with the LHMI,
WHMI or PCM600.
2.4.3 Keypad
The LHMI keypad contains push-buttons which are used to navigate in different
views or menus. With the push-buttons you can give open or close commands to
objects in the primary circuit, for example, a circuit breaker, a contactor or a
disconnector. The push-buttons are also used to acknowledge alarms, reset
indications, provide help and switch between local and remote control mode.
A071176 V1 EN
Figure 4: LHMI keypad with object control, navigation and command push-
buttons and RJ-45 communication port
The WHMI allows secure access to the IED via a Web browser. The supported
Web browser versions are Internet Explorer 8.0, 9.0 and 10.0. When the Secure
Communication parameter in the IED is activated, the Web server is forced to take
a secured (HTTPS) connection to WHMI using TLS encryption.
REF615 23
Application Manual
Section 2 1MRS756378 N
REF615 overview
The menu tree structure on the WHMI is almost identical to the one on the LHMI.
A070754 V5 EN
• Locally by connecting the laptop to the IED via the front communication port.
• Remotely over LAN/WAN.
2.6 Authorization
The user categories have been predefined for the LHMI and the WHMI, each with
different rights and default passwords.
24 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 2
REF615 overview
User audit trail is defined according to the selected set of requirements from IEEE
1686. The logging is based on predefined usernames or user categories. The user
audit trail events are accessible with IEC 61850-8-1, PCM600, LHMI and WHMI.
REF615 25
Application Manual
Section 2 1MRS756378 N
REF615 overview
PCM600 Event Viewer can be used to view the audit trail events together with
normal events. Since only the administrator has the right to read audit trail,
authorization must be properly configured in PCM600. The audit trail cannot be
reset but PCM600 Event Viewer can filter data. Some of the audit trail events are
interesting also as normal process events.
26 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 2
REF615 overview
2.7 Communication
The IED supports a range of communication protocols including IEC 61850, IEC
61850-9-2 LE, IEC 60870-5-103, Modbus® and DNP3. Profibus DPV1
communication protocol is supported by using the protocol converter SPA-ZC 302.
Operational information and controls are available through these protocols.
However, some communication functionality, for example, horizontal
communication between the IEDs, is only enabled by the IEC 61850
communication protocol.
REF615 27
Application Manual
Section 2 1MRS756378 N
REF615 overview
The IED can support five simultaneous clients. If PCM600 reserves one client
connection, only four client connections are left, for example, for IEC 61850 and
Modbus.
All communication connectors, except for the front port connector, are placed on
integrated optional communication modules. The IED can be connected to Ethernet-
based communication systems via the RJ-45 connector (100Base-TX) or the fibre-
optic LC connector (100Base-FX). An optional serial interface is available for
RS-232/RS-485 communication.
28 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 2
REF615 overview
Client A Client B
Network A
Network B
GUID-283597AF-9F38-4FC7-B87A-73BFDA272D0F V3 EN
PRP specifies that each device is connected in parallel to two local area networks.
HSR applies the PRP principle to rings and to the rings of rings to achieve cost-
effective redundancy. Thus, each device incorporates a switch element that
forwards frames from port to port. The HSR/PRP option is available for REF615,
REM615, RET615, REU615 and REV615.
REF615 29
Application Manual
Section 2 1MRS756378 N
REF615 overview
PRP
Each PRP node, called a doubly attached node with PRP (DAN), is attached to two
independent LANs operated in parallel. These parallel networks in PRP are called
LAN A and LAN B. The networks are completely separated to ensure failure
independence, and they can have different topologies. Both networks operate in
parallel, thus providing zero-time recovery and continuous checking of redundancy
to avoid communication failures. Non-PRP nodes, called singly attached nodes
(SANs), are either attached to one network only (and can therefore communicate
only with DANs and SANs attached to the same network), or are attached through
a redundancy box, a device that behaves like a DAN.
COM600
SCADA
30 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 2
REF615 overview
HSR
HSR applies the PRP principle of parallel operation to a single ring, treating the
two directions as two virtual LANs. For each frame sent, a node, DAN, sends two
frames, one over each port. Both frames circulate in opposite directions over the
ring and each node forwards the frames it receives, from one port to the other.
When the originating node receives a frame sent to itself, it discards that to avoid
loops; therefore, no ring protocol is needed. Individually attached nodes, SANs,
such as laptops and printers, must be attached through a “redundancy box” that acts
as a ring element. For example, a 615 or 620 series IED with HSR support can be
used as a redundancy box.
GUID-207430A7-3AEC-42B2-BC4D-3083B3225990 V1 EN
UniGear Digital switchgear concept relies on the process bus together with current
and voltage sensors. The process bus enables several advantages for the UniGear
Digital like simplicity with reduced wiring, flexibility with data availability to all
IEDs, improved diagnostics and longer maintenance cycles.
REF615 31
Application Manual
Section 2 1MRS756378 N
REF615 overview
With process bus the galvanic interpanel wiring for sharing busbar voltage value
can be replaced with Ethernet communication. Transmitting measurement samples
over process bus brings also higher error detection because the signal transmission
is automatically supervised. Additional contribution to the higher availability is the
possibility to use redundant Ethernet network for transmitting SMV signals.
GUID-2371EFA7-4369-4F1A-A23F-CF0CE2D474D3 V1 EN
The 615 series supports IEC 61850 process bus with sampled values of analog
phase voltages. The measured values are transferred as sampled values using the
IEC 61850-9-2 LE protocol which uses the same physical Ethernet network as the
IEC 61850-8-1 station bus. The intended application for sampled values is sharing
the measured phase voltages from one 615 series IED to other IEDs with phase
voltage based functions and 9-2 support.
The 615 series IEDs with process bus based applications use IEEE 1588 v2
Precision Time Protocol (PTP) according to IEEE C37.238-2011 Power Profile for
high accuracy time synchronization. With IEEE 1588 v2, the cabling infrastructure
requirement is reduced by allowing time synchronization information to be
transported over the same Ethernet network as the data communications.
32 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 2
REF615 overview
GUID-7C56BC1F-F1B2-4E74-AB8E-05001A88D53D V2 EN
Figure 10: Example network topology with process bus, redundancy and IEEE
1588 v2 time synchronization
The process bus option is available for REF615, REM615, RET615, REU615 and
REV615. See the IEC 61850 engineering guide for detailed system requirements
and configuration details.
REF615 33
Application Manual
34
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
The IED is delivered from the factory with default connections described in the
functional diagrams for binary inputs, binary outputs, function-to-function
connections and alarm LEDs. The positive measuring direction of directional
protection functions is towards the outgoing feeder.
REF615 35
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
Wattmetric-based earth- (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3)
WPWDE
fault protection 8) 2)3)8) 2)3)8) 2)4)8) 2)4)8) 2)7)8) 2)4)8) 2)7)8) 2)4)8)
Transient/intermittent earth-
INTRPTEF 1 4)9) 1 4)9) 1 4)9) 1 4)9) 1 4)9) 1 7)9) 1 4)9)
fault protection
Harmonics-based earth- (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1)
HAEFPTOC
fault protection 8) 8)9) 8)9) 8)9) 8)9) 8)9) 8)9)
Non-directional (cross-
country) earth-fault
EFHPTOC 1 6) 1 6) 1 6) 1 6) 1 6) 1 6) 1 6)
protection, using calculated
Io
Negative-sequence
NSPTOC 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
overcurrent protection
Phase discontinuity
PDNSPTOC 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
protection
Residual overvoltage
ROVPTOV 3 3) 3 3) 3 4) 3 4) 3 7) 3 4) 34) 2 4) 3 7) 3 4)
protection
Three-phase undervoltage
PHPTUV 3 3 3 3 2 3 3
protection
Three-phase overvoltage
PHPTOV 3 3 3 3 2 3 3
protection
Positive-sequence
PSPTUV 1 1 1 1 1
undervoltage protection
Negative-sequence
NSPTOV 1 1 1 1 1
overvoltage protection
Frequency protection FRPFRQ 3 3 3 4 4
Three-phase thermal
protection for feeders,
T1PTTR 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
cables and distribution
transformers
36 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
Arc protection ARCSARC (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3)
Multi-purpose protection 12) MAPGAPC 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18
Fault locator SCEFRFLO (1) (1) (1)
High impedance fault
PHIZ 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
detection
Power quality
Current total demand
CMHAI (1) 13) (1) 13) (1) 13) (1) 13)
distortion
Voltage total harmonic
VMHAI (1) 13) (1) 13) (1) 13) (1) 13)
distortion
Voltage variation PHQVVR (1) 13) (1) 13) (1) 13) (1) 13)
Control
Circuit-breaker control CBXCBR 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Disconnector control DCXSWI 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Earthing switch control ESXSWI 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Disconnector position
DCSXSWI 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
indication
Earthing switch indication ESSXSWI 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Autoreclosing DARREC (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1)
Synchronism and
SECRSYN 1 1 1 1
energizing check
Condition monitoring
Circuit-breaker condition
SSCBR 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
monitoring
Trip circuit supervision TCSSCBR 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Current circuit supervision CCRDIF 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Fuse failure supervision SEQRFUF 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Runtime counter for
MDSOPT 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
machines and devices
Measurement
Disturbance recorder RDRE 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Load profile record LDPMSTA 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Three-phase current
CMMXU 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
measurement
Sequence current
CSMSQI 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
measurement
Residual current
RESCMMXU 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1
measurement
Three-phase voltage
VMMXU 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 2
measurement
Residual voltage
RESVMMXU 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
measurement
Sequence voltage
VSMSQI 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
measurement
Three-phase power and
PEMMXU 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
energy measurement
RTD/mA measurement XRGGIO130 (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1)
REF615 37
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
1) The instances of a protection function represent the number of identical protection function blocks available in the standard configuration.
2) Io selectable by parameter, “Io measured” as default
3) “Uo measured” is always used.
4) Uo selectable by parameter, "Uo measured" as default
5) Uo calculated and negative sequence voltage selectable by parameter, “Uo calculated” as default
6) Io selectable by parameter, “Io calculated” as default
7) “Uo calculated” is always used.
8) One of the following can be ordered as an option: admittance-based E/F, wattmetric-based E/F or harmonics-based E/F. The option is
an addition to the existing E/F of the original configuration. The optional E/F has also a predefined configuration in the IED. The optional
E/F can be set on or off.
9) “Io measured” is always used.
10) “IoB measured” is always used.
11) Master trip included and connected to the corresponding HSO in the configuration only when the BIO0007 module is used. If the ARC
option is selected additionally, ARCSARC is connected to the corresponding master trip input in the configuration.
12) Multi-purpose protection is used, for example, for RTD/mA-based protection or analog GOOSE.
13) Power quality option includes current total demand distortion, voltage total harmonic distortion and voltage variation.
14) Only available with COM0031-COM0034
The external I/O module’s binary inputs and outputs can be used for the less time-
critical binary signals of the application. The integration enables releasing some
initially reserved binary inputs and outputs of the IED’s standard configuration.
The suitability of the IED’s binary outputs which have been selected for primary
device control should be carefully verified, for example make and carry and
breaking capacity. If the requirements for the primary device control circuit are not
met, using external auxiliary relays should be considered.
38 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
A071288 V6 EN
[1] Additional BIO-module (X110 in the diagram) is included in the IED variant B
REF615 39
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
A071290 V5 EN
[2] Additional BIO-module (X110 in the diagram) is included in the IED variant D
40 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
GUID-F7601942-ACF2-47E2-8F21-CD9C1D2BC1F0 V4 EN
REF615 41
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
L1
L2
L3
REF615
X130 X100
Positive +
Current 1
1 0,2/1A
U aux
Direction 2 Io 2
N -
3
X131 IRF
4
4 5
IL1
5
7 PO1
U1
8
6
X132 7
4 PO2
IL2
5
8
7 9
U2
8 10
X133 SO1
11
4 12
IL3
5 13
7 SO2
U3
8 14
16
PO3
17
P1 S1 15
19
S2
TCS1 18
P2
20
X110 22
PO4
1
BI 1 2) 21
2
23
3 TCS2 24
BI 2
4
5 X110
BI 3
6 2) 14
SO1
BI 4 16
7 15
17
8
BI 5 SO2
9
19
18
BI 6 20
10
SO3
11 22
BI 7
12 21
23
BI 8 SO4
13 24
X13
1)
Light sensor input 1
X14
1)
Light sensor input 2
1) Optional
X15 2) BIO0005 Module (8BI+4BO)
1)
Light sensor input 3 Alternative Module BIO0007 (8BI+3HSO)
GUID-B70F0C14-52B2-4213-8781-5A7CA1E40451 V2 EN
42 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
GUID-E8E2F79F-3DD8-46BD-8DE7-87A30133A7AE V1 EN
REF615 43
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
L1
L2
L3
A
n
N REF615
X130 X100
1 + 1
a BI 1 U aux
2
-
2
da dn
3 3
BI 2
4 IRF
4
5
BI 3 5
6
PO1
7
BI 4
8 6
60 - 7
9 210V
U12B (for SECRSYN1)
10 N PO2
60 -
11 210V
U1 8
12 N 9
60 -
13 210V
10
U2 SO1
14 N
60 -
15 210V
11
U3 12
16 N 13
60 -
17 210V SO2
Uo
18 N
14
16
PO3
X120
Positive 17
Current 1 1/5A 2) 15
not in use
Direction 19
2 N TCS1 18
3 1/5A
not in use 20
4 N 22
P1 5 1/5A PO4
S1 IoB (for HREFPDIF1)
6 N 21
P2
S2
7 1/5A 23
IL1 TCS2 24
8 N
9 1/5A
IL2
10 N X110
11 1/5A
14
IL3 3)
12 N SO1
13 1/5A
16
Io 15
14 N
17
P1 S1
SO2
X110 19
P2 S2
18
1 20
BI 1 3)
2 SO3
22
3 21
BI 2
4 23
SO4
5
BI 3 24
P1 S1 6
P2 S2 BI 4
7
8
BI 5
9
BI 6
10
11
BI 7
12
BI 8
13
X13
1)
Light sensor input 1
X14
1) 1) Optional
Light sensor input 2 2) The IED features an automatic short-circuit
mechanism in the CT connector when plug-in
X15 unit is detached
1) 3) BIO0005 Module (8BI+4BO)
Light sensor input 3
Alternative Module BIO0007 (8BI+3HSO)
GUID-4288C45E-C7C8-4FB9-8821-85C58BB25D32 V1 EN
3.3.1 Applications
The standard configuration for non-directional overcurrent and directional earth-
fault protection is mainly intended for cable and overhead-line feeder applications
in isolated and resonant-earthed distribution networks. The configuration also
44 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
The IED with a standard configuration is delivered from the factory with default
settings and parameters. The end user flexibility for incoming, outgoing and
internal signal designation within the IED enables this configuration to be further
adapted to different primary circuit layouts and the related functionality needs by
modifying the internal functionality using PCM600.
3.3.2 Functions
Uo
Lockout relay A
O
- Local/Remote push button on LHMI
R
L
94/86
U12 0. 0 kV
P 0.00 kW
Q 0.00 kVAr
IL2 0 A
- User management
- Web HMI
I ESC Clear
2×
AND
I2> I2/I1> 3Ith>F 3I>>> O R
3× 3×
ARC 3I>/Io>BF
50L/50NL CONDITION MONITORING COMMUNICATION
51BF/51NBF
AND SUPERVISION
Protocols:
2× 2× IEC 61850-8-1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0
3I> 3I>> 3I2f> OPTS TCS Modbus® 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0
1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0
51P-1 51P-2 68 OPTM TCM IEC 60870-5-103 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
DNP3 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0
Interfaces: 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0
Io 1
Ethernet: TX (RJ45), FX (LC)
0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
Uo - I, Io, Uo
Object Ctrl 2) Ind 3)
3× 3× - Limit value supervision
Yo>→ Po>→ CB 1 - - Symmetrical components
21YN 32N
DC - -
OR Analog interface types 1)
ES - -
1)
Check availability of binary inputs/outputs
Current transformer 4
from technical documentation Voltage transformer 1
2)
Control and indication function for
primary object 1)
Conventional transformer inputs
3)
Status indication function for
primary object
3× 18×
Uo> MAP O→I
59G MAP 79
REMARKS
Optional 3× No. of Calculated OR Alternative
function instances value function to be
Io/Uo defined when
ordering
GUID-030C217F-7B91-4739-9DAE-90D1E053EB53 V1 EN
IL2 0 A
I ESC Clear
AND
O R
L
OR
Connector pins for each input and output are presented in the IED physical
connections section.
46 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
REF615 47
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
48 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
The analog channels have fixed connections to the different function blocks inside
the IED’s standard configuration. However, the 12 analog channels available for
the disturbance recorder function are freely selectable as a part of the disturbance
recorder’s parameter settings.
The phase currents to the IED are fed from a current transformer. The residual
current to the IED is fed from either residually connected CTs, an external core
balance CT, neutral CT or internally calculated.
The residual voltage to the IED is fed from either the residually connected VTs or
an open delta connected VT.
The IED offers six different settings groups which can be set based on individual
needs. Each group can be activated or deactivated using the setting group settings
available in the IED.
The functional diagram describe the IEDs protection functionality in detail and
according to the factory set default connections.
Four overcurrent stages are offered for overcurrent and short-circuit protection.
The non-directional instantaneous stage PHIPTOC1 can be blocked by energizing
the binary input X120:BI1.
REF615 49
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
PHIPTOC1
X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING BLOCK OPERATE PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START PHIPTOC1_START
PHHPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE PHHPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START PHHPTOC1_START
PHHPTOC2
BLOCK OPERATE PHHPTOC2_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START PHHPTOC2_START
PHLPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE PHLPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START PHLPTOC1_START
OR6
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O PHxPTOC_OPERATE
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE B3
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B4
B5
B6
GUID-55B40D0D-C4B2-4997-B3D0-934CCCFF1FB7 V1 EN
INRPHAR1
BLOCK BLK2H INRPHAR1_BLK2H
GUID-3C6557BC-1843-4A95-9562-799D95B9CD3A V1 EN
Two negative sequence overcurrent stages NSPTOC1 and NSPTOC2 are provided
for phase unbalance protection. These functions are used to protect the feeder
against phase unbalance.
50 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
NSPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE NSPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START NSPTOC1_START
NSPTOC2
BLOCK OPERATE NSPTOC2_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START NSPTOC2_START
OR
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O NSPTOC_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B2
GUID-276B1260-5C99-44E4-97BA-AFBB50464E46 V1 EN
Three stages are provided for directional earth-fault protection. According to the
IED's order code, the directional earth-fault protection method is based on
conventional directional earth-fault DEFxPDEF only or alternatively together with
admittance criteria EFPADM or wattmetric earth-fault protection WPWDE. In
addition, there is a dedicated protection stage INTRPTEF either for transient-based
earth-fault protection or for cable intermittent earth-fault protection in compensated
networks.
DEFLPDEF1
BLOCK OPERATE DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START DEFLPDEF1_START
RCA_CTL
DEFLPDEF2
BLOCK OPERATE DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START DEFLPDEF2_START
RCA_CTL
DEFHPDEF1
BLOCK OPERATE DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START DEFHPDEF1_START
RCA_CTL
OR6
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O DEF_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B2
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-3499F814-CAB8-4310-9428-D3B72A9BEAF3 V1 EN
REF615 51
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
INTRPTEF1
BLOCK OPERATE INTRPTEF1_OPERATE
START INTRPTEF1_START
BLK_EF
GUID-99B9BCD7-90A1-4259-A475-8DFCA244F32C V1 EN
WPWDE1
BLOCK OPERATE WPWDE1_OPERATE
RCA_CTL START WPWDE1_START
WPWDE2
BLOCK OPERATE WPWDE2_OPERATE
RCA_CTL START WPWDE2_START
WPWDE3
BLOCK OPERATE WPWDE3_OPERATE
RCA_CTL START WPWDE3_START
OR6
WPWDE1_OPERATE B1 O WPWDE_OPERATE
WPWDE2_OPERATE B2
WPWDE3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-2EE794AD-2D14-49C7-AD33-89F75627AEA1 V1 EN
52 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
EFPADM1
BLOCK OPERATE EFPADM1_OPERATE
RELEASE START EFPADM1_START
EFPADM2
BLOCK OPERATE EFPADM2_OPERATE
RELEASE START EFPADM2_START
EFPADM3
BLOCK OPERATE EFPADM3_OPERATE
RELEASE START EFPADM3_START
OR6
EFPADM1_OPERATE B1 O EFPADM_OPERATE
EFPADM2_OPERATE B2
EFPADM3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-AE7BA7DD-60E7-4D48-8F98-2605BEB424FA V1 EN
EFHPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE EFHPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START EFHPTOC1_START
GUID-1B0EE37E-F8D6-45E3-9648-7495EF4360D3 V1 EN
PDNSPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE
START PDNSPTOC1_START
GUID-9EC84EEF-5799-4170-8826-85082502D144 V1 EN
The thermal overload protection T1PTTR1 detects overloads under varying load
conditions.
REF615 53
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
T1PTTR1
BLK_OPR OPERATE T1PTTR1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START T1PTTR1_START
TEMP_AMB ALARM T1PTTR1_ALARM
BLK_CLOSE
GUID-4DD81601-4C74-4305-A280-EB0DD2A7D958 V1 EN
The breaker failure protection CCBRBRF1 is initiated via the START input by
number of different protection functions available in the IED. The breaker failure
protection function offers different operating modes associated with the circuit
breaker position and the measured phase and residual currents.
The breaker failure protection function has two operating outputs: TRRET and
TRBU. The TRRET operate output is used for retripping its own breaker through
TRPPTRC2_TRIP. The TRBU output is used to give a backup trip to the breaker
feeding upstream. For this purpose, the TRBU operate output signal is connected to
the binary output X100:PO2.
CCBRBRF1
OR6 OR6
BLOCK CB_FAULT_AL
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O START TRBU CCBRBRF1_TRBU
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B2 B2 POSCLOSE TRRET CCBRBRF1_TRRET
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE B3 B3 CB_FAULT
B4 B4
B5 B5
B6 B6
OR6
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
GUID-434D2001-0D44-45D6-863F-DD1663FCE6C0 V1 EN
The operate signals from ARCSARC1...3 are connected to both trip logic
TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2.
54 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
ARCSARC1
BLOCK OPERATE ARCSARC1_OPERATE
REM_FLT_ARC ARC_FLT_DET ARCSARC1_ARC_FLT_DET
OPR_MODE
ARCSARC2
BLOCK OPERATE ARCSARC2_OPERATE
REM_FLT_ARC ARC_FLT_DET ARCSARC2_ARC_FLT_DET
OPR_MODE
ARCSARC3
BLOCK OPERATE ARCSARC3_OPERATE
REM_FLT_ARC ARC_FLT_DET ARCSARC3_ARC_FLT_DET
OPR_MODE
OR6
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B1 O ARCSARC_OPERATE
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-7D19A436-343A-4D66-8797-546433CBF256 V1 EN
The circuit breaker availability for the autorecloser sequence is expressed with the
CB_READY input in DARREC1. This signal is not connected in the configuration.
The open command from the autorecloser is connected directly to binary output
X100:PO3, whereas the close command is connected directly to binary output
X100:PO1.
REF615 55
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
DARREC1
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE INIT_1 OPEN_CB DARREC1_OPEN_CB
OR6 PHHPTOC2_OPERATE INIT_2 CLOSE_CB DARREC1_CLOSE_CB
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE INIT_3 CMD_WAIT
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B1 O INIT_4 INPRO DARREC1_INPRO
EFPADM2_OPERATE B2 INIT_5 LOCKED
B3 INIT_6 PROT_CRD
B4 DEL_INIT_2 UNSUC_RECL DARREC1_UNSUC_RECL
B5 DEL_INIT_3 AR_ON
B6 DEL_INIT_4 READY
BLK_RECL_T ACTIVE
BLK_RCLM_T
BLK_THERM
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED CB_POS
CB_READY
OR6 INC_SHOTP
INHIBIT_RECL
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O RECL_ON
EFPADM3_OPERATE B2 SYNC
B3
B4
B5
B6
OR6
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B2
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B3
CBXCBR1_SELECTED B4
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE B5 OR
B6
B1 O
B2
OR6
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B1 O
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-4F81507A-B5DF-4FCD-A5F4-B51E9E683345 V1 EN
56 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
ROVPTOV1
BLOCK OPERATE ROVPTOV1_OPERATE
START ROVPTOV1_START
ROVPTOV2
BLOCK OPERATE ROVPTOV2_OPERATE
START ROVPTOV2_START
ROVPTOV3
BLOCK OPERATE ROVPTOV3_OPERATE
START ROVPTOV3_START
OR6
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O ROVPTOV_OPERATE
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B2
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-57D2326C-BF0D-4A76-B414-828A0FAFE035 V1 EN
General start and operate from all the functions are connected to pulse timer
TPGAPC1 for setting the minimum pulse length for the outputs. The output from
TPGAPC1 is connected to binary outputs.
REF615 57
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
OR6
PHLPTOC1_START B1 O
PHHPTOC1_START B2
PHHPTOC2_START B3
PHIPTOC1_START B4
NSPTOC1_START B5
NSPTOC2_START B6
OR6
OR6
B1 O
DEFLPDEF1_START B1 O B2
DEFLPDEF2_START B2 B3
DEFHPDEF1_START B3 B4
B4 B5 TPGAPC1
B5 B6
B6 IN1 OUT1 GENERAL_START_PULSE
IN2 OUT2 GENERAL_OPERATE_PULSE
OR6 OR6
INTRPTEF1_START B1 O B1 O
EFHPTOC1_START B2 B2
PDNSPTOC1_START B3 B3
ROVPTOV1_START B4 B4
ROVPTOV2_START B5 B5
ROVPTOV3_START B6 B6
OR6
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE B3
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B4
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B5
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B6
OR6
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B2
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
OR6
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE B1 O
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B3
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B5
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B6
OR6
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B1 O
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-5473CE1D-D794-485C-B2E2-D4F702603427 V1 EN
The operate signals from the protection functions are connected to the two trip
logics TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2. The output of these trip logic functions are
available at binary outputs X100:PO3 and X100:PO4. Both the trip logic functions
are provided with lockout and latching function, event generation and the trip
signal duration setting. If the lockout operation mode is selected, binary input has
been assigned to RST_LKOUT input of both the trip logic to enable external reset
with a push button.
Three other trip logics TRPPTRC3...4 are also available if the IED is ordered with
high speed binary outputs options.
58 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
TRPPTRC1
OR6 OR6
BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC1_TRIP
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O OPERATE CL_LKOUT
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B2 B2 RST_LKOUT
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B3 B3
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE B4 B4
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B5 B5
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B6 B6
OR6
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B2
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B3
EFPADM1_OPERATE B4
EFPADM2_OPERATE B5
EFPADM3_OPERATE B6
OR6
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE B1 O
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B3
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B5
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B6
OR6
WPWDE1_OPERATE B1 O
WPWDE2_OPERATE B2
WPWDE3_OPERATE B3
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B4
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B5
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B6
GUID-74DA3CAA-F877-4C2E-9390-F444EA6B5F6C V1 EN
REF615 59
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
TRPPTRC2
OR6 OR6
BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC2_TRIP
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O OPERATE CL_LKOUT
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B2 B2 RST_LKOUT
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B3 B3
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE B4 B4
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B5 B5
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B6 B6
OR6
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B2
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B3
EFPADM1_OPERATE B4
EFPADM2_OPERATE B5
EFPADM3_OPERATE B6
OR6
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE B1 O
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B3
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B5
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B6
OR6
B1 O
CCBRBRF1_TRRET B2
WPWDE1_OPERATE B3
WPWDE2_OPERATE B4
WPWDE3_OPERATE B5
B6
OR6
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B1 O
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-AF276C39-F671-459C-9472-7243985B578A V1 EN
The START and OPERATE outputs from the protection stages are routed to trigger
the disturbance recorder or, alternatively, only to be recorded by the disturbance
recorder depending on the parameter settings. Additionally, the selected signals
from different functions and the few binary inputs are also connected to the
disturbance recorder.
60 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
OR6
RDRE1
DEFLPDEF1_START B1 O
WPWDE1_START B2 PHLPTOC1_START C1 TRIGGERED DISTURB_RECORD_TRIGGERED
EFPADM1_START B3 PHHPTOC1_START C2
B4 PHHPTOC2_START C3
B5 PHIPTOC1_START C4
B6 NSPTOC1_START C5
NSPTOC2_START C6
C7
C8
C9
OR6 INTRPTEF1_START C10
EFHPTOC1_START C11
DEFLPDEF2_START B1 O PDNSPTOC1_START C12
WPWDE2_START B2 T1PTTR1_START C13
EFPADM2_START B3 OR6 ROVPTOV1_START C14
B4 ROVPTOV2_START C15
B5 PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O ROVPTOV3_START C16
B6 PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B2 CCBRBRF1_TRRET C17
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE B3 CCBRBRF1_TRBU C18
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B4 C19
B5 C20
B6 C21
OR6 INTRPTEF1_OPERATE C22
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE C23
DEFHPDEF1_START B1 O PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE C24
WPWDE3_START B2 INRPHAR1_BLK2H C25
EFPADM3_START B3 OR T1PTTR1_OPERATE C26
B4 C27
B5 NSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O C28
B6 NSPTOC2_OPERATE B2 ARCSARC1_OPERATE C29
ARCSARC2_OPERATE C30
ARCSARC3_OPERATE C31
DARREC1_INPRO C32
DARREC1_CLOSE_CB C33
OR6 OR DARREC1_UNSUC_RECL C34
X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING C35
WPWDE1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED C36
WPWDE2_OPERATE B2 B2 X120_BI3_CB_OPENED C37
WPWDE3_OPERATE B3 C38
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B4 C39
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B5 C40
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B6 C41
OR6 C42
C43
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O C44
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B2 C45
OR6 ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B3 C46
B4 C47
EFPADM1_OPERATE B1 O B5 C48
EFPADM2_OPERATE B2 B6 C49
EFPADM3_OPERATE B3 C50
B4 C51
B5 C52
B6 C53
OR6 C54
C55
ARCSARC1_ARC_FLT_DET B1 O C56
ARCSARC2_ARC_FLT_DET B2 C57
ARCSARC3_ARC_FLT_DET B3 C58
B4 C59
B5 C60
B6 C61
C62
C63
C64
GUID-00B89248-0B1C-4F2C-AC6B-8680D0CBB382 V1 EN
Two separate trip circuit supervision functions are included: TCSSCBR1 for power
output X100:PO3 and TCSSCBR2 for power output X100:PO4. Both the functions
are blocked by the Master Trip TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2 and the circuit breaker
open signal.
REF615 61
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
TCSSCBR1
TCSSCBR_BLOCKING BLOCK ALARM TCSSCBR1_ALARM
TCSSCBR2
TCSSCBR_BLOCKING BLOCK ALARM TCSSCBR2_ALARM
OR
TCSSCBR1_ALARM B1 O TCSSCBR_ALARM
TCSSCBR2_ALARM B2
GUID-F6281256-8B8D-41D9-AD19-014D604AFCEC V1 EN
OR6
TRPPTRC1_TRIP B1 O TCSSCBR_BLOCKING
TRPPTRC2_TRIP B2
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-F0B3AFC4-7D62-49A3-BF0D-AD03041EA78D V1 EN
The circuit breaker closing is enabled when the ENA_CLOSE input is activated.
The input can be activated using the configuration logic, which is based on the
status of the trip logics. However, other signals can be connected based on the
application needs.
The ITL_BYPASS input can be used, for example, to always enable the closing of
the circuit breaker when the circuit breaker truck is in the test position.
ITL_BYPASS overrides, for example, active interlocking conditions when the
circuit breaker truck is closed in service position.
CBXCBR1
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED POSOPEN SELECTED CBXCBR1_SELECTED
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED POSCLOSE EXE_OP CBXCBR1_EXE_OP
TRUE ENA_OPEN EXE_CL CBXCBR1_EXE_CL
CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSE ENA_CLOSE OPENPOS
FALSE BLK_OPEN CLOSEPOS
BLK_CLOSE OKPOS
CBXBCR1_AU_OPEN AU_OPEN OPEN_ENAD
CBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE AU_CLOSE CLOSE_ENAD
ITL_BYPASS
GUID-FD60A0AB-713C-461F-BB52-7195A5AD23DA V1 EN
62 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
OR
CBXCBR1_EXE_CL B1 O CB_CLOSE_COMMAND
DARREC1_CLOSE_CB B2
GUID-186FE757-E2ED-483B-A0F9-7CF97278BC0C V1 EN
Figure 39: Circuit breaker control logic: Signals for the closing coil of circuit
breaker 1
OR6
TRPPTRC1_TRIP B1 O CB_OPEN_COMMAND
CBXCBR1_EXE_OP B2
DARREC1_OPEN_CB B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-F8B92F5F-5A07-491D-8376-9167A9D69DC1 V1 EN
Figure 40: Circuit breaker control logic: Signals for the opening coil of circuit
breaker 1
NOT
TRPPTRC1_TRIP IN OUT
AND
B1 O CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSE
B2
NOT
TRPPTRC2_TRIP IN OUT
GUID-5BAFB13B-C726-4F27-B8BE-7A6145CDB1A5 V1 EN
The configuration includes the logic for generating circuit breaker external closing
and opening command with the IED in local or remote mode.
Check the logic for the external circuit breaker closing command
and modify it according to the application.
AND
CONTROL_LOCAL B1 O
FALSE B2
OR
B1 O CBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE
B2
AND
CONTROL_REMOTE B1 O
FALSE B2
GUID-8657C398-3CE6-4770-A3B3-240AFA9FD791 V1 EN
AND
CONTROL_LOCAL B1 O
FALSE B2
OR
B1 O CBXBCR1_AU_OPEN
B2
AND
CONTROL_REMOTE B1 O
FALSE B2
GUID-F1457C35-6938-41D7-A3FA-71EECB4E7064 V1 EN
REF615 63
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
The phase current inputs to the IED are measured by the three-phase current
measurement function CMMXU1. The current input is connected to the X120 card
in the back panel. Similarly, the sequence current measurement CSMSQI1
measures the sequence current and the residual current measurement
RESCMMXU1 measures the residual current.
The residual voltage input is connected to the X120 card in the back panel and is
measured by the residual voltage measurement RESVMMXU1.
The measurements can be seen from the LHMI and they are available under the
measurement option in the menu selection. Based on the settings, function blocks
can generate low alarm or warning and high alarm or warning signals for the
measured current values.
CMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
LOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM
GUID-C4DBF3EA-C264-4F60-941B-FAFDADD11315 V1 EN
CSMSQI1
GUID-57A365D0-D629-4DDC-9268-D5D427C6F5A8 V1 EN
RESCMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
GUID-D962598F-BE1F-42E2-AE3D-A20F1F87B01B V1 EN
RESVMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
GUID-F5BC01C6-A8C3-4AA7-A54F-C68DDE881775 V1 EN
FLTMSTA1
BLOCK
CB_CLRD
GUID-14B7A3F2-9DF7-45AE-A63B-298C6F26C616 V1 EN
64 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING
X120 (AIM).X120-Input 1
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
X120 (AIM).X120-Input 2
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED
X120 (AIM).X120-Input 3
GUID-1CC3270B-3A49-43C1-8C2F-0DFAF37FAD58 V1 EN
CB_CLOSE_COMMAND
X100 (PSM).X100-PO1
CCBRBRF1_TRBU
X100 (PSM).X100-PO2
GENERAL_START_PULSE
X100 (PSM).X100-SO1
GENERAL_OPERATE_PULSE
X100 (PSM).X100-SO2
CB_OPEN_COMMAND
X100 (PSM).X100-PO3
TRPPTRC2_TRIP
X100 (PSM).X100-PO4
GUID-B78100E6-F29B-4F6D-9035-56BA646E64FC V1 EN
REF615 65
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
LED1
OK
PHxPTOC_OPERATE ALARM
RESET
LED2
OR6
OK
DEF_OPERATE B1 O ALARM
EFPADM_OPERATE B2 RESET
WPWDE_OPERATE B3
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE B4
B5
B6
LED3
OR
OK
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O ALARM
ROVPTOV_OPERATE B2 RESET
LED4
OR
OK
NSPTOC_OPERATE B1 O ALARM
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B2 RESET
LED5
OK
T1PTTR1_ALARM ALARM
RESET
GUID-E32FB298-A762-4D91-9134-2AD11BA1B12F V1 EN
66 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
LED6
OK
CCBRBRF1_TRBU ALARM
RESET
LED7
OK
DISTURB_RECORD_TRIGGERED ALARM
RESET
LED9
OK
TCSSCBR_ALARM ALARM
RESET
LED10
OK
ARCSARC_OPERATE ALARM
RESET
LED11
OK
DARREC1_INPRO ALARM
RESET
GUID-781E66E9-CE48-4DA6-8159-86BED9295D7C V1 EN
3.4.1 Applications
The standard configuration for non-directional overcurrent and directional earth-
fault protection is mainly intended for cable and overhead-line feeder applications
in isolated and resonant-earthed distribution networks. The configuration also
includes additional options for selecting earth-fault protection based on admittance,
wattmetric or harmonic-based principles.
The IED with a standard configuration is delivered from the factory with default
settings and parameters. The end user flexibility for incoming, outgoing and
internal signal designation within the IED enables this configuration to be further
REF615 67
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
adapted to different primary circuit layouts and the related functionality needs by
modifying the internal functionality using PCM600.
3.4.2 Functions
Uo
Lockout relay A
O
- IED self-supervision
R
L
94/86
U12 0. 0 kV
P 0.00 kW
Q 0.00 kVAr
IL2 0 A
- Local/Remote push button on LHMI
- User management
I ESC Clear
- Web HMI
2×
AND
I2> I2/I1> 3Ith>F 3I>>> O R
Uo Object Ctrl 2)
Ind 3) - I, Io, Uo
3× 3× - Limit value supervision
Yo>→ Po>→ Io>HA CB 1 - - Load profile record
21YN 32N 51NHA - RTD/mA measurement (optional)
DC 2 3
OR OR - Symmetrical components
ES 1 2
1)
Check availability of binary inputs/outputs
from technical documentation Analog interface types 1)
2)
Control and indication function for
primary object Current transformer 4
3)
Status indication function for
primary object Voltage transformer 1
1)
Conventional transformer inputs
3× 18×
Uo> MAP O→I
59G MAP 79
6xRTD REMARKS
2xmA
Optional 3× No. of Calculated OR Alternative
function instances value function to be
Io/Uo defined when
ordering
GUID-5E9640AA-129C-42CB-9E29-5480A9656B10 V1 EN
Connector pins for each input and output are presented in the IED physical
Configuration A
System
HMI
Time
Authorization
connections section.
I ESC Clear
A
O R
L
U12 0. 0 kV
P 0.00 kW
Q 0.00 kVAr
IL2 0 A
I ESC Clear
AND
O R
L
OR
68 AND SUPERVISION
Protocols: REF615
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1 0
IEC 61850-8-1
Modbus® Application
1 0 1 1 0Manual
1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0
0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0
1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
IEC 60870-5-103 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 DNP3 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1
1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0
1 0 1 1 0 1 0 Interfaces: 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
Ethernet: TX (RJ45), FX (LC)
Serial: Serial glass fiber (ST),
RS-485, RS-232/485
D-sub 9, IRIG-B
Redundant protocols:
HSR
PRP
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
REF615 69
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
LED Description
9 Trip circuit supervision alarm
10 Arc protection operate
11 Autoreclose in progress
70 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
REF615 71
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
The analog channels have fixed connections to the different function blocks inside
the IED’s standard configuration. However, the 12 analog channels available for
the disturbance recorder function are freely selectable as a part of the disturbance
recorder’s parameter settings.
The phase currents to the IED are fed from a current transformer. The residual
current to the IED is fed from either residually connected CTs, an external core
balance CT, neutral CT or internally calculated.
The residual voltage to the IED is fed from either the residually connected VTs or
an open delta connected VT.
The IED offers six different settings groups which can be set based on individual
needs. Each group can be activated or deactivated using the setting group settings
available in the IED.
The functional diagrams describe the IEDs protection functionality in detail and
according to the factory set default connections.
Four overcurrent stages are offered for overcurrent and short-circuit protection.
The non-directional instantaneous stage PHIPTOC1 can be blocked by energizing
the binary input X120:BI1.
72 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
PHIPTOC1
X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING BLOCK OPERATE PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START PHIPTOC1_START
PHHPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE PHHPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START PHHPTOC1_START
PHHPTOC2
BLOCK OPERATE PHHPTOC2_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START PHHPTOC2_START
PHLPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE PHLPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START PHLPTOC1_START
OR6
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O PHxPTOC_OPERATE
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE B3
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B4
B5
B6
GUID-421CC220-9CDA-4862-A705-52A7C7E39DF0 V1 EN
The upstream blocking from the start of the overcurrent second high stage
PHHPTOC2 is connected to the binary output X110:SO1. This output can be used
for sending a blocking signal to the relevant overcurrent protection stage of the
IED at the infeeding bay.
OR6
PHHPTOC2_START B1 O UPSTEAM_OC_BLOCKING
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-2A6B241E-751B-4FA1-8D4C-93B5470ADE90 V1 EN
The inrush detection block's (INRPHAR1) output BLK2H enables either blocking
the function or multiplying the active settings for any of the available overcurrent
or earth-fault function blocks.
REF615 73
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
INRPHAR1
BLOCK BLK2H INRPHAR1_BLK2H
GUID-ED765A4F-9F2B-4546-BE25-269CBABC0F9D V1 EN
Two negative sequence overcurrent stages NSPTOC1 and NSPTOC2 are provided
for phase unbalance protection. These functions are used to protect the feeder
against phase unbalance.
NSPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE NSPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START NSPTOC1_START
NSPTOC2
BLOCK OPERATE NSPTOC2_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START NSPTOC2_START
OR
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O NSPTOC_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B2
GUID-825A5CAA-9EEF-433A-9977-D52FF37CBFFC V1 EN
Three stages are provided for directional earth-fault protection. According to the
IED's order code, the directional earth-fault protection method can be based on
conventional directional earth-fault DEFxPDEF only or alternatively together with
admittance criteria EFPADM or wattmetric earth-fault protection WPWDE or
harmonic based earth-fault protection HAEFPTOC1. In addition, there is a
dedicated protection stage INTRPTEF either for transient-based earth-fault
protection or for cable intermittent earth-fault protection in compensated networks.
The binary input X110:BI2 is used for controlling directional earth-fault protection
block's relay characteristic angle (RCA: 0°, -90°) or operation mode (IoSinφ,
IoCosφ) change. The same input is also available for wattmetric protection.
74 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
DEFLPDEF1
BLOCK OPERATE DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START DEFLPDEF1_START
X110_BI2_RCA_CONTROL RCA_CTL
DEFLPDEF2
BLOCK OPERATE DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START DEFLPDEF2_START
X110_BI2_RCA_CONTROL RCA_CTL
DEFHPDEF1
BLOCK OPERATE DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START DEFHPDEF1_START
X110_BI2_RCA_CONTROL RCA_CTL
OR6
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O DEFxPDEF_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B2
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-27CCBD30-6092-47C7-B753-18A7413E4B77 V1 EN
INTRPTEF1
BLOCK OPERATE INTRPTEF1_OPERATE
START INTRPTEF1_START
BLK_EF
GUID-8D6E91C3-C468-487F-8CBA-C02AABCB7B1F V1 EN
REF615 75
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
WPWDE1
BLOCK OPERATE WPWDE1_OPERATE
RCA_CTL START WPWDE1_START
WPWDE2
BLOCK OPERATE WPWDE2_OPERATE
RCA_CTL START WPWDE2_START
WPWDE3
BLOCK OPERATE WPWDE3_OPERATE
RCA_CTL START WPWDE3_START
OR6
WPWDE1_OPERATE B1 O WPWDE_OPERATE
WPWDE2_OPERATE B2
WPWDE3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-A26E1E55-4059-462C-942F-F508E4653100 V1 EN
EFPADM1
BLOCK OPERATE EFPADM1_OPERATE
RELEASE START EFPADM1_START
EFPADM2
BLOCK OPERATE EFPADM2_OPERATE
RELEASE START EFPADM2_START
EFPADM3
BLOCK OPERATE EFPADM3_OPERATE
RELEASE START EFPADM3_START
OR6
EFPADM1_OPERATE B1 O EFPADM_OPERATE
EFPADM2_OPERATE B2
EFPADM3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-47970D0E-B770-43BE-8848-2B156E31D274 V1 EN
76 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
EFHPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE EFHPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START EFHPTOC1_START
GUID-F3F7FE78-72D3-4491-AF23-BA53F8ED35D7 V1 EN
PDNSPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE
START PDNSPTOC1_START
GUID-1B82152F-2E3C-4894-8E9C-8148BE01D12C V1 EN
The thermal overload protection T1PTTR1 detects overloads under varying load
conditions.
T1PTTR1
BLK_OPR OPERATE T1PTTR1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START T1PTTR1_START
TEMP_AMB ALARM T1PTTR1_ALARM
BLK_CLOSE
GUID-EBDA9A91-9075-4D0F-8B3F-E3035732C9B1 V1 EN
The breaker failure protection CCBRBRF1 is initiated via the START input by
number of different protection functions available in the IED. The breaker failure
protection function offers different operating modes associated with the circuit
breaker position and the measured phase and residual currents.
The breaker failure protection function has two operating outputs: TRRET and
TRBU. The TRRET operate output is used for retripping its own breaker through
TRPPTRC2_TRIP. The output TRBU gives a backup trip to the breaker feeding
upstream. For this purpose, the TRBU operate output signal is connected to the
binary output X100:PO2.
CCBRBRF1
OR6 OR6
BLOCK CB_FAULT_AL
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O START TRBU CCBRBRF1_TRBU
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B2 B2 POSCLOSE TRRET CCBRBRF1_TRRET
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE B3 B3 CB_FAULT
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B4 B4
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B5 B5
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B6 B6
OR6
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B2
WPWDE2_OPERATE B3
WPWDE3_OPERATE B4
EFPADM2_OPERATE B5
EFPADM3_OPERATE B6
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
GUID-3CC55117-F6EF-4ABF-BF0E-FFC78F84833A V1 EN
REF615 77
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
The operate signals from ARCSARC1...3 are connected to both trip logic
TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2. If the IED has been ordered with high speed binary
outputs, the individual operate signals from ARCSARC1..3 are connected to
dedicated trip logic TRPPTRC3...5. The outputs of TRPPTRC3...5 are available at
high speed outputs X110:HSO1, X110:HSO2, and X110:HSO3 respectively.
78 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
ARCSARC1
BLOCK OPERATE ARCSARC1_OPERATE
REM_FLT_ARC ARC_FLT_DET ARCSARC1_ARC_FLT_DET
OPR_MODE
ARCSARC2
BLOCK OPERATE ARCSARC2_OPERATE
REM_FLT_ARC ARC_FLT_DET ARCSARC2_ARC_FLT_DET
OPR_MODE
ARCSARC3
BLOCK OPERATE ARCSARC3_OPERATE
REM_FLT_ARC ARC_FLT_DET ARCSARC3_ARC_FLT_DET
OPR_MODE
OR6
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B1 O ARCSARC_OPERATE
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-D5676839-45F1-40BB-A553-E3C4A0A1E1A0 V1 EN
TRPPTRC3
BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC3_TRIP
ARCSARC1_OPERATE OPERATE CL_LKOUT
RST_LKOUT
TRPPTRC4
BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC4_TRIP
ARCSARC2_OPERATE OPERATE CL_LKOUT
RST_LKOUT
TRPPTRC5
BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC5_TRIP
ARCSARC3_OPERATE OPERATE CL_LKOUT
RST_LKOUT
GUID-706BD2A2-4F97-4CFD-B3D7-CAE40BFBB820 V1 EN
REF615 79
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
The circuit breaker availability for the autorecloser sequence is expressed with the
CB_READY input in DARREC1. The signal, and other required signals, are
connected to the CB spring charged binary inputs in this configuration. The open
command from the autorecloser is connected directly to the binary output
X100:PO3, whereas the close command is connected directly to the binary output
X100:PO1.
DARREC1
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE INIT_1 OPEN_CB DARREC1_OPEN_CB
OR6 PHHPTOC2_OPERATE INIT_2 CLOSE_CB DARREC1_CLOSE_CB
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE INIT_3 CMD_WAIT
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B1 O INIT_4 INPRO DARREC1_INPRO
EFPADM2_OPERATE B2 INIT_5 LOCKED
WPWDE2_OPERATE B3 INIT_6 PROT_CRD
B4 DEL_INIT_2 UNSUC_RECL DARREC1_UNSUC_RECL
B5 DEL_INIT_3 AR_ON
B6 DEL_INIT_4 READY
BLK_RECL_T ACTIVE
BLK_RCLM_T
BLK_THERM
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED CB_POS
OR6 X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED CB_READY
INC_SHOTP
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O INHIBIT_RECL
EFPADM3_OPERATE B2 RECL_ON
WPWDE3_OPERATE B3 SYNC
B4
B5
B6
OR6
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B2
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B3
CBXCBR1_SELECTED B4
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE B5 OR
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM B6
B1 O
B2
OR6
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B1 O
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-14FC7626-21FE-4F3C-8DCA-36561847D355 V1 EN
80 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
ROVPTOV1
BLOCK OPERATE ROVPTOV1_OPERATE
START ROVPTOV1_START
ROVPTOV2
BLOCK OPERATE ROVPTOV2_OPERATE
START ROVPTOV2_START
ROVPTOV3
BLOCK OPERATE ROVPTOV3_OPERATE
START ROVPTOV3_START
OR6
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O ROVPTOV_OPERATE
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B2
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-23A63895-A476-4096-BD6D-D0CE711EEC5D V1 EN
General start and operate from all the functions are connected to pulse timer
TPGAPC for setting the minimum pulse length for the outputs. The output from
TPGAPC is connected to binary outputs.
OR6 OR6 TPGAPC1
PHLPTOC1_START B1 O B1 O IN1 OUT1 GENERAL_START_PULSE
PHHPTOC1_START B2 B2 IN2 OUT2 GENERAL_OPERATE_PULSE
PHHPTOC2_START B3 B3
PHIPTOC1_START B4 B4
NSPTOC1_START B5 B5
NSPTOC2_START B6 B6
OR6
OR6 OR6
DEFLPDEF1_START B1 O
DEFLPDEF2_START B2 PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O
DEFHPDEF1_START B3 PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B2 B2
EFPADM1_START B4 PHHPTOC2_OPERATE B3 B3
EFPADM2_START B5 PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B4 B4
EFPADM3_START B6 NSPTOC1_OPERATE B5 B5
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B6 B6
OR6
OR6
INTRPTEF1_START B1 O
EFHPTOC1_START B2 DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O
PDNSPTOC1_START B3 DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B2
ROVPTOV1_START B4 DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B3
ROVPTOV2_START B5 EFPADM1_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV3_START B6 EFPADM2_OPERATE B5
EFPADM3_OPERATE B6
OR6
OR6
WPWDE1_START B1 O
WPWDE2_START B2 INTRPTEF1_OPERATE B1 O
WPWDE3_START B3 EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
B4 PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B3
B5 ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B4
B6 ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B5
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B6
OR6
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B1 O
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
WPWDE1_OPERATE B4
WPWDE2_OPERATE B5
WPWDE3_OPERATE B6
GUID-13C6E104-D2D6-49B6-A86D-16208A842F59 V2 EN
The operate signals from the protection functions are connected to the two trip
logics TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2. The output of these trip logic functions is
available at binary output X100:PO3 and X100:PO4. The trip logic functions are
provided with a lockout and latching function, event generation and the trip signal
duration setting. If the lockout operation mode is selected, the binary input has
REF615 81
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
been assigned to RST_LKOUT input of both the trip logic to enable external reset
with a push button. Three other trip logics TRPPTRC3...4 are also available if the
IED is ordered with high speed binary outputs options.
TRPPTRC1
OR6 OR6
BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC1_TRIP
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O OPERATE CL_LKOUT
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B2 B2 RST_LKOUT
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B3 B3
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE B4 B4
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B5 B5
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B6 B6
OR6
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B2
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B3
EFPADM1_OPERATE B4
EFPADM2_OPERATE B5
EFPADM3_OPERATE B6
OR6
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE B1 O
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B3
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B5
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B6
OR6
WPWDE1_OPERATE B1 O
WPWDE2_OPERATE B2
WPWDE3_OPERATE B3
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B4
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B5
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B6
GUID-AF22589C-B208-45F8-ADB9-D925C183367A V1 EN
TRPPTRC2
OR6 OR6
BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC2_TRIP
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O OPERATE CL_LKOUT
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B2 B2 RST_LKOUT
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B3 B3
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE B4 B4
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B5 B5
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B6 B6
OR6
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B2
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B3
EFPADM1_OPERATE B4
EFPADM2_OPERATE B5
EFPADM3_OPERATE B6
OR6
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE B1 O
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B3
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B5
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B6
OR6
B1 O
CCBRBRF1_TRRET B2
WPWDE1_OPERATE B3
WPWDE2_OPERATE B4
WPWDE3_OPERATE B5
B6
OR6
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B1 O
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-1D960595-DAB7-44B3-8D6A-36CB54AAFCB6 V1 EN
The START and OPERATE outputs from the protection stages are routed to trigger
the disturbance recorder or, alternatively, only to be recorded by the disturbance
82 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
GUID-9490DCA4-54F2-4490-990B-F9CB5419CACD V2 EN
The circuit breaker condition monitoring function SSCBR1 supervises the switch
status based on the connected binary input information and the measured current
levels. SSCBR1 introduces various supervision methods.
SSCBR1
BLOCK TRV_T_OP_ALM SSCBR1_TRV_T_OP_ALM
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED POSOPEN TRV_T_CL_ALM SSCBR1_TRV_T_CL_ALM
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED POSCLOSE SPR_CHR_ALM SSCBR1_SPR_CHR_ALM
CB_OPEN_COMMAND OPEN_CB_EXE OPR_ALM SSCBR1_OPR_ALM
CB_CLOSE_COMMAND CLOSE_CB_EXE OPR_LO SSCBR1_OPR_LO
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM PRES_ALM_IN IPOW_ALM SSCBR1_IPOW_ALM
PRES_LO_IN IPOW_LO SSCBR1_IPOW_LO
CB_SPRING_DISCHARGED SPR_CHR_ST CB_LIFE_ALM SSCBR1_CB_LIFE_ALM
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED SPR_CHR MON_ALM SSCBR1_MON_ALM
RST_IPOW PRES_ALM SSCBR1_PRES_ALM
RST_CB_WEAR PRES_LO SSCBR1_PRES_LO
RST_TRV_T OPENPOS
RST_SPR_T INVALIDPOS
CLOSEPOS
GUID-D287CC35-A7E0-4780-BA09-377C8406B828 V1 EN
REF615 83
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
OR6
SSCBR1_TRV_T_OP_ALM B1 O
SSCBR1_TRV_T_CL_ALM B2
SSCBR1_SPR_CHR_ALM B3
SSCBR1_OPR_ALM B4
SSCBR1_OPR_LO B5 OR
SSCBR1_IPOW_ALM B6
B1 O SSCBR1_ALARMS
B2
OR6
SSCBR1_IPOW_LO B1 O
SSCBR1_CB_LIFE_ALM B2
SSCBR1_MON_ALM B3
SSCBR1_PRES_ALM B4
SSCBR1_PRES_LO B5
B6
GUID-ED84A0BD-A150-4BBA-8A82-8AC4B3CAE673 V1 EN
NOT
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED IN OUT CB_SPRING_DISCHARGED
GUID-7B9FF17E-827E-40A4-B1D2-F13E236D0381 V1 EN
Two separate trip circuit supervision functions are included, TCSSCBR1 for power
output X100:PO3 and TCSSCBR2 for power output X100:PO4. Both the functions
are blocked by the Master Trip TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2 and the circuit breaker
open signal.
84 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
TCSSCBR1
TCSSCBR_BLOCKING BLOCK ALARM TCSSCBR1_ALARM
TCSSCBR2
TCSSCBR_BLOCKING BLOCK ALARM TCSSCBR2_ALARM
OR
TCSSCBR1_ALARM B1 O TCSSCBR_ALARM
TCSSCBR2_ALARM B2
GUID-0B65C9FD-DEB8-4895-82A8-725A1A3E7896 V1 EN
OR6
TRPPTRC1_TRIP B1 O TCSSCBR_BLOCKING
TRPPTRC2_TRIP B2
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-22D4A3A4-01E4-4EDD-A9A9-FB31F956B9A2 V1 EN
Two types of disconnector and earthing switch function blocks are available.
DCSXSWI1...3 and ESSXSWI1...2 are status only type, and DCXSWI1...2 and
ESXSWI1 are controllable type. By default, the status only blocks are connected in
standard configuration. The disconnector (CB truck) and line side earthing switch
status information are connected to DCSXSWI1 and ESSXSI1 respectively.
DCSXSWI1
X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_TEST POSOPEN OPENPOS
X110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_SERVICE POSCLOSE CLOSEPOS
OKPOS DCSXSWI1_OKPOS
GUID-04F8826B-9EF7-4249-8BD9-9FA85114918C V1 EN
ESSXSWI1
X110_BI8_ES1_OPENED POSOPEN OPENPOS ESSXSWI1_OPENPOS
X110_BI7_ES1_CLOSED POSCLOSE CLOSEPOS
OKPOS
GUID-201FDE00-C859-42C2-B27A-15555AF717DB V1 EN
The circuit breaker closing is enabled when the ENA_CLOSE input is activated.
The input can be activated by the configuration logic, which is a combination of
REF615 85
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
the disconnector or breaker truck and earth-switch position status, status of the trip
logics, gas pressure alarm and circuit-breaker spring charging status.
The OKPOS output from DCSXSWI defines whether the disconnector or breaker
truck is either open (in test position) or close (in service position). This output,
together with the open earth-switch and non-active trip signals, activates the close-
enable signal to the circuit breaker control function block. The open operation for
circuit breaker is always enabled.
The ITL_BYPASS input can be used, for example, to always enable the closing of
the circuit breaker when the circuit breaker truck is in the test position.
ITL_BYPASS overrides, for example, active interlocking conditions when the
circuit breaker truck is closed in service position.
CBXCBR1
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED POSOPEN SELECTED CBXCBR1_SELECTED
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED POSCLOSE EXE_OP CBXCBR1_EXE_OP
TRUE ENA_OPEN EXE_CL CBXCBR1_EXE_CL
CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSE ENA_CLOSE OPENPOS
FALSE BLK_OPEN CLOSEPOS
BLK_CLOSE OKPOS
CBXBCR1_AU_OPEN AU_OPEN OPEN_ENAD
CBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE AU_CLOSE CLOSE_ENAD
ITL_BYPASS
GUID-54C9EDF5-8EE3-4C65-85A8-D098A2EC7326 V1 EN
OR
CBXCBR1_EXE_CL B1 O CB_CLOSE_COMMAND
DARREC1_CLOSE_CB B2
GUID-CBE9421A-1896-448B-903A-86C63FAC47E9 V1 EN
Figure 80: Circuit breaker control logic: Signals for closing coil of circuit breaker
OR6
CBXCBR1_EXE_OP B1 O CB_OPEN_COMMAND
TRPPTRC1_TRIP B2
DARREC1_OPEN_CB B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-E3C59277-527E-48D1-9815-0E1416827C6F V1 EN
Figure 81: Circuit breaker control logic: Signals for opening coil of circuit breaker
86 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
NOT AND6
TRPPTRC1_TRIP IN OUT B1 O CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSE
B2
B3
B4
NOT B5
B6
TRPPTRC2_TRIP IN OUT
NOT
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM IN OUT
DCSXSWI1_OKPOS
ESSXSWI1_OPENPOS
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED
GUID-3C981DB3-EFC0-490C-AE96-2C5B16CC7E00 V1 EN
The configuration includes logic for generating circuit breaker external closing and
opening command with the IED in local or remote mode.
Check the logic for the external circuit breaker closing command
and modify it according to the application.
AND
CONTROL_LOCAL B1 O
FALSE B2
OR
B1 O CBXBCR1_AU_OPEN
B2
AND
CONTROL_REMOTE B1 O
FALSE B2
GUID-73713DC3-F7C8-4821-AF9D-2A7568AFE963 V1 EN
AND
CONTROL_LOCAL B1 O
FALSE B2
OR
B1 O CBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE
B2
AND
CONTROL_REMOTE B1 O
FALSE B2
GUID-5BED9700-F389-4A3E-AE41-6854954D5819 V1 EN
The phase current inputs to the IED are measured by the three-phase current
measurement function CMMXU1. The current input is connected to the X120 card
in the back panel. Similarly, the sequence measurement function CSMSQI1
measures the sequence current and the residual current measurement
RESCMMXU1 measures the residual current.
REF615 87
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
The residual voltage input is connected to the X120 card in the back panel and is
measured by the residual voltage measurement RESVMMXU1. The measurements
can be seen from the LHMI and they are available under the measurement option in
the menu selection. Based on the settings, function blocks can generate low alarm
or warning and high alarm or warning signals for the measured current values.
CMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
LOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM
GUID-CE8A28FF-D46E-4C19-9ED9-B9EF3AF4D941 V1 EN
CSMSQI1
GUID-55E03474-FC5C-4A69-8018-2E80D64228FE V1 EN
RESCMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
GUID-D547C128-B4B7-42B0-AA05-2565E19D2EFD V1 EN
RESVMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
GUID-C392DC8A-6AD6-4335-87C5-CD2F97C69988 V1 EN
FLTMSTA1
BLOCK
CB_CLRD
GUID-32299E4B-6A50-4AD3-AB96-7D15F87A31F1 V1 EN
LDPMSTA1
RSTMEM MEM_WARN
MEM_ALARM
GUID-B8E2FD33-E4FE-4511-ACCC-1F4848493010 V1 EN
88 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 2 OR
B1 O X110_BI2_RCA_CONTROL
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 2
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 3 OR
B1 O X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 3
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 4 OR
B1 O X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 4
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 5 OR
B1 O X110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_SERVICE
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 5
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 6 OR
B1 O X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_TEST
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 6
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 7 OR
B1 O X110_BI7_ES1_CLOSED
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 7
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 8 OR
B1 O X110_BI8_ES1_OPENED
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 8
GUID-C68E8E24-23B4-414D-8D6A-57C0D7A11076 V2 EN
X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING
X120 (AIM).X120-Input 1
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
X120 (AIM).X120-Input 2
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED
X120 (AIM).X120-Input 3
GUID-6AC6985E-3FD7-4283-9184-BD35FED04EC7 V1 EN
REF615 89
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
UPSTEAM_OC_BLOCKING
X110 (BIO).X110-SO1
TRPPTRC3_TRIP
X110 (BIO-H).X110-HSO1
OC_OPERATE_PULSE
X110 (BIO).X110-SO2
TRPPTRC4_TRIP
X110 (BIO-H).X110-HSO2
EF_OPERATE_PULSE
X110 (BIO).X110-SO3
TRPPTRC5_TRIP
X110 (BIO-H).X110-HSO3
GUID-3A0C4EDB-878A-4282-86B2-894775BBEEE5 V2 EN
CB_CLOSE_COMMAND
X100 (PSM).X100-PO1
CCBRBRF1_TRBU
X100 (PSM).X100-PO2
GENERAL_START_PULSE
X100 (PSM).X100-SO1
GENERAL_OPERATE_PULSE
X100 (PSM).X100-SO2
CB_OPEN_COMMAND
X100 (PSM).X100-PO3
TRPPTRC2_TRIP
X100 (PSM).X100-PO4
GUID-C51C47D5-DD89-4F9E-8B91-9A8794033464 V1 EN
90 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
LED1
OK
PHxPTOC_OPERATE ALARM
RESET
LED2
OR6
OK
DEF_OPERATE B1 O ALARM
EFPADM_OPERATE B2 RESET
WPWDE_OPERATE B3
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE B4
B5
B6
LED3
OR
OK
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O ALARM
ROVPTOV_OPERATE B2 RESET
LED4
OR
OK
NSPTOC_OPERATE B1 O ALARM
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B2 RESET
LED5
OK
T1PTTR1_ALARM ALARM
RESET
GUID-CD2C4F23-C15B-4A9A-8DB8-A7B862A221D7 V1 EN
REF615 91
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
LED6
OK
CCBRBRF1_TRBU ALARM
RESET
LED7
OK
DISTURB_RECORD_TRIGGERED ALARM
RESET
LED8
OK
SSCBR1_ALARMS ALARM
RESET
LED9
OK
TCSSCBR_ALARM ALARM
RESET
LED10
OK
ARCSARC_OPERATE ALARM
RESET
LED11
OK
DARREC1_INPRO ALARM
RESET
GUID-5545434B-1C8A-45A3-992C-567617DAE58A V1 EN
The configuration also includes the overcurrent operate and earth-fault operate
logic. The operate logics are connected to the pulse timer TPGAPC2 for setting the
minimum pulse length for the outputs. The output from TPGAPC2 is connected to
binary outputs.
TPGAPC2
PHxPTOC_OPERATE IN1 OUT1 OC_OPERATE_PULSE
IN2 OUT2 EF_OPERATE_PULSE
OR6
DEFxPDEF_OPERATE B1 O
EFPADM_OPERATE B2
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE B3
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV_OPERATE B5
WPWDE_OPERATE B6
GUID-A32D6C19-6658-4040-9976-BB21D936A346 V1 EN
Figure 96: Timer logic for overcurrent and earth-fault operate pulse
92 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
3.5.1 Applications
The standard configuration for non-directional overcurrent and non-directional earth-
fault protection is mainly intended for cable and overhead-line feeder applications
in directly or resistance-earthed distribution networks.
The IED with a standard configuration is delivered from the factory with default
settings and parameters. The end user flexibility for incoming, outgoing and
internal signal designation within the IED enables this configuration to be further
adapted to different primary circuit layouts and the related functionality needs by
modifying the internal functionality using PCM600.
REF615 93
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
3.5.2 Functions
Lockout relay A
O
- Local/Remote push button on LHMI
R
L
94/86
U12 0. 0 kV
P 0.00 kW
Q 0.00 kVAr
IL2 0 A
- User management
- Web HMI
I ESC Clear
2×
AND
I2> I2/I1> 3Ith>F 3I>>> O R
18× - I, Io
MAP Object Ctrl 2)
Ind 3)
- Limit value supervision
MAP CB 1 - - Symmetrical components
DC - -
Analog interface types 1)
ES - -
1)
Check availability of binary inputs/outputs
Current transformer 4
from technical documentation Voltage transformer -
2)
Control and indication function for
primary object 1)
Conventional transformer inputs
3)
Status indication function for
primary object
O→I
79
REMARKS
Optional 3× No. of Calculated OR Alternative
function instances value function to be
Io/Uo defined when
ordering
GUID-5404DAD5-4FE4-4E91-8A18-31CC0812A09C V1 EN
Connector pins for each input and output are presented in the IED physical
Configuration A
System
HMI
Time
Authorization
connections section.
I ESC Clear
A
O R
L
U12 0. 0 kV
P 0.00 kW
Q 0.00 kVAr
IL2 0 A
I ESC Clear
AND
O R
L
OR
94 REF615
1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
Ethernet: TX (RJ45), FX (LC)
Serial: Serial glass fiber (ST),
Application Manual
RS-485, RS-232/485
D-sub 9, IRIG-B
Redundant protocols:
HSR
PRP
RSTP
REF615 95
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
Channel Description
5 -
6 -
7 -
8 -
9 -
10 -
11 -
12 -
96 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
The analog channels have fixed connections to the different function blocks inside
the IED’s standard configuration. However, the 12 analog channels available for
the disturbance recorder function are freely selectable as a part of the disturbance
recorder’s parameter settings.
The phase currents to the IED are fed from a current transformer. The residual
current to the IED is fed from either residually connected CTs, an external core
balance CT, neutral CT or internally calculated.
The IED offers six different settings groups which can be set based on individual
needs. Each group can be activated or deactivated using the setting group settings
available in the IED.
The functional diagrams describe the IEDs protection functionality in detail and
according to the factory set default connections.
REF615 97
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
Four non-directional overcurrent stages are offered for overcurrent and short-
circuit protection. The non-directional instantaneous stage PHIPTOC1 can be
blocked by energizing the binary input X120:BI1.
PHIPTOC1
X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING BLOCK OPERATE PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START PHIPTOC1_START
PHHPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE PHHPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START PHHPTOC1_START
PHHPTOC2
BLOCK OPERATE PHHPTOC2_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START PHHPTOC2_START
PHLPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE PHLPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START PHLPTOC1_START
OR6
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O PHxPTOC_OPERATE
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE B3
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B4
B5
B6
GUID-FED7D122-DE13-4004-8273-906D289F7EBA V1 EN
The inrush detection block's (INRPHAR1) output BLK2H enables either blocking
the function or multiplying the active settings for any of the available overcurrent
or earth-fault function blocks.
INRPHAR1
BLOCK BLK2H INRPHAR1_BLK2H
GUID-D54BF44E-9EBD-4C83-ABDD-49BB5BB6373E V1 EN
Two negative sequence overcurrent stages NSPTOC1 and NSPTOC2 are provided
for phase unbalance protection. These functions are used to protect the feeder
against phase unbalance.
98 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
NSPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE NSPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START NSPTOC1_START
NSPTOC2
BLOCK OPERATE NSPTOC2_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START NSPTOC2_START
OR
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O NSPTOC_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B2
GUID-A0E1F246-E42C-4732-B0DE-BDC3F4A16CDC V1 EN
Four stages are provided for non-directional earth-fault protection. One stage is
dedicated to sensitive earth-fault protection EFLPTOC2.
EFIPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE EFIPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START EFIPTOC1_START
EFHPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE EFHPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START EFHPTOC1_START
EFLPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE EFLPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START EFLPTOC1_START
OR6
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O EFxPTOC_OPERATE
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE B2
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-2540474C-37D6-4706-A740-2D0334DA26C2 V1 EN
EFLPTOC2
BLOCK OPERATE EFLPTOC2_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START EFLPTOC2_START
GUID-D4A930C6-E4C8-41DA-BF3D-07E908AC1FCD V1 EN
REF615 99
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
PDNSPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE
START PDNSPTOC1_START
GUID-72DBEEFC-1AD7-4930-A949-A340CF2767AA V1 EN
The thermal overload protection T1PTTR1 detects overloads under varying load
conditions.
T1PTTR1
BLK_OPR OPERATE T1PTTR1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START T1PTTR1_START
TEMP_AMB ALARM T1PTTR1_ALARM
BLK_CLOSE
GUID-59CDFFD0-91B8-4746-B478-32FC628A357D V1 EN
The breaker failure protection CCBRBRF1 is initiated via the START input by
number of different protection functions available in the IED. The breaker failure
protection function offers different operating modes associated with the circuit
breaker position and the measured phase and residual currents.
The breaker failure protection function has two operating outputs: TRRET and
TRBU. The TRRET operate output is used for retripping its own breaker through
TRPPTRC2_TRIP. The TRBU output is used to give a backup trip to the breaker
feeding upstream. For this purpose, the TRBU operate output signal is connected to
the binary output X100:PO2.
CCBRBRF1
OR6 OR6
BLOCK CB_FAULT_AL
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O START TRBU CCBRBRF1_TRBU
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B2 B2 POSCLOSE TRRET CCBRBRF1_TRRET
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE B3 B3 CB_FAULT
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE B4 B4
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B5 B5
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE B6 B6
OR6
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B1 O
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
GUID-6AB0BAF9-2B09-46D6-94DB-EBF6EF3F113A V1 EN
The operate signals from ARCSARC1...3 are connected to both trip logic
TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2.
100 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
ARCSARC1
BLOCK OPERATE ARCSARC1_OPERATE
REM_FLT_ARC ARC_FLT_DET ARCSARC1_ARC_FLT_DET
OPR_MODE
ARCSARC2
BLOCK OPERATE ARCSARC2_OPERATE
REM_FLT_ARC ARC_FLT_DET ARCSARC2_ARC_FLT_DET
OPR_MODE
ARCSARC3
BLOCK OPERATE ARCSARC3_OPERATE
REM_FLT_ARC ARC_FLT_DET ARCSARC3_ARC_FLT_DET
OPR_MODE
OR6
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B1 O ARCSARC_OPERATE
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-2E27AA26-07BE-410A-9BB4-FDF62B54D644 V1 EN
The circuit breaker availability for the autorecloser sequence is expressed with the
CB_READY input in DARREC1. This signal is not connected in the configuration.
The open command from the autorecloser is directly connected to binary output
X100:PO3, whereas close command is connected directly to binary output X100:PO1.
REF615 101
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
DARREC1
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE INIT_1 OPEN_CB DARREC1_OPEN_CB
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE INIT_2 CLOSE_CB DARREC1_CLOSE_CB
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE INIT_3 CMD_WAIT
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE INIT_4 INPRO DARREC1_INPRO
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE INIT_5 LOCKED
INIT_6 PROT_CRD
DEL_INIT_2 UNSUC_RECL DARREC1_UNSUC_RECL
DEL_INIT_3 AR_ON
DEL_INIT_4 READY
BLK_RECL_T ACTIVE
BLK_RCLM_T
BLK_THERM
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED CB_POS
CB_READY
INC_SHOTP
INHIBIT_RECL
OR6 RECL_ON
SYNC
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B2
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B3
CBXCBR1_SELECTED B4
B5 OR
B6
B1 O
B2
OR6
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B1 O
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-4DA43380-6D91-47AE-BB5C-56BCE03BEA4B V1 EN
General start and operate from all the functions are connected to pulse timer
TPGAPC for setting the minimum pulse length for the outputs. The output from
TPGAPC is connected to the binary outputs.
OR6
PHLPTOC1_START B1 O
PHHPTOC1_START B2
PHHPTOC2_START B3
PHIPTOC1_START B4
NSPTOC1_START B5
NSPTOC2_START B6
OR6
OR6
B1 O
EFLPTOC1_START B1 O B2
EFLPTOC2_START B2 B3
EFIPTOC1_START B3 B4
EFHPTOC1_START B4 B5 TPGAPC1
PDNSPTOC1_START B5 B6
B6 IN1 OUT1 GENERAL_START
IN2 OUT2 GENERAL_OPERATE
OR6 OR6
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B2 B2
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE B3 B3
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B4 B4
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B5 B5
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B6 B6
OR6
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B3
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE B4
EFLPTOC2_OPERATE B5
B6
OR6
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B1 O
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-ED986761-5FC9-4F1B-8D27-8B3AF824133F V1 EN
The operate signals from the protection functions are connected to the two trip
logics TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2. The output of these trip logic functions is
available at binary output X100:PO3 and X100:PO4. The trip logic functions are
provided with lockout and latching function, event generation and the trip signal
duration setting. If the lockout operation mode is selected, the binary input
X120:BI4 has been assigned to RST_LKOUT input of both the trip logic to enable
external reset with a push button.
102 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
TRPPTRC1
OR6 OR6
BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC1_TRIP
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O OPERATE CL_LKOUT
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B2 B2 RST_LKOUT
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B3 B3
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE B4 B4
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B5 B5
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B6 B6
OR6
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE B3
EFLPTOC2_OPERATE B4
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B5
B6
OR6
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B1 O
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
X120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT
GUID-EF986953-A224-44E3-974B-6AD5E269FB2B V1 EN
TRPPTRC2
OR6 OR6
BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC2_TRIP
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O OPERATE CL_LKOUT
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B2 B2 RST_LKOUT
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B3 B3
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE B4 B4
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B5 B5
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B6 B6
OR6
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B2
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE B3
EFLPTOC2_OPERATE B4
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE B5
CCBRBRF1_TRRET B6
OR6
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B1 O
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
X120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT
GUID-0E184AB6-326B-4311-8022-CE8733342975 V1 EN
The START and the OPERATE outputs from the protection stages are routed to
trigger the disturbance recorder or, alternatively, only to be recorded by the
disturbance recorder depending on the parameter settings. Additionally, the
selected signals from different functions and few binary inputs are also connected
to the disturbance recorder.
REF615 103
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
RDRE1
PHLPTOC1_START C1 TRIGGERED DISTURB_RECORD_TRIGGERED
PHHPTOC1_START C2
PHHPTOC2_START C3
PHIPTOC1_START C4
NSPTOC1_START C5
NSPTOC2_START C6
EFLPTOC1_START C7
EFHPTOC1_START C8
EFIPTOC1_START C9
EFLPTOC2_START C10
C11
PDNSPTOC1_START C12
T1PTTR1_START C13
OR6 CCBRBRF1_TRRET C14
CCBRBRF1_TRBU C15
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O C16
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B2 C17
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE B3 C18
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B4 C19
B5 EFLPTOC2_OPERATE C20
B6 PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE C21
INRPHAR1_BLK2H C22
T1PTTR1_OPERATE C23
C24
ARCSARC1_OPERATE C25
OR ARCSARC2_OPERATE C26
ARCSARC3_OPERATE C27
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O DARREC1_INPRO C28
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B2 DARREC1_CLOSE_CB C29
DARREC1_UNSUC_RECL C30
X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING C31
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED C32
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED C33
OR6 C34
C35
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O C36
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2 C37
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE B3 C38
B4 C39
B5 C40
B6 C41
C42
C43
C44
C45
OR6 C46
C47
ARCSARC1_ARC_FLT_DET B1 O C48
ARCSARC2_ARC_FLT_DET B2 C49
ARCSARC3_ARC_FLT_DET B3 C50
B4 C51
B5 C52
B6 C53
C54
C55
C56
C57
C58
C59
C60
C61
C62
C63
C64
GUID-8F5ACED1-E0E7-46A6-A35B-FCA6B69D5722 V2 EN
Two separate trip circuit supervision functions are included: TCSSCBR1 for power
output X100:PO3 and TCSSCBR2 for power output X100:PO4. Both functions are
blocked by the Master Trip TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2 and the circuit breaker
open signal.
104 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
TCSSCBR1
TCSSCBR_BLOCKING BLOCK ALARM TCSSCBR1_ALARM
TCSSCBR2
TCSSCBR_BLOCKING BLOCK ALARM TCSSCBR2_ALARM
OR
TCSSCBR1_ALARM B1 O TCSSCBR_ALARM
TCSSCBR2_ALARM B2
GUID-74BD5A42-E773-4714-9EDF-97F22B96687A V1 EN
OR6
TRPPTRC1_TRIP B1 O TCSSCBR_BLOCKING
TRPPTRC2_TRIP B2
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-1D7B03CB-17B8-4B99-AAE9-9825BC9B0322 V1 EN
The circuit breaker closing is enabled when the ENA_CLOSE input is activated.
The input can be activated using the configuration logic, which is based on the
status of the trip logics. However, other signals can be connected based on the
application needs.
The ITL_BYPASS input can be used, for example, to always enable the closing of
the circuit breaker when the circuit breaker truck is in the test position.
ITL_BYPASS overrides, for example, active interlocking conditions when the
circuit breaker truck is closed in service position.
REF615 105
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
CBXCBR1
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED POSOPEN SELECTED CBXCBR1_SELECTED
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED POSCLOSE EXE_OP CBXCBR1_EXE_OP
TRUE ENA_OPEN EXE_CL CBXCBR1_EXE_CL
CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSE ENA_CLOSE OPENPOS
FALSE BLK_OPEN CLOSEPOS
BLK_CLOSE OKPOS
CBXBCR1_AU_OPEN AU_OPEN OPEN_ENAD
CBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE AU_CLOSE CLOSE_ENAD
ITL_BYPASS
GUID-8C73B177-754E-4AD7-9897-C78E6D2C02ED V1 EN
OR
CBXCBR1_EXE_CL B1 O CB_CLOSE_COMMAND
DARREC1_CLOSE_CB B2
GUID-8409FB29-60F4-418E-9E13-DE218B4FB87B V1 EN
Figure 115: Circuit breaker control logic: Signal for closing of circuit breaker 1
OR6
CBXCBR1_EXE_OP B1 O CB_OPEN_COMMAND
TRPPTRC1_TRIP B2
DARREC1_OPEN_CB B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-DEB21767-B0D9-4A3B-8601-8C108AE0B706 V1 EN
Figure 116: Circuit breaker control logic: Signal for opening of circuit breaker 1
NOT
TRPPTRC1_TRIP IN OUT
AND
B1 O CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSE
B2
NOT
TRPPTRC2_TRIP IN OUT
GUID-860F40F5-18B2-48E3-B38F-7225A5F04449 V1 EN
The configuration includes logic for generating circuit breaker external closing and
opening command with the IED in local or remote mode.
Check the logic for the external circuit breaker closing command
and modify it according to the application.
106 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
AND
CONTROL_LOCAL B1 O
FALSE B2
OR
B1 O CBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE
B2
AND
CONTROL_REMOTE B1 O
FALSE B2
GUID-D25A5AD0-E5BF-476A-B844-9701D5EC44E7 V1 EN
AND
CONTROL_LOCAL B1 O
FALSE B2
OR
B1 O CBXBCR1_AU_OPEN
B2
AND
CONTROL_REMOTE B1 O
FALSE B2
GUID-DEFD10CB-6772-4DE5-952C-887F4E0CCFF2 V1 EN
The phase current inputs to the IED are measured by the three-phase current
measurement function CMMXU1. The current input is connected to the X120 card
in the back panel. Similarly, the sequence current measurement CSMSQI1
measures the sequence current and the residual current measurement
RESCMMXU1 measures the residual current.
The measurements can be seen from the LHMI and they are available under the
measurement option in the menu selection. Based on the settings, function blocks
can generate low alarm or warning and high alarm or warning signals for the
measured current values.
CMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
LOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM
GUID-91927236-4B19-4AF3-B708-E09EC75FC246 V1 EN
RESCMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
GUID-5A0C20F8-9B68-4104-9A45-0AE14A961904 V1 EN
CSMSQI1
GUID-1B8391C6-5AF9-4CC5-A784-6E73487045F3 V1 EN
REF615 107
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
FLTMSTA1
BLOCK
CB_CLRD
GUID-F70A913A-4B5D-45D2-B12F-981D54DCA89E V1 EN
X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING
X120 (AIM).X120-Input 1
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
X120 (AIM).X120-Input 2
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED
X120 (AIM).X120-Input 3
X120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT
X120 (AIM).X120-Input 4
GUID-33C33CE1-9EB3-437B-BA4B-AE67E2820C55 V1 EN
CB_CLOSE_COMMAND
X100 (PSM).X100-PO1
CCBRBRF1_TRBU
X100 (PSM).X100-PO2
GENERAL_START
X100 (PSM).X100-SO1
GENERAL_OPERATE
X100 (PSM).X100-SO2
CB_OPEN_COMMAND
X100 (PSM).X100-PO3
TRPPTRC2_TRIP
X100 (PSM).X100-PO4
GUID-CF4349F6-CCF5-4A1E-A1BE-BCC323C21F34 V1 EN
108 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
LED1
OK
PHxPTOC_OPERATE ALARM
RESET
LED2
OK
EFxPTOC_OPERATE ALARM
RESET
LED3
OK
EFLPTOC2_OPERATE ALARM
RESET
LED4
OR
OK
NSPTOC_OPERATE B1 O ALARM
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B2 RESET
LED5
OK
T1PTTR1_ALARM ALARM
RESET
GUID-39C29981-E86D-4570-B841-CF19A89767CF V1 EN
REF615 109
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
LED6
OK
CCBRBRF1_TRBU ALARM
RESET
LED7
OK
DISTURB_RECORD_TRIGGERED ALARM
RESET
LED9
OK
TCSSCBR_ALARM ALARM
RESET
LED10
OK
ARCSARC_OPERATE ALARM
RESET
LED11
OK
DARREC1_INPRO ALARM
RESET
GUID-A2456AB1-DB3F-4717-B4E8-7BFCBF271D1F V1 EN
3.6.1 Applications
The standard configuration for non-directional overcurrent and non-directional earth-
fault protection is mainly intended for cable and overhead-line feeder applications
in directly or resistance earthed distribution networks.
The IED with a standard configuration is delivered from the factory with default
settings and parameters. The end user flexibility for incoming, outgoing and
110 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
internal signal designation within the IED enables this configuration to be further
adapted to different primary circuit layouts and the related functionality needs by
modifying the internal functionality using PCM600.
3.6.2 Functions
Lockout relay A
O
- IED self-supervision
R
L
94/86
U12 0. 0 kV
P 0.00 kW
Q 0.00 kVAr
IL2 0 A
- Local/Remote push button on LHMI
- User management
I ESC Clear
- Web HMI
2×
AND
I2> I2/I1> 3Ith>F 3I>>> O R
O→I
79
REMARKS
Optional 3× No. of Calculated OR Alternative
function instances value function to be
Io/Uo defined when
ordering
GUID-2907E142-1D1E-4109-9603-76FDF7A15F02 V1 EN
Connector
PROTECTION
pins for each input and output are presented in the IED physical
LOCAL HMI
Configuration
System
A
connections section.
HMI
Time
Authorization
I ESC Clear
A
O R
L
U12 0. 0 kV
P 0.00 kW
Q 0.00 kVAr
IL2 0 A
I ESC Clear
AND
O R
L
OR
REF615 111
Application Manual CONDITION MONITORING COMMUNICATION
AND SUPERVISION
Protocols:
IEC 61850-8-1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0
Modbus® 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0
1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0
IEC 60870-5-103 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
DNP3 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0
Interfaces: 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
Ethernet: TX (RJ45), FX (LC)
Serial: Serial glass fiber (ST),
RS-485, RS-232/485
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
112 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
LED Description
9 Trip circuit supervision alarm
10 Arc protection operate
11 Autoreclose in progress
REF615 113
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
The analog channels have fixed connections to the different function blocks inside
the IED’s standard configuration. However, the 12 analog channels available for
the disturbance recorder function are freely selectable as a part of the disturbance
recorder’s parameter settings.
The phase currents to the IED are fed from a current transformer. The residual
current to the IED is fed from either residually connected CTs, an external core
balance CT, neutral CT or internally calculated.
114 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
The IED offers six different settings groups which can be set based on individual
needs. Each group can be activated or deactivated using the setting group settings
available in the IED.
The functional diagrams describe the IED's protection functionality in detail and
according to the factory set default connections.
Four non-directional overcurrent stages are offered for overcurrent and short-
circuit protection. The non-directional instantaneous stage PHIPTOC1 can be
blocked by energizing the binary input X120:BI1.
PHIPTOC1
X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING BLOCK OPERATE PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START PHIPTOC1_START
PHHPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE PHHPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START PHHPTOC1_START
PHHPTOC2
BLOCK OPERATE PHHPTOC2_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START PHHPTOC2_START
PHLPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE PHLPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START PHLPTOC1_START
OR6
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O PHxPTOC_OPERATE
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE B3
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B4
B5
B6
GUID-BDBE20E4-EE17-4FB4-B525-7421865C388F V1 EN
The upstream blocking from the start of the overcurrent second high stage
PHHPTOC2 is connected to the binary output X110:SO1. This output can be used
REF615 115
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
for sending a blocking signal to the relevant overcurrent protection stage of the
IED at the infeeding bay.
OR6
PHHPTOC2_START B1 O UPSTEAM_OC_BLOCKING
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-6B581162-38E0-40FB-95DC-3360616DA749 V1 EN
The inrush detection block's (INRPHAR1) output BLK2H enables either blocking
the function or multiplying the active settings for any of the available overcurrent
or earth-fault function blocks.
INRPHAR1
BLOCK BLK2H INRPHAR1_BLK2H
GUID-57913FDC-E766-404A-ABA6-90ADB0F7CF74 V1 EN
Two negative sequence overcurrent stages NSPTOC1 and NSPTOC2 are provided
for phase unbalance protection. These functions are used to protect the feeder
against phase unbalance.
NSPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE NSPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START NSPTOC1_START
NSPTOC2
BLOCK OPERATE NSPTOC2_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START NSPTOC2_START
OR
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O NSPTOC_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B2
GUID-042DF7F0-BC45-4B9F-8F1B-301314789714 V1 EN
116 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
EFIPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE EFIPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START EFIPTOC1_START
EFHPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE EFHPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START EFHPTOC1_START
EFLPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE EFLPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START EFLPTOC1_START
OR6
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O EFxPTOC_OPERATE
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE B2
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-4B3BC21D-415D-4301-9B92-887AEA80C49C V1 EN
EFLPTOC2
BLOCK OPERATE EFLPTOC2_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START EFLPTOC2_START
GUID-66EBDD29-6D5B-4ACE-9000-3F9976978F27 V1 EN
PDNSPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE
START PDNSPTOC1_START
GUID-E1FF7992-706A-417E-8944-AF34E8E729FB V1 EN
The thermal overload protection T1PTTR1 detects overloads under varying load
conditions. The output BLK_CLOSE is used to block the closing operation of
circuit breaker.
T1PTTR1
BLK_OPR OPERATE T1PTTR1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START T1PTTR1_START
TEMP_AMB ALARM T1PTTR1_ALARM
BLK_CLOSE
GUID-E345F8CC-BD77-4DE5-AEAC-12969F8F4A74 V1 EN
REF615 117
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
The breaker failure protection CCBRBRF1 is initiated via the START input by
number of different protection functions available in the IED. The breaker failure
protection function offers different operating modes associated with the circuit
breaker position and the measured phase and residual currents.
The breaker failure protection function has two operating outputs: TRRET and
TRBU. The TRRET operate output is used for retripping its own breaker through
TRPPTRC2_TRIP. The TRBU output gives a backup trip to the breaker feeding
upstream. For this purpose, the TRBU operate output signal is connected to the
binary output X100:PO2.
CCBRBRF1
OR6 OR6
BLOCK CB_FAULT_AL
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O START TRBU CCBRBRF1_TRBU
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B2 B2 POSCLOSE TRRET CCBRBRF1_TRRET
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE B3 B3 CB_FAULT
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE B4 B4
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B5 B5
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE B6 B6
OR6
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B1 O
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
GUID-E1FC0B19-FE08-4BD1-88F2-5AC7E8249ACF V1 EN
Three protection S1...3 stages are included as an optional function. The protection
offers individual function blocks for three sensors that can be connected to the IED.
Each protection function block has two different operation modes, that is, with or
without the phase and residual current check.
The operate signals S1...3 are connected to both trip logic TRPPTRC1 and
TRPPTRC2. If the IED has been ordered with high speed binary outputs, the
individual operate signals from S1...3 are connected to dedicated trip logic
TRPPTRC3...5. The output of TRPPTRC3...5 are available at high speed outputs
X110:HSO1, X110:HSO2 and X110:HSO3.
118 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
ARCSARC1
BLOCK OPERATE ARCSARC1_OPERATE
REM_FLT_ARC ARC_FLT_DET ARCSARC1_ARC_FLT_DET
OPR_MODE
ARCSARC2
BLOCK OPERATE ARCSARC2_OPERATE
REM_FLT_ARC ARC_FLT_DET ARCSARC2_ARC_FLT_DET
OPR_MODE
ARCSARC3
BLOCK OPERATE ARCSARC3_OPERATE
REM_FLT_ARC ARC_FLT_DET ARCSARC3_ARC_FLT_DET
OPR_MODE
OR6
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B1 O ARCSARC_OPERATE
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-C29D3E5A-5875-413D-B8D1-09C2FDDEF2D3 V1 EN
TRPPTRC3
BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC3_TRIP
ARCSARC1_OPERATE OPERATE CL_LKOUT
X120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT RST_LKOUT
TRPPTRC4
BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC4_TRIP
ARCSARC2_OPERATE OPERATE CL_LKOUT
X120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT RST_LKOUT
TRPPTRC5
BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC5_TRIP
ARCSARC3_OPERATE OPERATE CL_LKOUT
X120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT RST_LKOUT
GUID-075DA511-6800-4425-85CE-2B1BD69661FC V1 EN
REF615 119
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
The circuit breaker availability for the autoreclosure sequence is expressed with the
CB_READY input in DARREC1. The signal, and other required signals, are
connected to the CB spring charged binary inputs in this configuration. The open
command from the autorecloser is connected directly to binary output X100:PO3,
whereas the close command is connected directly to binary output X100:PO1.
DARREC1
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE INIT_1 OPEN_CB DARREC1_OPEN_CB
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE INIT_2 CLOSE_CB DARREC1_CLOSE_CB
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE INIT_3 CMD_WAIT
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE INIT_4 INPRO DARREC1_INPRO
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE INIT_5 LOCKED
X110_BI2_EXT_START_AUTORECLOSE INIT_6 PROT_CRD
DEL_INIT_2 UNSUC_RECL DARREC1_UNSUC_RECL
DEL_INIT_3 AR_ON
DEL_INIT_4 READY
BLK_RECL_T ACTIVE
BLK_RCLM_T
BLK_THERM
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED CB_POS
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED CB_READY
INC_SHOTP
INHIBIT_RECL
OR6 RECL_ON
SYNC
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B2
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B3
CBXCBR1_SELECTED B4
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM B5 OR
B6
B1 O
B2
OR6
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B1 O
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-CABAD69F-B126-4C9E-8640-2849EE82A948 V1 EN
General start and operate signals from all the functions are connected to pulse timer
TPGAPC1 for setting the minimum pulse length for the outputs. The output from
TPGAPC1 is connected to binary outputs.
120 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
OR6
PHLPTOC1_START B1 O
PHHPTOC1_START B2
PHHPTOC2_START B3
PHIPTOC1_START B4
NSPTOC1_START B5
NSPTOC2_START B6
OR6
OR6
B1 O
EFLPTOC1_START B1 O B2
EFLPTOC2_START B2 B3
EFIPTOC1_START B3 B4
EFHPTOC1_START B4 B5 TPGAPC1
PDNSPTOC1_START B5 B6
B6 IN1 OUT1 GENERAL_START
IN2 OUT2 GENERAL_OPERATE
OR6 OR6
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B2 B2
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE B3 B3
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B4 B4
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B5 B5
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B6 B6
OR6
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B3
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE B4
EFLPTOC2_OPERATE B5
B6
OR6
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B1 O
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-7CC700C6-F5D5-45EF-986A-9F279A0837C7 V1 EN
The operate signals from the protection functions are connected to the two trip
logics TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2. The output of these trip logic functions is
available at binary outputs X100:PO3 and X100:PO4. The trip logic functions are
provided with a lockout and latching function, event generation and the trip signal
duration setting. If the lockout operation mode is selected, binary input X120:BI4
has been assigned to RST_LKOUT input of both the trip logic to enable external
reset with a push button.
Other trip logics TRPPTRC3...4 are also available if the IED is ordered with high
speed binary outputs options.
REF615 121
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
TRPPTRC1
OR6 OR6
BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC1_TRIP
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O OPERATE CL_LKOUT
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B2 B2 RST_LKOUT
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B3 B3
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE B4 B4
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B5 B5
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B6 B6
OR6
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE B3
EFLPTOC2_OPERATE B4
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B5
B6
OR6
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B1 O
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
X120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT
GUID-F756937A-A012-433D-904D-5D62D7BF8756 V1 EN
TRPPTRC2
OR6 OR6
BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC2_TRIP
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O OPERATE CL_LKOUT
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B2 B2 RST_LKOUT
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B3 B3
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE B4 B4
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B5 B5
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B6 B6
OR6
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B2
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE B3
EFLPTOC2_OPERATE B4
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE B5
CCBRBRF1_TRRET B6
OR6
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B1 O
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
X120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT
GUID-ADA381AF-87B3-43A6-8A39-7856F999FD28 V1 EN
The START and the OPERATE outputs from the protection stages are routed to
trigger the disturbance recorder or, alternatively, only to be recorded by the
disturbance recorder, depending on the parameter settings. Additionally, the
selected signals from different functions and the few binary inputs are also
connected to the disturbance recorder.
122 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
RDRE1
PHLPTOC1_START C1 TRIGGERED DISTURB_RECORD_TRIGGERED
PHHPTOC1_START C2
PHHPTOC2_START C3
PHIPTOC1_START C4
NSPTOC1_START C5
NSPTOC2_START C6
EFLPTOC1_START C7
EFHPTOC1_START C8
EFIPTOC1_START C9
EFLPTOC2_START C10
C11
OR6 PDNSPTOC1_START C12
T1PTTR1_START C13
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O CCBRBRF1_TRRET C14
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B2 CCBRBRF1_TRBU C15
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE B3 C16
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B4 C17
B5 C18
B6 X110_BI2_EXT_START_AUTORECLOSE C19
EFLPTOC2_OPERATE C20
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE C21
INRPHAR1_BLK2H C22
T1PTTR1_OPERATE C23
OR C24
ARCSARC1_OPERATE C25
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O ARCSARC2_OPERATE C26
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B2 ARCSARC3_OPERATE C27
DARREC1_INPRO C28
DARREC1_CLOSE_CB C29
DARREC1_UNSUC_RECL C30
X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING C31
OR6 X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED C32
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED C33
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O C34
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2 C35
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE B3 C36
B4 C37
B5 C38
B6 C39
C40
C41
C42
C43
OR6 C44
C45
ARCSARC1_ARC_FLT_DET B1 O C46
ARCSARC2_ARC_FLT_DET B2 C47
ARCSARC3_ARC_FLT_DET B3 C48
B4 C49
B5 C50
B6 C51
C52
C53
C54
C55
C56
C57
C58
C59
C60
C61
C62
C63
C64
GUID-C5C9CBCF-DB59-465F-8299-08068E37C94F V2 EN
The circuit breaker condition monitoring function SSCBR1 supervises the switch
status based on the connected binary input information and the measured current
levels. SSCBR1 introduces various supervision methods.
REF615 123
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
SSCBR1
BLOCK TRV_T_OP_ALM SSCBR1_TRV_T_OP_ALM
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED POSOPEN TRV_T_CL_ALM SSCBR1_TRV_T_CL_ALM
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED POSCLOSE SPR_CHR_ALM SSCBR1_SPR_CHR_ALM
CB_OPEN_COMMAND OPEN_CB_EXE OPR_ALM SSCBR1_OPR_ALM
CB_CLOSE_COMMAND CLOSE_CB_EXE OPR_LO SSCBR1_OPR_LO
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM PRES_ALM_IN IPOW_ALM SSCBR1_IPOW_ALM
PRES_LO_IN IPOW_LO SSCBR1_IPOW_LO
CB_SPRING_DISCHARGED SPR_CHR_ST CB_LIFE_ALM SSCBR1_CB_LIFE_ALM
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED SPR_CHR MON_ALM SSCBR1_MON_ALM
RST_IPOW PRES_ALM SSCBR1_PRES_ALM
RST_CB_WEAR PRES_LO SSCBR1_PRES_LO
RST_TRV_T OPENPOS
RST_SPR_T INVALIDPOS
CLOSEPOS
GUID-D30D6FF1-20AF-4C73-B207-04C717D3439B V1 EN
OR6
SSCBR1_TRV_T_OP_ALM B1 O
SSCBR1_TRV_T_CL_ALM B2
SSCBR1_SPR_CHR_ALM B3
SSCBR1_OPR_ALM B4
SSCBR1_OPR_LO B5 OR
SSCBR1_IPOW_ALM B6
B1 O SSCBR1_ALARMS
B2
OR6
SSCBR1_IPOW_LO B1 O
SSCBR1_CB_LIFE_ALM B2
SSCBR1_MON_ALM B3
SSCBR1_PRES_ALM B4
SSCBR1_PRES_LO B5
B6
GUID-28045DB5-20C4-46F5-B7FA-9ADA8FEF4098 V1 EN
NOT
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED IN OUT CB_SPRING_DISCHARGED
GUID-BFD7C249-AE73-4D2A-8409-8F34B06473F6 V1 EN
Two separate trip circuit supervision functions are included: TCSSCBR1 for power
output X100:PO3 and TCSSCBR2 for power output X100:PO4. Both functions are
blocked by the Master Trip TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2 and the circuit breaker
open signal.
124 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
TCSSCBR1
TCSSCBR_BLOCKING BLOCK ALARM TCSSCBR1_ALARM
TCSSCBR2
TCSSCBR_BLOCKING BLOCK ALARM TCSSCBR2_ALARM
OR
TCSSCBR1_ALARM B1 O TCSSCBR_ALARM
TCSSCBR2_ALARM B2
GUID-55A8E2D8-21A8-474C-8459-1EDD29484F02 V1 EN
OR6
TRPPTRC1_TRIP B1 O TCSSCBR_BLOCKING
TRPPTRC2_TRIP B2
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-4F651FD8-E80B-4157-925D-B11E192D689E V1 EN
Two types of disconnector and earthing switch function blocks are available.
DCSXSWI1...3 and ESSXSWI1...2 are status only type and DCXSWI1...2 and
ESXSWI1 are controllable type. By default, the status only blocks are connected in
the standard configuration. The disconnector (CB truck) and line side earthing
switch status information is connected to DCSXSWI1 and ESSXSI1.
DCSXSWI1
X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_TEST POSOPEN OPENPOS
X110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_SERVICE POSCLOSE CLOSEPOS
OKPOS DCSXSWI1_OKPOS
GUID-EC15B84E-9243-4A6C-92DB-D2E727411896 V1 EN
REF615 125
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
ESSXSWI1
X110_BI8_ES1_OPENED POSOPEN OPENPOS ESSXSWI1_OPENPOS
X110_BI7_ES1_CLOSED POSCLOSE CLOSEPOS
OKPOS
GUID-5602152F-6F87-4D49-86AF-E4968E4B88BB V1 EN
The circuit breaker closing is enabled when the ENA_CLOSE input is activated.
The input can be activated by the configuration logic, which is a combination of
the disconnector or breaker truck and earth-switch position status, status of the trip
logics, gas pressure alarm and circuit breaker spring charging status.
The OKPOS output from DCSXSWI defines if the disconnector or breaker truck is
definitely either open (in test position) or close (in service position). This output,
together with the open earth-switch and non-active trip signals, activates the close-
enable signal to the circuit breaker control function block. The open operation for
circuit breaker is always enabled.
The ITL_BYPASS input can be used, for example, to always enable the closing of
the circuit breaker when the circuit breaker truck is in the test position.
ITL_BYPASS overrides, for example, active interlocking conditions when the
circuit breaker truck is closed in service position.
CBXCBR1
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED POSOPEN SELECTED CBXCBR1_SELECTED
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED POSCLOSE EXE_OP CBXCBR1_EXE_OP
TRUE ENA_OPEN EXE_CL CBXCBR1_EXE_CL
CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSE ENA_CLOSE OPENPOS
FALSE BLK_OPEN CLOSEPOS
BLK_CLOSE OKPOS
CBXBCR1_AU_OPEN AU_OPEN OPEN_ENAD
CBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE AU_CLOSE CLOSE_ENAD
ITL_BYPASS
GUID-DBBDB84F-27F4-4034-A21B-01CD29A82207 V1 EN
OR
CBXCBR1_EXE_CL B1 O CB_CLOSE_COMMAND
DARREC1_CLOSE_CB B2
GUID-63F53739-3A34-4391-9F0C-0833324FAEA3 V1 EN
126 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
OR6
CBXCBR1_EXE_OP B1 O CB_OPEN_COMMAND
TRPPTRC1_TRIP B2
DARREC1_OPEN_CB B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-26BE8B84-99DF-44E7-BA2E-09EFC6A4EA76 V1 EN
NOT AND6
TRPPTRC1_TRIP IN OUT B1 O CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSE
B2
B3
B4
NOT B5
B6
TRPPTRC2_TRIP IN OUT
NOT
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM IN OUT
DCSXSWI1_OKPOS
ESSXSWI1_OPENPOS
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED
GUID-BA344D0E-6F99-4CAB-9DBF-7CD674525C88 V1 EN
The configuration includes logic for generating circuit breaker external closing and
opening command with the IED in local or remote mode.
Check the logic for the external circuit breaker closing command
and modify it according to the application.
AND
CONTROL_LOCAL B1 O
FALSE B2
OR
B1 O CBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE
B2
AND
CONTROL_REMOTE B1 O
FALSE B2
GUID-2BAE22BC-81C2-4F1B-AC3F-3F1663381794 V1 EN
AND
CONTROL_LOCAL B1 O
FALSE B2
OR
B1 O CBXBCR1_AU_OPEN
B2
AND
CONTROL_REMOTE B1 O
FALSE B2
GUID-9D61A2BA-90F0-4808-9282-C8DDDED6C80C V1 EN
REF615 127
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
The phase current inputs to the IED are measured by the three-phase current
measurement function CMMXU1. The current input is connected to the X120 card
in the back panel. The sequence current measurement CSMSQI1 measures the
sequence current and the residual current measurement RESCMMXU1 measures
the residual current.
The measurements can be seen in the LHMI and they are available under the
measurement option in the menu selection. Based on the settings, function blocks
can generate low alarm or warning and high alarm or warning signals for the
measured current values.
CMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
LOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM
GUID-05BA9BEE-064A-4C7C-B486-F82231CB43CF V1 EN
CSMSQI1
GUID-7F0D54B4-B973-4A6D-A6F8-AAB376A1351F V1 EN
RESCMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
GUID-DB3CEBE7-820F-4F79-964A-D63B89AD2233 V1 EN
FLTMSTA1
BLOCK
CB_CLRD
GUID-ABC2FDF0-5586-4463-B1C1-3C7C8300B65A V1 EN
LDPMSTA1
RSTMEM MEM_WARN
MEM_ALARM
GUID-16FAB2AA-E0CF-4904-AD60-A9951BBB3CAC V1 EN
128 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 2 OR
B1 O X110_BI2_EXT_START_AUTORECLOSE
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 2
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 3 OR
B1 O X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 3
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 4 OR
B1 O X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 4
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 5 OR
B1 O X110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_SERVICE
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 5
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 6 OR
B1 O X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_TEST
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 6
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 7 OR
B1 O X110_BI7_ES1_CLOSED
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 7
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 8 OR
B1 O X110_BI8_ES1_OPENED
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 8
GUID-CF4CBBC0-9B2F-4974-958C-8BFEC57A6673 V1 EN
X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING
X120 (AIM).X120-Input 1
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
X120 (AIM).X120-Input 2
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED
X120 (AIM).X120-Input 3
X120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT
X120 (AIM).X120-Input 4
GUID-F9405F60-4087-4693-82DE-4C02484FEF0A V1 EN
REF615 129
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
UPSTEAM_OC_BLOCKING
X110 (BIO).X110-SO1
TRPPTRC3_TRIP
X110 (BIO-H).X110-HSO1
OC_OPERATE_PULSE
X110 (BIO).X110-SO2
TRPPTRC4_TRIP
X110 (BIO-H).X110-HSO2
EF_OPERATE_PULSE
X110 (BIO).X110-SO3
TRPPTRC5_TRIP
X110 (BIO-H).X110-HSO3
GUID-23F52E72-342A-4629-89CC-FC401CD94B21 V1 EN
CB_CLOSE_COMMAND
X100 (PSM).X100-PO1
CCBRBRF1_TRBU
X100 (PSM).X100-PO2
GENERAL_START_PULSE
X100 (PSM).X100-SO1
GENERAL_OPERATE_PULSE
X100 (PSM).X100-SO2
CB_OPEN_COMMAND
X100 (PSM).X100-PO3
TRPPTRC2_TRIP
X100 (PSM).X100-PO4
GUID-A4CF2AA3-1FCD-44A9-91C4-482C9FBFB588 V1 EN
130 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
LED1
OK
PHxPTOC_OPERATE ALARM
RESET
LED2
OK
EFxPTOC_OPERATE ALARM
RESET
LED3
OK
EFLPTOC2_OPERATE ALARM
RESET
LED4
OR
OK
NSPTOC_OPERATE B1 O ALARM
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B2 RESET
LED5
OK
T1PTTR1_ALARM ALARM
RESET
GUID-B26BBB64-D189-4246-A5A7-DB8FC8E86445 V1 EN
REF615 131
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
LED6
OK
CCBRBRF1_TRBU ALARM
RESET
LED7
OK
DISTURB_RECORD_TRIGGERED ALARM
RESET
LED8
OK
SSCBR1_ALARMS ALARM
RESET
LED9
OK
TCSSCBR_ALARM ALARM
RESET
LED10
OK
ARCSARC_OPERATE ALARM
RESET
LED11
OK
DARREC1_INPRO ALARM
RESET
GUID-45BA8CDE-2D5A-4BFC-AEB7-B9D3C1D044F9 V1 EN
The configuration also includes overcurrent operate and earth-fault operate logic.
The operate logics are connected to the pulse timer TPGAPC for setting the
minimum pulse length for the outputs. The output from TPGAPC is connected to
the binary outputs.
TPGAPC2
PHxPTOC_OPERATE IN1 OUT1 OC_OPERATE_PULSE
IN2 OUT2 EF_OPERATE_PULSE
OR
EFxPTOC_OPERATE B1 O
EFLPTOC2_OPERATE B2
GUID-F6BA3876-6A37-464E-9FAB-F5DCA0A96FFD V1 EN
Figure 167: Timer logic for overcurrent and earth-fault operate pulse
132 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
3.7.1 Applications
The standard configuration for non-directional overcurrent and directional earth-
fault protection is mainly intended for cable and overhead-line feeder applications
in isolated and resonant-earthed distribution networks. The configuration also
includes additional options for selecting earth-fault protection based on admittance
or wattmetric-based principles.
The IED with a standard configuration is delivered from the factory with default
settings and parameters. The end user flexibility for incoming, outgoing and
internal signal designation within the IED enables this configuration to be further
adapted to different primary circuit layouts and the related functionality needs by
modifying the internal functionality using PCM600.
REF615 133
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
3.7.2 Functions
UL1UL2UL3
Uo
Lockout relay A
O
- IED self-supervision
R
L
94/86
U12 0. 0 kV
P 0.00 kW
Q 0.00 kVAr
IL2 0 A
- Local/Remote push button on LHMI
- User management
UL1UL2UL3
I ESC Clear
- Web HMI
2×
AND
I2> I2/I1> 3Ith>F 3I>>> O R
3× 18×
Uo> MAP O→I
59G MAP 79
2xRTD REMARKS
1xmA
Optional 3× No. of Calculated OR Alternative
function instances value function to be
Io/Uo defined when
ordering
GUID-4512CC4D-BAA4-49CD-BF84-7BA9628DC231 V1 EN
Connector
PROTECTION
pins for each input and output are presented in the IED physical
LOCAL HMI
Configuration
System
A
connections section.
HMI
Time
Authorization
I ESC Clear
A
O R
L
U12 0. 0 kV
P 0.00 kW
Q 0.00 kVAr
IL2 0 A
I ESC Clear
AND
O R
L
OR
REF615 135
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
LED Description
8 Circuit breaker condition monitoring alarm
9 Supervision alarm
10 Arc fault detected
11 Autoreclose in progress
136 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
REF615 137
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
The analog channels have fixed connections to the different function blocks inside
the IED’s standard configuration. However, the 12 analog channels available for
the disturbance recorder function are freely selectable as a part of the disturbance
recorder’s parameter settings.
The phase currents to the IED are fed from a current transformer. The residual
current to the IED is fed from either residually connected CTs, an external core
balance CT, neutral CT or internally calculated.
The phase voltages to the IED are fed from a voltage transformer. The residual
voltage to the IED is fed from either residually connected VTs, an open delta
connected VT or internally calculated.
The IED offers six different settings groups which can be set based on individual
needs. Each group can be activated or deactivated using the setting group settings
available in the IED.
The functional diagrams describe the IEDs protection functionality in detail and
according to the factory set default connections.
138 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
Four overcurrent stages are offered for overcurrent and short-circuit protection.
The non-directional instantaneous stage PHIPTOC1 can be blocked by energizing
the binary input X120:BI1.
PHIPTOC1
X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING BLOCK OPERATE PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START PHIPTOC1_START
PHHPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE PHHPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START PHHPTOC1_START
PHHPTOC2
BLOCK OPERATE PHHPTOC2_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START PHHPTOC2_START
PHLPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE PHLPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START PHLPTOC1_START
OR6
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O PHxPTOC_OPERATE
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE B3
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B4
B5
B6
GUID-3319AA24-88F3-4A6C-B382-D480E4EB991B V1 EN
The upstream blocking from the start of the overcurrent second high stage
PHHPTOC2 is connected to the binary output X110:SO1. This output can be used
for sending a blocking signal to the relevant overcurrent protection stage of the
IED at the infeeding bay.
OR6
PHHPTOC2_START B1 O UPSTEAM_OC_BLOCKING
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-135C8785-4AA1-4D9B-B100-EB7D2CA57163 V1 EN
The inrush detection block's (INRPHAR1) output BLK2H enables either blocking
the function or multiplying the active settings for any of the available overcurrent
or earth-fault function blocks.
REF615 139
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
INRPHAR1
BLOCK BLK2H INRPHAR1_BLK2H
GUID-B5386A2A-119F-44AF-AD39-D601263BF734 V1 EN
Two negative sequence overcurrent stages NSPTOC1 and NSPTOC2 are provided
for phase unbalance protection. These functions are used to protect the feeder
against phase unbalance. Both negative sequence overcurrent protections are
blocked in case of detection of a failure in secondary circuit of current transformer.
NSPTOC1
CCRDIF1_FAIL BLOCK OPERATE NSPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START NSPTOC1_START
NSPTOC2
CCRDIF1_FAIL BLOCK OPERATE NSPTOC2_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START NSPTOC2_START
OR
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O NSPTOC_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B2
GUID-471A4DEC-98C0-4E2B-8A82-CC7D8AA94D1D V1 EN
Three stages are provided for directional earth-fault protection. According to the
IED's order code, the directional earth-fault protection method can be based on
conventional directional earth-fault DEFxPDEF only or alternatively together with
admittance criteria EFPADM or wattmetric earth-fault protection WPWDE. In
addition, there is a dedicated protection stage INTRPTEF either for transient-based
earth-fault protection or for cable intermittent earth-fault protection in compensated
networks.
140 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
DEFLPDEF1
BLOCK OPERATE DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START DEFLPDEF1_START
X110_BI2_RCA_CONTROL RCA_CTL
DEFLPDEF2
BLOCK OPERATE DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START DEFLPDEF2_START
X110_BI2_RCA_CONTROL RCA_CTL
DEFHPDEF1
BLOCK OPERATE DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START DEFHPDEF1_START
X110_BI2_RCA_CONTROL RCA_CTL
OR6
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O DEFxPDEF_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B2
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-887F7AE7-59D2-474B-B5B8-4466B6741D35 V1 EN
INTRPTEF1
BLOCK OPERATE INTRPTEF1_OPERATE
START INTRPTEF1_START
BLK_EF
GUID-BD1AFA42-4050-4B0C-823E-EDDEAF7A9A58 V1 EN
REF615 141
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
WPWDE1
BLOCK OPERATE WPWDE1_OPERATE
X110_BI2_RCA_CONTROL RCA_CTL START WPWDE1_START
WPWDE2
BLOCK OPERATE WPWDE2_OPERATE
X110_BI2_RCA_CONTROL RCA_CTL START WPWDE2_START
WPWDE3
BLOCK OPERATE WPWDE3_OPERATE
X110_BI2_RCA_CONTROL RCA_CTL START WPWDE3_START
OR6
WPWDE1_OPERATE B1 O WPWDE_OPERATE
WPWDE2_OPERATE B2
WPWDE3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-5D56CF4C-0081-4D34-AB17-CD86173B20AA V1 EN
EFPADM1
BLOCK OPERATE EFPADM1_OPERATE
RELEASE START EFPADM1_START
EFPADM2
BLOCK OPERATE EFPADM2_OPERATE
RELEASE START EFPADM2_START
EFPADM3
BLOCK OPERATE EFPADM3_OPERATE
RELEASE START EFPADM3_START
OR6
EFPADM1_OPERATE B1 O EFPADM_OPERATE
EFPADM2_OPERATE B2
EFPADM3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-E530E87B-85F6-421E-BC3F-C750132D3054 V1 EN
142 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
EFHPTOC1
CCRDIF1_FAIL BLOCK OPERATE EFHPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START EFHPTOC1_START
GUID-3ED1B626-C1F0-4001-AB58-546A16B76048 V1 EN
PDNSPTOC1
CCRDIF1_FAIL BLOCK OPERATE PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE
START PDNSPTOC1_START
GUID-3C32D680-B07A-4D01-89B0-A0C2CAE89C45 V1 EN
The thermal overload protection T1PTTR1 detects overloads under varying load
conditions. The BLK_CLOSE output of the function is used to block the closing
operation of circuit breaker.
T1PTTR1
BLK_OPR OPERATE T1PTTR1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START T1PTTR1_START
TEMP_AMB ALARM T1PTTR1_ALARM
BLK_CLOSE T1PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE
GUID-0BC59D0E-F0E3-4F46-A4EF-A8D392971CF2 V1 EN
The breaker failure protection CCBRBRF1 is initiated via the START input by
number of different protection functions available in the IED. The breaker failure
protection function offers different operating modes associated with the circuit
breaker position and the measured phase and residual currents.
The breaker failure protection function has two operating outputs: TRRET and
TRBU. The TRRET operate output is used for retripping its own breaker through
TRPPTRC2_TRIP. The TRBU output gives a backup trip to the breaker feeding
upstream. For this purpose, the TRBU operate output signal is connected to the
binary output X100:PO2.
REF615 143
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
CCBRBRF1
OR6 OR6
BLOCK CB_FAULT_AL
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O START TRBU CCBRBRF1_TRBU
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B2 B2 POSCLOSE TRRET CCBRBRF1_TRRET
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE B3 B3 CB_FAULT
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B4 B4
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B5 B5
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B6 B6
OR6
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B2
EFPADM2_OPERATE B3
EFPADM3_OPERATE B4
WPWDE2_OPERATE B5
WPWDE3_OPERATE B6
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
GUID-3A9C783D-EBCA-48FB-BA73-AF7F08AA9BDB V1 EN
The operate signals from ARCSARC1...3 are connected to both trip logic
TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2. If the IED has been ordered with high speed binary
outputs, the individual operate signals from ARCSARC1...3 are connected to
dedicated trip logic TRPPTRC3...5. The output of TRPPTRC3...5 are available at
high speed outputs X110:HSO1, X110:HSO2 and X110:HSO3.
ARCSARC1
BLOCK OPERATE ARCSARC1_OPERATE
REM_FLT_ARC ARC_FLT_DET ARCSARC1_ARC_FLT_DET
OPR_MODE
ARCSARC2
BLOCK OPERATE ARCSARC2_OPERATE
REM_FLT_ARC ARC_FLT_DET ARCSARC2_ARC_FLT_DET
OPR_MODE
ARCSARC3
BLOCK OPERATE ARCSARC3_OPERATE
REM_FLT_ARC ARC_FLT_DET ARCSARC3_ARC_FLT_DET
OPR_MODE
OR6
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B1 O ARCSARC_OPERATE
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-6CD72294-48D8-4EB9-8498-88DE7B4E5CB3 V1 EN
144 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
TRPPTRC3
BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC3_TRIP
ARCSARC1_OPERATE OPERATE CL_LKOUT
X120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT RST_LKOUT
TRPPTRC4
BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC4_TRIP
ARCSARC2_OPERATE OPERATE CL_LKOUT
X120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT RST_LKOUT
TRPPTRC5
BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC5_TRIP
ARCSARC3_OPERATE OPERATE CL_LKOUT
X120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT RST_LKOUT
GUID-DE45B80E-CC29-4C50-AC00-861FE4406100 V1 EN
The circuit breaker availability for the autorecloser sequence is expressed with the
CB_READY input in DARREC1. DARREC1. The signal, and other required
signals, are connected to the CB spring charged binary inputs in this configuration.
The open command from the autorecloser is connected directly to binary output
X100:PO3, whereas the close command is connected directly to binary output
X100:PO1.
REF615 145
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
DARREC1
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE INIT_1 OPEN_CB DARREC1_OPEN_CB
OR6 PHHPTOC2_OPERATE INIT_2 CLOSE_CB DARREC1_CLOSE_CB
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE INIT_3 CMD_WAIT
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B1 O INIT_4 INPRO DARREC1_INPRO
EFPADM2_OPERATE B2 INIT_5 LOCKED
WPWDE2_OPERATE B3 INIT_6 PROT_CRD
B4 DEL_INIT_2 UNSUC_RECL DARREC1_UNSUC_RECL
B5 DEL_INIT_3 AR_ON
B6 DEL_INIT_4 READY
BLK_RECL_T ACTIVE
BLK_RCLM_T
BLK_THERM
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED CB_POS
OR6 X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED CB_READY
INC_SHOTP
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O INHIBIT_RECL
EFPADM3_OPERATE B2 RECL_ON
WPWDE3_OPERATE B3 SYNC
B4
B5
B6
OR6
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B2
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B3
CBXCBR1_SELECTED B4
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE B5 OR
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM B6
B1 O
B2
OR6
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B1 O
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-E7F8FD5B-32F7-45EA-B6AF-9F840A1EA709 V1 EN
146 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
ROVPTOV1
BLOCK OPERATE ROVPTOV1_OPERATE
START ROVPTOV1_START
ROVPTOV2
BLOCK OPERATE ROVPTOV2_OPERATE
START ROVPTOV2_START
ROVPTOV3
BLOCK OPERATE ROVPTOV3_OPERATE
START ROVPTOV3_START
OR6
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O ROVPTOV_OPERATE
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B2
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-7D97D55F-A89B-47FB-9B7B-3B041C3F2859 V1 EN
General start and operate from all the functions are connected to pulse timer
TPGAPC1 for setting the minimum pulse length for the outputs. The output from
TPGAPC1 is connected to binary outputs.
OR6 OR6 TPGAPC1
PHLPTOC1_START B1 O B1 O IN1 OUT1 GENERAL_START_PULSE
PHHPTOC1_START B2 B2 IN2 OUT2 GENERAL_OPERATE_PULSE
PHHPTOC2_START B3 B3
PHIPTOC1_START B4 B4
NSPTOC1_START B5 B5
NSPTOC2_START B6 B6
OR6 OR6
INTRPTEF1_START B1 O DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O
EFHPTOC1_START B2 DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B2
PDNSPTOC1_START B3 DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B3
ROVPTOV1_START B4 ARCSARC1_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV2_START B5 ARCSARC2_OPERATE B5
ROVPTOV3_START B6 ARCSARC3_OPERATE B6
OR6 OR6
EFPADM1_START B1 O INTRPTEF1_OPERATE B1 O
EFPADM2_START B2 EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
EFPADM3_START B3 PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B3
WPWDE1_START B4 ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B4
WPWDE2_START B5 ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B5
WPWDE3_START B6 ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B6
OR6
EFPADM1_OPERATE B1 O
EFPADM2_OPERATE B2
EFPADM3_OPERATE B3
WPWDE1_OPERATE B4
WPWDE2_OPERATE B5
WPWDE3_OPERATE B6
GUID-AF23133F-E581-43F2-BC3E-AE103AE437F7 V1 EN
The operate signals from the protection functions are connected to the two trip
logics TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2. The output of these trip logic functions is
available at binary output X100:PO3 and X100:PO4. The trip logic functions are
REF615 147
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
provided with a lockout and latching function, event generation and the trip signal
duration setting. If the lockout operation mode is selected, binary input X120:BI4
has been assigned to RST_LKOUT input of both the trip logic to enable external
reset with a push button.
Three other trip logics TRPPTRC3...4 are also available if the IED is ordered with
high speed binary outputs options.
TRPPTRC1
OR6 OR6
BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC1_TRIP
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O OPERATE CL_LKOUT
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B2 B2 RST_LKOUT
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B3 B3
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE B4 B4
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B5 B5
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B6 B6
OR6
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B2
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B3
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B4
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B5
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B6
OR6
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE B1 O
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B3
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B5
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B6
OR6
EFPADM1_OPERATE B1 O
EFPADM2_OPERATE B2
EFPADM3_OPERATE B3
WPWDE1_OPERATE B4
WPWDE2_OPERATE B5
WPWDE3_OPERATE B6
X120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT
GUID-9C6E7492-616C-460F-9AAD-B75FFC0F0737 V1 EN
148 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
TRPPTRC2
OR6 OR6
BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC2_TRIP
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O OPERATE CL_LKOUT
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B2 B2 RST_LKOUT
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B3 B3
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE B4 B4
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B5 B5
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B6 B6
OR6
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B2
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B3
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B4
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B5
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B6
OR6
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE B1 O
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B3
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B5
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B6
OR6
CCBRBRF1_TRRET B1 O
EFPADM1_OPERATE B2
EFPADM2_OPERATE B3
EFPADM3_OPERATE B4
B5
B6
OR6
WPWDE1_OPERATE B1 O
WPWDE2_OPERATE B2
WPWDE3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
X120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT
GUID-4E3A24AF-2263-4DA6-9D9B-2646177DA782 V1 EN
The START and the OPERATE outputs from the protection stages are routed to
trigger the disturbance recorder or, alternatively, only to be recorded by the
disturbance recorder depending on the parameter settings. Additionally, the
selected signals from different functions and the few binary inputs are also
connected to the disturbance recorder.
REF615 149
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
RDRE1
PHLPTOC1_START C1 TRIGGERED DISTURB_RECORD_TRIGGERED
PHHPTOC1_START C2
PHHPTOC2_START C3
PHIPTOC1_START C4
NSPTOC1_START C5
OR6 NSPTOC2_START C6
C7
DEFLPDEF1_START B1 O C8
WPWDE1_START B2 C9
EFPADM1_START B3 INTRPTEF1_START C10
B4 OR6 EFHPTOC1_START C11
B5 PDNSPTOC1_START C12
B6 PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O T1PTTR1_START C13
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B2 ROVPTOV1_START C14
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE B3 ROVPTOV2_START C15
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B4 ROVPTOV3_START C16
B5 CCBRBRF1_TRRET C17
OR6 B6 CCBRBRF1_TRBU C18
C19
DEFLPDEF2_START B1 O C20
WPWDE2_START B2 C21
EFPADM2_START B3 OR INTRPTEF1_OPERATE C22
B4 EFHPTOC1_OPERATE C23
B5 NSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE C24
B6 NSPTOC2_OPERATE B2 INRPHAR1_BLK2H C25
T1PTTR1_OPERATE C26
C27
C28
ARCSARC1_OPERATE C29
OR6 OR ARCSARC2_OPERATE C30
ARCSARC3_OPERATE C31
DEFHPDEF1_START B1 O B1 O C32
WPWDE3_START B2 B2 DARREC1_INPRO C33
EFPADM3_START B3 X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING C34
B4 X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED C35
B5 X120_BI3_CB_OPENED C36
B6 SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_3PH C37
OR6 SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_U C38
CCRDIF1_FAIL C39
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O C40
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B2 C41
OR6 ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B3 C42
B4 C43
WPWDE1_OPERATE B1 O B5 C44
WPWDE2_OPERATE B2 B6 C45
WPWDE3_OPERATE B3 C46
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B4 C47
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B5 C48
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B6 C49
OR6 C50
C51
ARCSARC1_ARC_FLT_DET B1 O C52
ARCSARC2_ARC_FLT_DET B2 C53
OR6 ARCSARC3_ARC_FLT_DET B3 C54
B4 C55
EFPADM1_OPERATE B1 O B5 C56
EFPADM2_OPERATE B2 B6 C57
EFPADM3_OPERATE B3 C58
B4 C59
B5 C60
B6 C61
OR C62
C63
DARREC1_CLOSE_CB B1 O C64
DARREC1_UNSUC_RECL B2
GUID-9B480C8C-BE93-44AF-8875-E05758D8ADEF V2 EN
CCRDIF1
BLOCK FAIL CCRDIF1_FAIL
ALARM CCRDIF1_ALARM
GUID-A30F7A43-064F-4FD2-B61A-78C53A6AE05E V1 EN
The fuse failure supervision function SEQRFUF1 detects failures in the voltage
measurement circuits. Failures, such as an open MCB, raise an alarm.
SEQRFUF1
BLOCK FUSEF_3PH SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_3PH
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED CB_CLOSED FUSEF_U SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_U
DISCON_OPEN
X110_BI1_MCB_OPENED MINCB_OPEN
GUID-2F8FAD2F-F878-403E-B153-9F9A9FA4BDED V1 EN
150 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
The circuit breaker condition monitoring function SSCBR1 supervises the switch
status based on the connected binary input information and the measured current
levels. SSCBR1 introduces various supervision methods.
SSCBR1
BLOCK TRV_T_OP_ALM SSCBR1_TRV_T_OP_ALM
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED POSOPEN TRV_T_CL_ALM SSCBR1_TRV_T_CL_ALM
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED POSCLOSE SPR_CHR_ALM SSCBR1_SPR_CHR_ALM
CB_OPEN_COMMAND OPEN_CB_EXE OPR_ALM SSCBR1_OPR_ALM
CB_CLOSE_COMMAND CLOSE_CB_EXE OPR_LO SSCBR1_OPR_LO
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM PRES_ALM_IN IPOW_ALM SSCBR1_IPOW_ALM
PRES_LO_IN IPOW_LO SSCBR1_IPOW_LO
CB_SPRING_DISCHARGED SPR_CHR_ST CB_LIFE_ALM SSCBR1_CB_LIFE_ALM
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED SPR_CHR MON_ALM SSCBR1_MON_ALM
RST_IPOW PRES_ALM SSCBR1_PRES_ALM
RST_CB_WEAR PRES_LO SSCBR1_PRES_LO
RST_TRV_T OPENPOS
RST_SPR_T INVALIDPOS
CLOSEPOS
GUID-FA39D0B3-73EC-4CE0-924C-C09E47645694 V1 EN
OR6
SSCBR1_TRV_T_OP_ALM B1 O
SSCBR1_TRV_T_CL_ALM B2
SSCBR1_SPR_CHR_ALM B3
SSCBR1_OPR_ALM B4
SSCBR1_OPR_LO B5 OR
SSCBR1_IPOW_ALM B6
B1 O SSCBR1_ALARMS
B2
OR6
SSCBR1_IPOW_LO B1 O
SSCBR1_CB_LIFE_ALM B2
SSCBR1_MON_ALM B3
SSCBR1_PRES_ALM B4
SSCBR1_PRES_LO B5
B6
GUID-A4F15AD3-B2C0-4983-9759-304CFAD5A308 V1 EN
NOT
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED IN OUT CB_SPRING_DISCHARGED
GUID-D5C30CF5-A21D-436A-BFF5-AA48E0BE4256 V1 EN
Two separate trip circuit supervision functions are included: TCSSCBR1 for power
output X100:PO3 and TCSSCBR2 for power output X100:PO4. Both functions are
blocked by the Master Trip TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2 and the circuit breaker
open signal.
REF615 151
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
TCSSCBR1
TCSSCBR_BLOCKING BLOCK ALARM TCSSCBR1_ALARM
TCSSCBR2
TCSSCBR_BLOCKING BLOCK ALARM TCSSCBR2_ALARM
OR
TCSSCBR1_ALARM B1 O TCSSCBR_ALARM
TCSSCBR2_ALARM B2
GUID-58DD6776-004D-4B7C-8F75-A68BBA22EE1D V1 EN
OR6
TRPPTRC1_TRIP B1 O TCSSCBR_BLOCKING
TRPPTRC2_TRIP B2
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-551738DE-408E-4244-861F-335A3D86A8DA V1 EN
Two types of disconnector and earthing switch function blocks are available.
DCSXSWI1...3 and ESSXSWI1...2 are status only type, and DCXSWI1...2 and
ESXSWI1 are controllable type. By default, the status only blocks are connected in
standard configuration. The disconnector (CB truck) and line side earthing switch
status information is connected to DCSXSWI1 and ESSXSI1.
DCSXSWI1
X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_TEST POSOPEN OPENPOS
X110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_SERVICE POSCLOSE CLOSEPOS
OKPOS DCSXSWI1_OKPOS
GUID-7EE30E79-0EE5-4765-A882-92BE768FB3DB V1 EN
152 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
ESSXSWI1
X110_BI8_ES1_OPENED POSOPEN OPENPOS ESSXSWI1_OPENPOS
X110_BI7_ES1_CLOSED POSCLOSE CLOSEPOS
OKPOS
GUID-80A3714D-28AB-41ED-909C-8B77D552115A V1 EN
The circuit breaker closing is enabled when the ENA_CLOSE input is activated.
The input can be activated by the configuration logic, which is a combination of
the disconnector or breaker truck and earth-switch position status, status of the trip
logics, gas pressure alarm and circuit-breaker spring charging status.
The OKPOS output from DCSXSWI defines if the disconnector or breaker truck is
definitely either open (in test position) or close (in service position). This output,
together with the open earth-switch and non-active trip signals, activates the close-
enable signal to the circuit breaker control function block. The open operation for
circuit breaker is always enabled.
The ITL_BYPASS input can be used, for example, to always enable the closing of
the circuit breaker when the circuit breaker truck is in the test position.
ITL_BYPASS overrides, for example, active interlocking conditions when the
circuit breaker truck is closed in service position.
CBXCBR1
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED POSOPEN SELECTED CBXCBR1_SELECTED
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED POSCLOSE EXE_OP CBXCBR1_EXE_OP
TRUE ENA_OPEN EXE_CL CBXCBR1_EXE_CL
CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSE ENA_CLOSE OPENPOS
FALSE BLK_OPEN CLOSEPOS
CBXCBR1_BLK_CLOSE BLK_CLOSE OKPOS
CBXBCR1_AU_OPEN AU_OPEN OPEN_ENAD
CBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE AU_CLOSE CLOSE_ENAD
ITL_BYPASS
GUID-48200DE5-D086-41E5-A91F-3F4975700417 V1 EN
OR
CBXCBR1_EXE_CL B1 O CB_CLOSE_COMMAND
DARREC1_CLOSE_CB B2
GUID-D6C245AC-FBC9-4A60-A086-A8F76CCC791E V1 EN
Figure 199: Circuit breaker control logic: Signals for closing coil of circuit
breaker 1
REF615 153
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
OR6
CBXCBR1_EXE_OP B1 O CB_OPEN_COMMAND
TRPPTRC1_TRIP B2
DARREC1_OPEN_CB B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-ADCCB058-4D03-49FE-B434-C81296BF655D V1 EN
Figure 200: Circuit breaker control logic: Signals for opening coil of circuit
breaker 1
AND6
DCSXSWI1_OKPOS B1 O CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSE
ESSXSWI1_OPENPOS B2
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED B3
B4
NOT B5
B6
TRPPTRC1_TRIP IN OUT
NOT
TRPPTRC2_TRIP IN OUT
NOT
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM IN OUT
GUID-90D8B4C7-0F74-4BD3-9863-6BBD1517457E V1 EN
OR6
T1PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE B1 O CBXCBR1_BLK_CLOSE
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-02C2AAA3-BF48-4645-AA7E-F951054AC78A V1 EN
The configuration includes the logic for generating circuit breaker external closing
and opening commands with the IED in local or remote mode.
Check the logic for the external circuit breaker closing command
and modify it according to the application.
154 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
AND
CONTROL_LOCAL B1 O
FALSE B2
OR
B1 O CBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE
B2
AND
CONTROL_REMOTE B1 O
FALSE B2
GUID-D63AE948-455C-498A-824F-6EF494C57C06 V1 EN
AND
CONTROL_LOCAL B1 O
FALSE B2
OR
B1 O CBXBCR1_AU_OPEN
B2
AND
CONTROL_REMOTE B1 O
FALSE B2
GUID-53BFABFE-E563-4D53-9FE6-891D0865EB54 V1 EN
The phase current inputs to the IED are measured by the three-phase current
measurement function CMMXU1. The current input is connected to the X120 card
in the back panel. The sequence current measurement CSMSQI1 measures the
sequence current and the residual current measurement RESCMMXU1 measures
the residual current.
The three-phase bus side phase voltage inputs to the IED are measured by voltage
measurement function VMMXU1. The voltage input is connected to the X130 card
in the back panel. The sequence voltage measurement VSMSQI1 measures the
sequence voltage and the residual voltage measurement RESVMMXU1 measures
the residual voltage.
The measurements can be seen from the LHMI and they are available under the
measurement option in the menu selection. Based on the settings, function blocks
can generate low alarm or warning and high alarm or warning signals for the
measured current values.
The frequency measurement FMMXU1 of the power system and the three-phase
power measurement PEMMXU1 are available. The load profile function
LDPMSTA1 is included in the measurements sheet. LDPMSTA1 offers the ability
to observe the loading history of the corresponding feeder.
CMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
LOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM
GUID-40AF615B-1FC1-4ACD-9605-8D6DD5DC23C3 V1 EN
REF615 155
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
CSMSQI1
GUID-6A3F5E6F-1761-48A6-95B3-ED80C4C52230 V1 EN
RESCMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
GUID-069DC247-81C1-42C2-BCDA-B0BF14A689D1 V1 EN
VMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
LOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM
GUID-CFCB119A-3804-4ACD-8602-3272972B7A38 V1 EN
VSMSQI1
GUID-2C998191-50DF-441F-80A3-88B55A5D5A60 V1 EN
RESVMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
GUID-8885E482-DAB8-4B05-8B7F-939A6887DE6A V1 EN
FMMXU1
GUID-931EB287-D786-48A3-ABD5-816D18251871 V1 EN
PEMMXU1
RSTACM
GUID-BC19323E-D87F-44E4-9931-07947BA99D7B V1 EN
FLTMSTA1
BLOCK
CB_CLRD
GUID-DECFB7E8-C22C-44CF-9827-96E0D647B727 V1 EN
156 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
LDPMSTA1
RSTMEM MEM_WARN
MEM_ALARM
GUID-1585F0D5-FC5A-4D1D-BF63-661830AD6291 V1 EN
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 1 OR
B1 O X110_BI1_MCB_OPENED
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 1
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 2 OR
B1 O X110_BI2_RCA_CONTROL
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 2
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 3 OR
B1 O X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 3
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 4 OR
B1 O X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 4
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 5 OR
B1 O X110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_SERVICE
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 5
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 6 OR
B1 O X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_TEST
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 6
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 7 OR
B1 O X110_BI7_ES1_CLOSED
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 7
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 8 OR
B1 O X110_BI8_ES1_OPENED
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 8
GUID-5588E05A-3610-45C9-9CB8-6E63C4CAF64E V1 EN
REF615 157
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING
X120 (AIM).X120-Input 1
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
X120 (AIM).X120-Input 2
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED
X120 (AIM).X120-Input 3
X120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT
X120 (AIM).X120-Input 4
GUID-A7C227B5-59D1-4E93-9B61-AAD367D93DC0 V1 EN
UPSTEAM_OC_BLOCKING
X110 (BIO).X110-SO1
TRPPTRC3_TRIP
X110 (BIO-H).X110-HSO1
OC_OPERATE_PULSE
X110 (BIO).X110-SO2
TRPPTRC4_TRIP
X110 (BIO-H).X110-HSO2
EF_OPERATE_PULSE
X110 (BIO).X110-SO3
TRPPTRC5_TRIP
X110 (BIO-H).X110-HSO3
GUID-CBC32DCC-0DC7-4C6A-B3F5-B0CC5FAE5ABA V1 EN
CB_CLOSE_COMMAND
X100 (PSM).X100-PO1
CCBRBRF1_TRBU
X100 (PSM).X100-PO2
GENERAL_START_PULSE
X100 (PSM).X100-SO1
GENERAL_OPERATE_PULSE
X100 (PSM).X100-SO2
CB_OPEN_COMMAND
X100 (PSM).X100-PO3
TRPPTRC2_TRIP
X100 (PSM).X100-PO4
GUID-9DAF69E3-2710-4480-81ED-C48E03936098 V1 EN
158 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
LED1
OK
PHxPTOC_OPERATE ALARM
RESET
LED2
OR6
OK
DEFxPDEF_OPERATE B1 O ALARM
EFPADM_OPERATE B2 RESET
WPWDE_OPERATE B3
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE B4
B5
B6
LED3
OR
OK
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O ALARM
ROVPTOV_OPERATE B2 RESET
LED4
OR
OK
NSPTOC_OPERATE B1 O ALARM
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B2 RESET
LED5
OK
T1PTTR1_ALARM ALARM
RESET
GUID-C8CFA43B-974D-4635-BBD3-6EE8F9846A72 V1 EN
REF615 159
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
LED6
OK
CCBRBRF1_TRBU ALARM
RESET
LED7
OK
DISTURB_RECORD_TRIGGERED ALARM
RESET
LED8
OK
SSCBR1_ALARMS ALARM
RESET
LED9
OR6
OK
TCSSCBR_ALARM B1 O ALARM
CCRDIF1_ALARM B2 RESET
SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_3PH B3
SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_U B4
B5
B6
LED10
OK
ARCSARC_OPERATE ALARM
RESET
LED11
OK
DARREC1_INPRO ALARM
RESET
GUID-9C2A6ED2-F200-4F69-8C7A-1FEA8448A058 V1 EN
The configuration also includes overcurrent operate and earth-fault operate logic.
The operate logics are connected to the pulse timer TPGAPC for setting the
minimum pulse length for the outputs. The output from TPGAPC is connected to
the binary outputs.
TPGAPC2
PHxPTOC_OPERATE IN1 OUT1 OC_OPERATE_PULSE
IN2 OUT2 EF_OPERATE_PULSE
OR6
DEFxPDEF_OPERATE B1 O
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE B2
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B3
WPWDE_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV_OPERATE B5
EFPADM_OPERATE B6
GUID-4EA8A665-E29F-4D10-93D9-DCD0CFDD05EC V1 EN
Figure 220: Timer logic for overcurrent and earth-fault operate pulse
160 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
3.8.1 Applications
The IED with a standard configuration is delivered from the factory with default
settings and parameters. The end user flexibility for incoming, outgoing and
internal signal designation within the IED enables this configuration to be further
adapted to different primary circuit layouts and the related functionality needs by
modifying the internal functionality using PCM600.
REF615 161
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
3.8.2 Functions
UL1UL2UL3
Uo
94/86
U12 0. 0 kV
P 0.00 kW
IL2 0 A
- User management
I ESC Clear
- Web HMI
2×
AND
I2> I2/I1> 3Ith>F 3I>>> O R
3× 3×
3U< U2> U1< 3U> O→I
UL1UL2UL3 27 47O- 47U+ 59 79
REMARKS
18× Optional 3× No. of Calculated OR Alternative
MAP function instances value function to be
MAP Io/Uo defined when
2xRTD ordering
1xmA
GUID-6130FC3E-1C25-479D-B922-BA263933D048 V1 EN
Connector
PROTECTION
pins for each input and output are presented in the IED physical
LOCAL HMI
Configuration
System
A
connections section.
HMI
Time
Authorization
I ESC Clear
A
O R
L
U12 0. 0 kV
P 0.00 kW
Q 0.00 kVAr
IL2 0 A
I ESC Clear
AND
O R
L
OR
REF615 163
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
LED Description
7 Disturbance recorder triggered
8 Circuit breaker condition monitoring alarm
9 Supervision alarm
10 Arc fault detected
11 Autoreclose in progress
164 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
REF615 165
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
The analog channels have fixed connections to the different function blocks inside
the IED’s standard configuration. However, the 12 analog channels available for
the disturbance recorder function are freely selectable as a part of the disturbance
recorder’s parameter settings.
The phase currents to the IED are fed from a current transformer. The residual
current to the IED is fed from either residually connected CTs, an external core
balance CT, neutral CT or internally calculated.
166 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
The phase voltages to the IED are fed from a voltage transformer. The residual
voltage to the IED is fed from either residually connected VTs, an open delta
connected VT or internally calculated.
The IED offers six different settings groups which can be set based on individual
needs. Each group can be activated or deactivated using the setting group settings
available in the IED.
The functional diagrams describe protection functionality of the IEDs in detail and
according to the factory set default connections.
Four overcurrent stages are offered for overcurrent and short-circuit protection.
Three of them include directional functionality DPHxPDOC. The non-directional
instantaneous stage PHIPTOC1 can be blocked by energizing the binary input
X120: BI1.
PHIPTOC1
X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING BLOCK OPERATE PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START PHIPTOC1_START
GUID-B10D3E4D-E329-4FBC-9178-166E6E190603 V1 EN
REF615 167
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
DPHHPDOC1
BLOCK OPERATE DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START DPHHPDOC1_START
NON_DIR
DPHLPDOC1
BLOCK OPERATE DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START DPHLPDOC1_START
NON_DIR
DPHLPDOC2
BLOCK OPERATE DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START DPHLPDOC2_START
NON_DIR
OR6
DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE B1 O DPHxPDOC_OPERATE
DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE B2
DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-C07091F0-AAEA-403B-A72A-11912CD886C0 V1 EN
The upstream blocking from the start of the directional overcurrent second low
stage DPHLPDOC2 is connected to the binary output X110:SO1. This output can
be used for sending a blocking signal to the relevant overcurrent protection stage of
the IED at the infeeding bay.
OR6
DPHLPDOC2_START B1 O UPSTEAM_OC_BLOCKING
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-5EFA1CBD-DC1F-46F0-ABF2-D42054BB7BD7 V1 EN
The inrush detection block's (INRPHAR1) output BLK2H enables either blocking
the function or multiplying the active settings for any of the available overcurrent
or earth-fault function blocks.
INRPHAR1
BLOCK BLK2H INRPHAR1_BLK2H
GUID-14BD5163-8EB0-4B61-8C4A-0DF50393EBA9 V1 EN
Two negative sequence overcurrent stages NSPTOC1 and NSPTOC2 are provided
for phase unbalance protection. These functions are used to protect the feeder
168 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
against phase unbalance. Both the negative sequence overcurrent protections are
blocked in case of detection in failure in secondary circuit of current transformer.
NSPTOC1
CCRDIF1_FAIL BLOCK OPERATE NSPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START NSPTOC1_START
NSPTOC2
CCRDIF1_FAIL BLOCK OPERATE NSPTOC2_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START NSPTOC2_START
OR
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O NSPTOC_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B2
GUID-67A842F4-BA87-4B21-A921-35B8447380EE V1 EN
Three stages are provided for directional earth-fault protection. According to the
IED's order code, the directional earth-fault protection method can be based on
conventional directional earth-fault DEFxPDEF only or alternatively together with
admittance criteria EFPADM or wattmetric earth-fault protection WPWDE or
harmonic based earth-fault protection HAEFPTOC. A dedicated protection stage
INTRPTEF is used either for transient-based earth-fault protection or for cable
intermittent earth-fault protection in compensated networks.
REF615 169
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
DEFLPDEF1
BLOCK OPERATE DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START DEFLPDEF1_START
X110_BI2_RCA_CONTROL RCA_CTL
DEFLPDEF2
BLOCK OPERATE DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START DEFLPDEF2_START
X110_BI2_RCA_CONTROL RCA_CTL
DEFHPDEF1
BLOCK OPERATE DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START DEFHPDEF1_START
X110_BI2_RCA_CONTROL RCA_CTL
OR6
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O DEFxPDEF_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B2
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-8C13FB21-2ECA-48BC-A73D-CA66853C1E3E V1 EN
INTRPTEF1
BLOCK OPERATE INTRPTEF1_OPERATE
START INTRPTEF1_START
BLK_EF
GUID-D6626AFF-571A-49AC-82A0-10740638CA38 V1 EN
170 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
WPWDE1
BLOCK OPERATE WPWDE1_OPERATE
X110_BI2_RCA_CONTROL RCA_CTL START WPWDE1_START
WPWDE2
BLOCK OPERATE WPWDE2_OPERATE
X110_BI2_RCA_CONTROL RCA_CTL START WPWDE2_START
WPWDE3
BLOCK OPERATE WPWDE3_OPERATE
X110_BI2_RCA_CONTROL RCA_CTL START WPWDE3_START
OR6
WPWDE1_OPERATE B1 O WPWDE_OPERATE
WPWDE2_OPERATE B2
WPWDE3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-EF2254F3-48A7-47D1-902D-FF03338D0A95 V1 EN
EFPADM1
BLOCK OPERATE EFPADM1_OPERATE
RELEASE START EFPADM1_START
EFPADM2
BLOCK OPERATE EFPADM2_OPERATE
RELEASE START EFPADM2_START
EFPADM3
BLOCK OPERATE EFPADM3_OPERATE
RELEASE START EFPADM3_START
OR6
EFPADM1_OPERATE B1 O EFPADM_OPERATE
EFPADM2_OPERATE B2
EFPADM3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-5DB4A853-DF00-466B-9358-00E320CA00CD V1 EN
REF615 171
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
EFHPTOC1
CCRDIF1_FAIL BLOCK OPERATE EFHPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START EFHPTOC1_START
GUID-60E23765-A067-4FEF-961F-64455744F93D V1 EN
PDNSPTOC1
CCRDIF1_FAIL BLOCK OPERATE PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE
START PDNSPTOC1_START
GUID-C2943C6D-503D-42E8-B69C-E9D8E7DB69FD V1 EN
The thermal overload protection T1PTTR1 detects overloads under varying load
conditions. The BLK_CLOSE output of the function is used to block the closing
operation of circuit breaker.
T1PTTR1
BLK_OPR OPERATE T1PTTR1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START T1PTTR1_START
TEMP_AMB ALARM T1PTTR1_ALARM
BLK_CLOSE T1PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE
GUID-D139F760-E980-4005-A357-84775C585A0A V1 EN
The breaker failure protection CCBRBRF1 is initiated via the START input by a
number of different protection functions available in the IED. The breaker-failure
protection function offers different operating modes associated with the circuit
breaker position and the measured phase and residual currents.
The breaker failure protection function has two operating outputs: TRRET and
TRBU. The TRRET operate output is used for retripping its own breaker through
TRPPTRC2_TRIP. The TRBU output is used to give a backup trip to the breaker
feeding upstream. For this purpose, the TRBU operate output signal is connected to
the binary output X100:PO2.
172 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
CCBRBRF1
OR6 OR6
BLOCK CB_FAULT_AL
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O START TRBU CCBRBRF1_TRBU
DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE B2 B2 POSCLOSE TRRET CCBRBRF1_TRRET
DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE B3 B3 CB_FAULT
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B4 B4
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B5 B5
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B6 B6
OR6
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B2
WPWDE2_OPERATE B3
WPWDE3_OPERATE B4
EFPADM2_OPERATE B5
EFPADM3_OPERATE B6
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
GUID-3E7F088B-7253-451D-949B-28EF578ED260 V1 EN
The operate signals from ARCSARC1...3 are connected to both trip logic
TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2. If the IED has been ordered with high speed binary
outputs, the individual operate signals from ARCSARC1...3 are connected to
dedicated trip logic TRPPTRC3...5. The output of TRPPTRC3...5 are available at
high speed outputs X110:HSO1, X110:HSO2 and X110:HSO3.
REF615 173
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
ARCSARC1
BLOCK OPERATE ARCSARC1_OPERATE
REM_FLT_ARC ARC_FLT_DET ARCSARC1_ARC_FLT_DET
OPR_MODE
ARCSARC2
BLOCK OPERATE ARCSARC2_OPERATE
REM_FLT_ARC ARC_FLT_DET ARCSARC2_ARC_FLT_DET
OPR_MODE
ARCSARC3
BLOCK OPERATE ARCSARC3_OPERATE
REM_FLT_ARC ARC_FLT_DET ARCSARC3_ARC_FLT_DET
OPR_MODE
OR6
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B1 O ARCSARC_OPERATE
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-C3947F6D-AECD-4662-ACB3-CA2D5258221B V1 EN
TRPPTRC3
BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC3_TRIP
ARCSARC1_OPERATE OPERATE CL_LKOUT
X120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT RST_LKOUT
TRPPTRC4
BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC4_TRIP
ARCSARC2_OPERATE OPERATE CL_LKOUT
X120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT RST_LKOUT
TRPPTRC5
BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC5_TRIP
ARCSARC3_OPERATE OPERATE CL_LKOUT
X120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT RST_LKOUT
GUID-DD707ABE-A698-47F0-8891-034B35A02E20 V1 EN
174 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
control command to the circuit breaker, either local or remote, also blocks the
autorecloser function via the CBXCBR1-SELECTED signal.
The circuit breaker availability for the autorecloser sequence is expressed with the
CB_READY input in DARREC1. The signal, and other required signals, are
connected to the CB spring charged binary inputs in this configuration. The open
command from the autorecloser is connected directly to binary output X100:PO3,
whereas close command is connected directly to binary output X100:PO1.
DARREC1
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE INIT_1 OPEN_CB DARREC1_OPEN_CB
OR6 DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE INIT_2 CLOSE_CB DARREC1_CLOSE_CB
DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE INIT_3 CMD_WAIT
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B1 O INIT_4 INPRO DARREC1_INPRO
EFPADM2_OPERATE B2 INIT_5 LOCKED
WPWDE2_OPERATE B3 INIT_6 PROT_CRD
B4 DEL_INIT_2 UNSUC_RECL DARREC1_UNSUC_RECL
B5 DEL_INIT_3 AR_ON
B6 DEL_INIT_4 READY
BLK_RECL_T ACTIVE
BLK_RCLM_T
BLK_THERM
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED CB_POS
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED CB_READY
OR6 INC_SHOTP
INHIBIT_RECL
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O RECL_ON
EFPADM3_OPERATE B2 SYNC
WPWDE3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
OR6
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B2
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B3
CBXCBR1_SELECTED B4
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE B5 OR
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM B6
B1 O
B2
OR6
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B1 O
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-709680CA-5730-419E-B1AB-9E7C419C3450 V1 EN
REF615 175
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
PHPTOV1
BLOCK OPERATE PHPTOV1_OPERATE
START PHPTOV1_START
PHPTOV2
BLOCK OPERATE PHPTOV2_OPERATE
START PHPTOV2_START
PHPTOV3
BLOCK OPERATE PHPTOV3_OPERATE
START PHPTOV3_START
OR6
PHPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O PHPTOV_OPERATE
PHPTOV2_OPERATE B2
PHPTOV3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-A11EA1D0-3A52-4887-9CC5-3C30268D2988 V1 EN
PHPTUV1
SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_U BLOCK OPERATE PHPTUV1_OPERATE
START PHPTUV1_START
PHPTUV2
SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_U BLOCK OPERATE PHPTUV2_OPERATE
START PHPTUV2_START
PHPTUV3
SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_U BLOCK OPERATE PHPTUV3_OPERATE
START PHPTUV3_START
OR6
PHPTUV1_OPERATE B1 O PHPTUV_OPERATE
PHPTUV2_OPERATE B2
PHPTUV3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-54CEBBC3-C767-4439-8B2E-77B3D78E79AB V1 EN
176 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
ROVPTOV1
BLOCK OPERATE ROVPTOV1_OPERATE
START ROVPTOV1_START
ROVPTOV2
BLOCK OPERATE ROVPTOV2_OPERATE
START ROVPTOV2_START
ROVPTOV3
BLOCK OPERATE ROVPTOV3_OPERATE
START ROVPTOV3_START
OR6
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O ROVPTOV_OPERATE
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B2
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-96FB05DC-7A3B-4A22-AA35-1963D950722B V1 EN
NSPTOV1
SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_U BLOCK OPERATE NSPTOV1_OPERATE
START NSPTOV1_START
GUID-4CDD5E93-A445-40B2-9613-904A3ADFB339 V1 EN
PSPTUV1
SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_U BLOCK OPERATE PSPTUV1_OPERATE
START PSPTUV1_START
GUID-4D2257BB-0968-4E93-9124-BCBBE323AC4B V1 EN
General start and operate from all the functions are connected to pulse timer
TPGAPC1 for setting the minimum pulse length for the outputs. The output from
TPGAPC1 is connected to binary outputs
REF615 177
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
OR6 OR6
DPHLPDOC1_START B1 O B1 O
DPHLPDOC2_START B2 B2
DPHHPDOC1_START B3 B3
PHIPTOC1_START B4 B4
NSPTOC1_START B5 B5
NSPTOC2_START B6 B6
TPGAPC1
IN1 OUT1 GENERAL_START_PULSE
IN2 OUT2 GENERAL_OPERATE_PULSE
OR6 OR6 OR6
DEFLPDEF1_START B1 O DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O
DEFLPDEF2_START B2 DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE B2 B2
DEFHPDEF1_START B3 DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE B3 B3
INTRPTEF1_START B4 NSPTOC1_OPERATE B4 B4
EFHPTOC1_START B5 NSPTOC2_OPERATE B5 B5
PDNSPTOC1_START B6 PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B6 B6
OR6 OR6
PHPTOV1_START B1 O DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O
PHPTOV2_START B2 DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B2
PHPTOV3_START B3 DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B3
PSPTUV1_START B4 INTRPTEF1_OPERATE B4
NSPTOV1_START B5 EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B5
PHPTUV1_START B6 PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B6
OR6 OR6
PHPTUV2_START B1 O EFPADM1_OPERATE B1 O
PHPTUV3_START B2 EFPADM2_OPERATE B2
ROVPTOV1_START B3 EFPADM3_OPERATE B3
ROVPTOV2_START B4 ARCSARC1_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV3_START B5 ARCSARC2_OPERATE B5
B6 ARCSARC3_OPERATE B6
OR6 OR6
EFPADM1_START B1 O PHPTUV1_OPERATE B1 O
EFPADM2_START B2 PHPTUV2_OPERATE B2
EFPADM3_START B3 PHPTUV3_OPERATE B3
WPWDE1_START B4 NSPTOV1_OPERATE B4
WPWDE2_START B5 PSPTUV1_OPERATE B5
WPWDE3_START B6 PHPTOV1_OPERATE B6
OR6
PHPTOV2_OPERATE B1 O
PHPTOV3_OPERATE B2
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B3
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B5
B6
OR6
WPWDE1_OPERATE B1 O
WPWDE2_OPERATE B2
WPWDE3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-2F8D1A94-63C3-49BF-86C7-0D79BAA3B44A V1 EN
The operate signals from the protection functions are connected to the two trip
logics TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2. The output of these trip logic functions is
available at binary output X100:PO3 and X100:PO4. The trip logic functions are
provided with a lockout and latching function, event generation and the trip signal
duration setting. If the lockout operation mode is selected, binary input X120:BI4
has been assigned to RST_LKOUT input of both the trip logic to enable external
reset with a push button.
Three other trip logics TRPPTRC3...4 are also available if the IED is ordered with
high speed binary outputs options.
178 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
TRPPTRC1
OR6 OR6
BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC1_TRIP
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O OPERATE CL_LKOUT
DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE B2 B2 RST_LKOUT
DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE B3 B3
DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE B4 B4
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B5 B5
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B6 B6
OR6
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B2
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B3
EFPADM1_OPERATE B4
EFPADM2_OPERATE B5
EFPADM3_OPERATE B6
OR6
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE B1 O
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B3
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B5
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B6
OR6
WPWDE1_OPERATE B1 O
WPWDE2_OPERATE B2
WPWDE3_OPERATE B3
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B4
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B5
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B6
OR6
PHPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O
PHPTOV2_OPERATE B2
PHPTOV3_OPERATE B3
PSPTUV1_OPERATE B4
NSPTOV1_OPERATE B5
PHPTUV1_OPERATE B6
OR6
PHPTUV2_OPERATE B1 O
PHPTUV3_OPERATE B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
X120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT
GUID-29A42450-D205-4A90-A1AF-825C44CBE68B V1 EN
REF615 179
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
TRPPTRC2
OR6 OR6
BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC2_TRIP
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O OPERATE CL_LKOUT
DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE B2 B2 RST_LKOUT
DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE B3 B3
DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE B4 B4
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B5 B5
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B6 B6
OR6
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B2
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B3
EFPADM1_OPERATE B4
EFPADM2_OPERATE B5
EFPADM3_OPERATE B6
OR6
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE B1 O
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B3
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B5
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B6
OR6
NSPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O
CCBRBRF1_TRRET B2
WPWDE1_OPERATE B3
WPWDE2_OPERATE B4
WPWDE3_OPERATE B5
PSPTUV1_OPERATE B6
OR6
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B1 O
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
PHPTUV1_OPERATE B4
PHPTUV2_OPERATE B5
PHPTUV3_OPERATE B6
OR6
PHPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O
PHPTOV2_OPERATE B2
PHPTOV3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
X120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT
GUID-910DA8E9-69B1-433E-8A29-0AA327F579AE V1 EN
The START and the OPERATE outputs from the protection stages are routed to
trigger the disturbance recorder or, alternatively, only to be recorded by the
disturbance recorder depending on the parameter settings. Additionally, the
selected signals from different functions and the few binary inputs are also
connected to the disturbance recorder.
180 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
OR6
DEFLPDEF1_START B1 O
EFPADM1_START B2
WPWDE1_START B3
B4 RDRE1
B5
B6 DPHLPDOC1_START C1 TRIGGERED DISTURB_RECORD_TRIGGERED
OR6 DPHLPDOC2_START C2
DPHHPDOC1_START C3
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O PHIPTOC1_START C4
DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE B2 NSPTOC1_START C5
DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE B3 OR6 NSPTOC2_START C6
DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE B4 C7
B5 DEFLPDEF2_START B1 O C8
B6 EFPADM2_START B2 C9
WPWDE2_START B3 INTRPTEF1_START C10
B4 EFHPTOC1_START C11
B5 PDNSPTOC1_START C12
B6 T1PTTR1_START C13
OR PHPTOV1_START C14
PHPTOV2_START C15
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O PHPTOV3_START C16
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B2 OR6 PSPTUV1_START C17
NSPTOV1_START C18
DEFHPDEF1_START B1 O PHPTUV1_START C19
EFPADM3_START B2 PHPTUV2_START C20
WPWDE3_START B3 PHPTUV3_START C21
B4 ROVPTOV1_START C22
B5 ROVPTOV2_START C23
OR6 B6 ROVPTOV3_START C24
CCBRBRF1_TRRET C25
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O CCBRBRF1_TRBU C26
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B2 OR C27
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B3 C28
EFPADM1_OPERATE B4 B1 O C29
EFPADM2_OPERATE B5 B2 INTRPTEF1_OPERATE C30
EFPADM3_OPERATE B6 OR6 EFHPTOC1_OPERATE C31
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE C32
PHPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O INRPHAR1_BLK2H C33
PHPTOV2_OPERATE B2 T1PTTR1_OPERATE C34
PHPTOV3_OPERATE B3 C35
OR6 B4 C36
B5 C37
B1 O B6 SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_3PH C38
WPWDE1_OPERATE B2 SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_U C39
WPWDE2_OPERATE B3 CCRDIF1_FAIL C40
WPWDE3_OPERATE B4 X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING C41
B5 X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED C42
B6 OR6 X120_BI3_CB_OPENED C43
C44
PHPTUV1_OPERATE B1 O C45
PHPTUV2_OPERATE B2 ARCSARC1_OPERATE C46
PHPTUV3_OPERATE B3 ARCSARC2_OPERATE C47
B4 ARCSARC3_OPERATE C48
B5 DARREC1_INPRO C49
B6 C50
OR6 C51
C52
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O C53
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B2 C54
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B3 C55
PSPTUV1_OPERATE B4 OR6 C56
NSPTOV1_OPERATE B5 C57
B6 ARCSARC1_ARC_FLT_DET B1 O C58
ARCSARC2_ARC_FLT_DET B2 C59
ARCSARC3_ARC_FLT_DET B3 C60
B4 C61
B5 C62
B6 C63
C64
OR
DARREC1_CLOSE_CB B1 O
DARREC1_UNSUC_RECL B2
GUID-EA71AC89-D293-4E85-9B21-3E36DA2EEFEF V2 EN
CCRDIF1
BLOCK FAIL CCRDIF1_FAIL
ALARM CCRDIF1_ALARM
GUID-31249D4E-19AA-42E0-AD46-C6720DD67A53 V1 EN
SEQRFUF1
BLOCK FUSEF_3PH SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_3PH
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED CB_CLOSED FUSEF_U SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_U
DISCON_OPEN
X110_BI1_MCB_OPENED MINCB_OPEN
GUID-83FF05A1-16D5-41C2-BCD2-39A0D7033704 V1 EN
REF615 181
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
The circuit breaker condition monitoring function SSCBR1 supervises the switch
status based on the connected binary input information and the measured current
levels. SSCBR1 introduces various supervision methods.
SSCBR1
BLOCK TRV_T_OP_ALM SSCBR1_TRV_T_OP_ALM
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED POSOPEN TRV_T_CL_ALM SSCBR1_TRV_T_CL_ALM
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED POSCLOSE SPR_CHR_ALM SSCBR1_SPR_CHR_ALM
CB_OPEN_COMMAND OPEN_CB_EXE OPR_ALM SSCBR1_OPR_ALM
CB_CLOSE_COMMAND CLOSE_CB_EXE OPR_LO SSCBR1_OPR_LO
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM PRES_ALM_IN IPOW_ALM SSCBR1_IPOW_ALM
PRES_LO_IN IPOW_LO SSCBR1_IPOW_LO
CB_SPRING_DISCHARGED SPR_CHR_ST CB_LIFE_ALM SSCBR1_CB_LIFE_ALM
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED SPR_CHR MON_ALM SSCBR1_MON_ALM
RST_IPOW PRES_ALM SSCBR1_PRES_ALM
RST_CB_WEAR PRES_LO SSCBR1_PRES_LO
RST_TRV_T OPENPOS
RST_SPR_T INVALIDPOS
CLOSEPOS
GUID-C4E153AD-BD5F-429A-BE5F-9E16ED24BF87 V1 EN
OR6
SSCBR1_TRV_T_OP_ALM B1 O
SSCBR1_TRV_T_CL_ALM B2
SSCBR1_SPR_CHR_ALM B3
SSCBR1_OPR_ALM B4
SSCBR1_OPR_LO B5 OR
SSCBR1_IPOW_ALM B6
B1 O SSCBR1_ALARMS
B2
OR6
SSCBR1_IPOW_LO B1 O
SSCBR1_CB_LIFE_ALM B2
SSCBR1_MON_ALM B3
SSCBR1_PRES_ALM B4
SSCBR1_PRES_LO B5
B6
GUID-4A44705A-5C89-4D62-98EC-302D5E20BAB9 V1 EN
182 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
NOT
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED IN OUT CB_SPRING_DISCHARGED
GUID-176F56D4-41CA-4646-AAA1-38E65632D403 V1 EN
Two separate trip circuit supervision functions are included: TCSSCBR1 for power
output X100:PO3 and TCSSCBR2 for power output X100:PO4. Both functions are
blocked by the Master Trip TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2 and the circuit breaker
open signal.
TCSSCBR1
TCSSCBR_BLOCKING BLOCK ALARM TCSSCBR1_ALARM
TCSSCBR2
TCSSCBR_BLOCKING BLOCK ALARM TCSSCBR2_ALARM
OR
TCSSCBR1_ALARM B1 O TCSSCBR_ALARM
TCSSCBR2_ALARM B2
GUID-EC7D2528-4B38-4896-897A-7ACB910511A7 V1 EN
REF615 183
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
OR6
TRPPTRC1_TRIP B1 O TCSSCBR_BLOCKING
TRPPTRC2_TRIP B2
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-4B5C2A2D-72E3-4848-B40B-DA6D221A4FAC V1 EN
Two types of disconnector and earthing switch function blocks are available.
DCSXSWI1...3 and ESSXSWI1...2 are status only type, and DCXSWI1...2 and
ESXSWI1 are controllable type. By default, the status only blocks are connected in
standard configuration. The disconnector (CB truck) and line side earthing switch
status information is connected to DCSXSWI1 and ESSXSI1.
DCSXSWI1
X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_TEST POSOPEN OPENPOS
X110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_SERVICE POSCLOSE CLOSEPOS
OKPOS DCSXSWI1_OKPOS
GUID-AE989126-B372-4516-B186-C213B50D226B V1 EN
ESSXSWI1
X110_BI8_ES1_OPENED POSOPEN OPENPOS ESSXSWI1_OPENPOS
X110_BI7_ES1_CLOSED POSCLOSE CLOSEPOS
OKPOS
GUID-BE90D4B4-0DFC-4164-B9B4-846AC15E7100 V1 EN
The circuit breaker closing is enabled when the ENA_CLOSE input is activated.
The input can be activated by the configuration logic, which is a combination of
the disconnector or breaker truck and earth-switch position status, status of the trip
logics, gas pressure alarm and the circuit breaker spring charging status.
The OKPOS output from DCSXSWI defines if the disconnector or breaker truck is
definitely either open (in test position) or close (in service position). This output,
together with the open earth-switch and non-active trip signals, activates the close-
enable signal to the circuit breaker control function block. The open operation for
circuit breaker is always enabled.
The ITL_BYPASS input can be used, for example, to always enable the closing of
the circuit breaker when the circuit breaker truck is in the test position.
ITL_BYPASS overrides, for example, active interlocking conditions when the
circuit breaker truck is closed in service position.
184 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
CBXCBR1
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED POSOPEN SELECTED CBXCBR1_SELECTED
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED POSCLOSE EXE_OP CBXCBR1_EXE_OP
TRUE ENA_OPEN EXE_CL CBXCBR1_EXE_CL
CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSE ENA_CLOSE OPENPOS
FALSE BLK_OPEN CLOSEPOS
CBXCBR1_BLK_CLOSE BLK_CLOSE OKPOS
CBXBCR1_AU_OPEN AU_OPEN OPEN_ENAD
CBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE AU_CLOSE CLOSE_ENAD
ITL_BYPASS
GUID-9A8F2948-56E2-432A-BFDC-9DAD36F414DC V1 EN
OR
CBXCBR1_EXE_CL B1 O CB_CLOSE_COMMAND
DARREC1_CLOSE_CB B2
GUID-4A45B0DB-3CB8-4190-BA99-EE2BF15C696D V1 EN
OR6
CBXCBR1_EXE_OP B1 O CB_OPEN_COMMAND
TRPPTRC1_TRIP B2
DARREC1_OPEN_CB B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-5A234526-696C-4CC5-B39C-387D1AF6D3EB V1 EN
AND6
DCSXSWI1_OKPOS B1 O CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSE
ESSXSWI1_OPENPOS B2
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED B3
B4
NOT B5
B6
TRPPTRC1_TRIP IN OUT
NOT
TRPPTRC2_TRIP IN OUT
NOT
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM IN OUT
GUID-ADC3C9F4-02A8-4B00-8577-66728AE4ADDA V1 EN
OR6
T1PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE B1 O CBXCBR1_BLK_CLOSE
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-C8D94DD3-DB60-4456-B663-A45877AE2D18 V1 EN
REF615 185
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
The configuration includes the logic for generating the circuit breaker external
closing and opening command with the IED in local or remote mode.
Check the logic for the external circuit breaker closing command
and modify it according to the application.
AND
CONTROL_LOCAL B1 O
FALSE B2
OR
B1 O CBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE
B2
AND
CONTROL_REMOTE B1 O
FALSE B2
GUID-7ACFCF02-3DAC-4D9F-94AA-641453214106 V1 EN
AND
CONTROL_LOCAL B1 O
FALSE B2
OR
B1 O CBXBCR1_AU_OPEN
B2
AND
CONTROL_REMOTE B1 O
FALSE B2
GUID-D12A66F5-D434-4C12-93C8-6C855C32EBC6 V1 EN
The phase current inputs to the IED are measured by the three-phase current
measurement function CMMXU1. The current input is connected to the X120 card
in the back panel. The sequence current measurement CSMSQI1 measures the
sequence current and the residual current measurement RESCMMXU1 measures
the residual current.
The three-phase bus side phase voltage inputs to the IED are measured by voltage
measurement function VMMXU1. The voltage input is connected to the X130 card
in the back panel. The sequence voltage measurement VSMSQI1 measures the
sequence voltage and the residual voltage measurement RESVMMXU1 measures
the residual voltage.
The measurements can be seen in the LHMI and they are available under the
measurement option in the menu selection. Based on the settings, function blocks
can generate low alarm or warning and high alarm or warning signals for the
measured current values.
186 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
The frequency measurement FMMXU1 of the power system and the three-phase
power measurement PEMMXU1 are available. The load profile function
LDPMSTA1 is included in the measurements sheet. LDPMSTA1 offers the ability
to observe the loading history of the corresponding feeder.
CMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
LOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM
GUID-F102851D-B189-4394-9FD3-C3ED4A1343D7 V1 EN
CSMSQI1
GUID-C9B80BF2-0589-4041-BE46-D7DC69A33AD3 V1 EN
RESCMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
GUID-11B50582-C98D-4B8B-8981-45B34A38CC7D V1 EN
VMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
LOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM
GUID-109D5132-705F-4AC5-8D96-F98590676ED1 V1 EN
VSMSQI1
GUID-28AF2B18-9670-40E9-9745-709FBCC09857 V1 EN
FMMXU1
GUID-4A7D49A1-D995-468B-B054-59640EA6CCF1 V1 EN
PEMMXU1
RSTACM
GUID-9D027EF7-0CE3-4E0B-8B57-3A4392363A46 V1 EN
REF615 187
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
FLTMSTA1
BLOCK
CB_CLRD
GUID-848C6501-5E08-40FD-823D-11DC11FFAC29 V1 EN
LDPMSTA1
RSTMEM MEM_WARN
MEM_ALARM
GUID-54D8F3DB-4BF4-4C5D-8FD2-D0C99684F934 V1 EN
188 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 1 OR
B1 O X110_BI1_MCB_OPENED
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 1
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 2 OR
B1 O X110_BI2_RCA_CONTROL
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 2
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 3 OR
B1 O X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 3
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 4 OR
B1 O X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 4
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 5 OR
B1 O X110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_SERVICE
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 5
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 6 OR
B1 O X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_TEST
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 6
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 7 OR
B1 O X110_BI7_ES1_CLOSED
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 7
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 8 OR
B1 O X110_BI8_ES1_OPENED
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 8
GUID-7DC22F9C-E131-4AC9-A977-BF120C46FA57 V1 EN
REF615 189
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING
X120 (AIM).X120-Input 1
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
X120 (AIM).X120-Input 2
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED
X120 (AIM).X120-Input 3
X120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT
X120 (AIM).X120-Input 4
GUID-F44B3FFD-F2E1-4535-8500-EC14611C708E V1 EN
UPSTEAM_OC_BLOCKING
X110 (BIO).X110-SO1
TRPPTRC3_TRIP
X110 (BIO-H).X110-HSO1
OC_OPERATE_PULSE
X110 (BIO).X110-SO2
TRPPTRC4_TRIP
X110 (BIO-H).X110-HSO2
EF_OPERATE_PULSE
X110 (BIO).X110-SO3
TRPPTRC5_TRIP
X110 (BIO-H).X110-HSO3
VOLTAGE_OPERATE_PULSE
X110 (BIO).X110-SO4
GUID-B782B1DC-8E73-4E90-8158-193EDA3C3853 V1 EN
CB_CLOSE_COMMAND
X100 (PSM).X100-PO1
CCBRBRF1_TRBU
X100 (PSM).X100-PO2
GENERAL_START_PULSE
X100 (PSM).X100-SO1
GENERAL_OPERATE_PULSE
X100 (PSM).X100-SO2
CB_OPEN_COMMAND
X100 (PSM).X100-PO3
TRPPTRC2_TRIP
X100 (PSM).X100-PO4
GUID-7C083BF3-FB82-4E48-8A2F-A0BE05427CFA V1 EN
190 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
LED1
OR
OK
DEFxPDEF_OPERATE B1 O ALARM
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B2 RESET
LED2
OR6
OK
ROVPTOV_OPERATE B1 O ALARM
EFPADM_OPERATE B2 RESET
WPWDE_OPERATE B3
DEFxPDEF_OPERATE B4
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE B5
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B6
LED3
OR6
OK
NSPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O ALARM
PSPTUV1_OPERATE B2 RESET
PHPTOV_OPERATE B3
PHPTUV_OPERATE B4
B5
B6
LED4
OR
OK
NSPTOC_OPERATE B1 O ALARM
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B2 RESET
LED5
OK
T1PTTR1_ALARM ALARM
RESET
GUID-B77B4CBB-88A8-4250-AACE-22612AF0DC0F V1 EN
REF615 191
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
LED6
OK
CCBRBRF1_TRBU ALARM
RESET
LED7
OK
DISTURB_RECORD_TRIGGERED ALARM
RESET
LED8
OK
SSCBR1_ALARMS ALARM
RESET
LED9
OR6
OK
TCSSCBR_ALARM B1 O ALARM
SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_3PH B2 RESET
SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_U B3
CCRDIF1_ALARM B4
B5
B6
LED10
OK
ARCSARC_OPERATE ALARM
RESET
LED11
OK
DARREC1_INPRO ALARM
RESET
GUID-CBB0DDAA-908A-4246-89A5-2DC455656D3C V1 EN
The configuration also includes overcurrent operate, earth-fault operate and voltage
operate logic. The operate logics are connected to the pulse timer TPGAPC for
setting the minimum pulse length for the outputs. The output from TPGAPC is
connected to the binary outputs.
192 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
OR TPGAPC2
DPHxPDOC_OPERATE B1 O IN1 OUT1 OC_OPERATE_PULSE
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B2 IN2 OUT2 EF_OPERATE_PULSE
OR6
DEFxPDEF_OPERATE B1 O
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE B2
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B3
EFPADM_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV_OPERATE B5
WPWDE_OPERATE B6
GUID-EF44331E-734B-42A8-90D7-66A4DB74D377 V1 EN
Figure 276: Timer logic for overcurrent and earth-fault operate pulse
OR6 TPGAPC3
PSPTUV1_OPERATE B1 O IN1 OUT1 VOLTAGE_OPERATE_PULSE
NSPTOV1_OPERATE B2 IN2 OUT2
PHPTUV_OPERATE B3
PHPTOV_OPERATE B4
B5
B6
GUID-740AB999-1C05-4A9D-A011-724779CB517B V1 EN
3.9.1 Applications
The standard configuration includes directional overcurrent and directional earth-
fault protection, undervoltage and overvoltage protection, frequency protection and
measurement function. The configuration is mainly intended for cable and overhead-
line feeder applications in direct or resistance-earthed distributed networks. The
configuration also includes additional options for selecting earth-fault protection
based on admittance and wattmetric principles.
The IED with a standard configuration is delivered from the factory with default
settings and parameters. The end user flexibility for incoming, outgoing and
internal signal designation within the IED enables this configuration to be further
adapted to different primary circuit layouts and the related functionality needs by
modifying the internal functionality using PCM600.
REF615 193
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
3.9.2 Functions
94/86
U12 0. 0 kV
P 0.00 kW
IL2 0 A
- User management
I ESC Clear
- Web HMI
2×
AND
I2> I2/I1> 3Ith>F 3I>>> O R
3× 3×
3U< U2> U1< 3U> O→I
27 47O- 47U+ 59 79
REMARKS
18× Optional 3× No. of Calculated OR Alternative
MAP function instances value function to be
MAP Io/Uo defined when
ordering
GUID-3524788E-FDB0-4425-9949-C5CBD1301E75 V1 EN
Connector
PROTECTION
pins for each input and output are presented in the IED physical
LOCAL HMI
connections section. Configuration
System
HMI
Time
Authorization
A
I ESC Clear
A
O R
L
U12 0. 0 kV
P 0.00 kW
Q 0.00 kVAr
IL2 0 A
I ESC Clear
AND
O R
L
OR
REF615 195
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
196 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
REF615 197
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
This chapter gives short examples on how to define the correct parameters for
sensors. See the technical manual for detailed information about sensor settings.
198 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
voltage has to be redefined to maintain the same transformation ratio. However, the
setting in the IED (Rated Secondary Value) is not in V but in mV/Hz, which makes
the same setting value valid for both 50 and 60 Hz nominal frequency.
In
× Kr
I pr
RSV =
fn
GUID-6A480073-5C35-4319-8B38-402608D4C098 V2 EN
150 A
× 150mV
80 A mV
= 5.625
50Hz Hz
GUID-13DE42A0-29C0-4FE0-B00B-1215B37E3B7B V2 EN
With this information, the IED Rogowski sensor settings can be set.
In this example the system phase-to-phase voltage rating is 10 kV. Thus, the
Primary voltage parameter is set to 10 kV. For IEDs with sensor measurement
support the Voltage input type is always set to “CVD sensor” and it cannot be
REF615 199
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
changed. The same applies for the VT connection parameter which is always set to
“WYE” type. The division ratio for ABB voltage sensors is most often 10000:1.
Thus, the Division ratio parameter is usually set to “10000”. The primary voltage is
proportionally divided by this division ratio.
The analog channels have fixed connections to the different function blocks inside
the IED’s standard configuration. However, the 12 analog channels available for
the disturbance recorder function are freely selectable as a part of the disturbance
recorder’s parameter settings.
The phase currents to the IED are fed from Rogowski or Combi sensors. The
residual current to the IED is fed from either residually connected CTs, an external
core balance CT, neutral CT or internally calculated.
The phase voltages to the IED are fed from Combi sensors. The residual voltage is
internally calculated.
The IED offers six different settings groups which can be set based on individual
needs. Each group can be activated or deactivated using the setting group settings
available in the IED.
The functional diagrams describe the protection functionality of the IEDs in detail
and according to the factory set default connections.
Four overcurrent stages are offered for overcurrent and short-circuit protection.
Three of them include directional functionality DPHxPDOC.
200 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
PHIPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START PHIPTOC1_START
GUID-9E341F53-8AB2-4A2C-B776-B26D19CAB8F9 V1 EN
DPHHPDOC1
BLOCK OPERATE DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START DPHHPDOC1_START
NON_DIR
DPHLPDOC1
BLOCK OPERATE DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START DPHLPDOC1_START
NON_DIR
DPHLPDOC2
BLOCK OPERATE DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START DPHLPDOC2_START
NON_DIR
OR6
DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE B1 O DPHxPDOC_OPERATE
DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE B2
DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-C39AC382-EF6F-42D4-9F57-A295796FE592 V1 EN
The upstream blocking from the start of the directional overcurrent second low
stage DPHLPDOC2 is connected to the binary output X110:SO1. This output can
be used for sending a blocking signal to the relevant overcurrent protection stage of
the IED at the infeeding bay.
OR6
DPHLPDOC2_START B1 O UPSTEAM_OC_BLOCKING
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-AAA165D7-458D-41C8-9691-E402B65ADC68 V1 EN
The inrush detection block's (INRPHAR1) output BLK2H enables either blocking
the function or multiplying the active settings for any of the available overcurrent
or earth-fault function blocks.
REF615 201
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
INRPHAR1
BLOCK BLK2H INRPHAR1_BLK2H
GUID-48CCCD5A-6F4F-4FF7-9D75-85E2B0DDD8A9 V1 EN
Two negative sequence overcurrent stages NSPTOC1 and NSPTOC2 are provided
for phase unbalance protection. These functions are used to protect the feeder
against phase unbalance. Both negative sequence overcurrent protections are
blocked in case of detection in failure in secondary circuit of sensor.
NSPTOC1
CCRDIF1_FAIL BLOCK OPERATE NSPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START NSPTOC1_START
NSPTOC2
CCRDIF1_FAIL BLOCK OPERATE NSPTOC2_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START NSPTOC2_START
OR
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O NSPTOC_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B2
GUID-863218A0-49A4-400F-A05E-8E9954E4B722 V1 EN
Three stages are provided for directional earth-fault protection. According to the
IED's order code, the directional earth-fault protection method can be based on
conventional directional earth-fault DEFxPDEF only or alternatively together with
admittance criteria EFPADM or wattmetric earth-fault protection WPWDE.
202 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
DEFLPDEF1
BLOCK OPERATE DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START DEFLPDEF1_START
RCA_CTL
DEFLPDEF2
BLOCK OPERATE DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START DEFLPDEF2_START
RCA_CTL
DEFHPDEF1
BLOCK OPERATE DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START DEFHPDEF1_START
RCA_CTL
OR6
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O DEFxPDEF_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B2
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-E9F9F318-12D1-498E-AAE8-31E3EF90FA40 V1 EN
WPWDE1
BLOCK OPERATE WPWDE1_OPERATE
RCA_CTL START WPWDE1_START
WPWDE2
BLOCK OPERATE WPWDE2_OPERATE
RCA_CTL START WPWDE2_START
WPWDE3
BLOCK OPERATE WPWDE3_OPERATE
RCA_CTL START WPWDE3_START
OR6
WPWDE1_OPERATE B1 O WPWDE_OPERATE
WPWDE2_OPERATE B2
WPWDE3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-E3BBF010-632D-4742-A8D0-1F46ABE54DA2 V1 EN
REF615 203
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
EFPADM1
BLOCK OPERATE EFPADM1_OPERATE
RELEASE START EFPADM1_START
EFPADM2
BLOCK OPERATE EFPADM2_OPERATE
RELEASE START EFPADM2_START
EFPADM3
BLOCK OPERATE EFPADM3_OPERATE
RELEASE START EFPADM3_START
OR6
EFPADM1_OPERATE B1 O EFPADM_OPERATE
EFPADM2_OPERATE B2
EFPADM3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-80B32305-038A-4261-AF02-E3E0884E5070 V1 EN
EFHPTOC1
CCRDIF1_FAIL BLOCK OPERATE EFHPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START EFHPTOC1_START
GUID-AD3B6BA3-857E-44BF-9739-2F1D1AADA63B V1 EN
PDNSPTOC1
CCRDIF1_FAIL BLOCK OPERATE PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE
START PDNSPTOC1_START
GUID-A735E86D-1AB7-44FE-B59D-A83FF8EC8362 V1 EN
The thermal overload protection T1PTTR1 detects overloads under varying load
conditions. The BLK_CLOSE output of the function is used to block the closing
operation of circuit breaker.
204 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
T1PTTR1
BLK_OPR OPERATE T1PTTR1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START T1PTTR1_START
TEMP_AMB ALARM T1PTTR1_ALARM
BLK_CLOSE T1PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE
GUID-0B72F2EB-41EF-44CD-9DD4-CA416DFBF0CB V1 EN
The breaker failure protection CCBRBRF1 is initiated via the START input by
number of different protection functions available in the IED. The breaker failure
protection function offers different operating modes associated with the circuit
breaker position and the measured phase and residual currents.
The breaker failure protection function has two operating outputs: TRRET and
TRBU. The TRRET operate output is used for retripping its own breaker through
TRPPTRC2_TRIP. The TRBU output gives a backup trip to the breaker feeding
upstream. For this purpose, the TRBU operate output signal is connected to the
binary output X100:PO2.
CCBRBRF1
OR6 OR6
BLOCK CB_FAULT_AL
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O START TRBU CCBRBRF1_TRBU
DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE B2 B2 POSCLOSE TRRET CCBRBRF1_TRRET
DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE B3 B3 CB_FAULT
DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE B4 B4
EFPADM2_OPERATE B5 B5
EFPADM3_OPERATE B6 B6
OR6
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B2
WPWDE2_OPERATE B3
WPWDE3_OPERATE B4
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B5
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B6
ARCSARC3_OPERATE
X110_BI1_CB_CLOSED
GUID-89971B6B-6846-4ADA-B9D0-D0130A01832F V1 EN
The operate signals from ARCSARC1...3 are connected to both trip logic
TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2. If the IED has been ordered with high speed binary
outputs, the individual operate signals from ARCSARC1...3 are connected to
dedicated trip logic TRPPTRC3...5. The output of TRPPTRC3...5 are available at
high speed outputs X110:HSO1, X110:HSO2 and X110:HSO3.
REF615 205
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
ARCSARC1
BLOCK OPERATE ARCSARC1_OPERATE
REM_FLT_ARC ARC_FLT_DET ARCSARC1_ARC_FLT_DET
OPR_MODE
ARCSARC2
BLOCK OPERATE ARCSARC2_OPERATE
REM_FLT_ARC ARC_FLT_DET ARCSARC2_ARC_FLT_DET
OPR_MODE
ARCSARC3
BLOCK OPERATE ARCSARC3_OPERATE
REM_FLT_ARC ARC_FLT_DET ARCSARC3_ARC_FLT_DET
OPR_MODE
OR6
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B1 O ARCSARC_OPERATE
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-ED05940B-2DF0-461C-A159-6E51FC0256CD V1 EN
TRPPTRC3
BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC3_TRIP
ARCSARC1_OPERATE OPERATE CL_LKOUT
RST_LKOUT
TRPPTRC4
BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC4_TRIP
ARCSARC2_OPERATE OPERATE CL_LKOUT
RST_LKOUT
TRPPTRC5
BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC5_TRIP
ARCSARC3_OPERATE OPERATE CL_LKOUT
RST_LKOUT
GUID-A416CC7A-EB4B-46CE-9700-BFDD3ECC6C40 V1 EN
206 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
control command to the circuit breaker, either local or remote, also blocks the
autorecloser function via the CBXCBR1-SELECTED signal.
The circuit breaker availability for the autorecloser sequence is expressed with the
CB_READY input in DARREC1. The signal, and other required signals, are
connected to the CB spring charged binary inputs in this configuration. The open
command from the autorecloser is connected directly to binary output X100:PO3,
whereas the close command is connected directly to binary output X100:PO1.
DARREC1
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE INIT_1 OPEN_CB DARREC1_OPEN_CB
OR6 DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE INIT_2 CLOSE_CB DARREC1_CLOSE_CB
DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE INIT_3 CMD_WAIT
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B1 O INIT_4 INPRO DARREC1_INPRO
EFPADM2_OPERATE B2 INIT_5 LOCKED
WPWDE2_OPERATE B3 INIT_6 PROT_CRD
B4 DEL_INIT_2 UNSUC_RECL DARREC1_UNSUC_RECL
B5 DEL_INIT_3 AR_ON
B6 DEL_INIT_4 READY
BLK_RECL_T ACTIVE
BLK_RCLM_T
BLK_THERM
X110_BI2_CB_OPENED CB_POS
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED CB_READY
OR6 INC_SHOTP
INHIBIT_RECL
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O RECL_ON
EFPADM3_OPERATE B2 SYNC
WPWDE3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
OR6
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B2
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B3
CBXCBR1_SELECTED B4
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM B5 OR
B6
B1 O
B2
OR6
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B1 O
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-E611211B-3625-4C2B-A702-A5471ABB3939 V1 EN
REF615 207
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
PHPTOV1
BLOCK OPERATE PHPTOV1_OPERATE
START PHPTOV1_START
PHPTOV2
BLOCK OPERATE PHPTOV2_OPERATE
START PHPTOV2_START
PHPTOV3
BLOCK OPERATE PHPTOV3_OPERATE
START PHPTOV3_START
OR6
PHPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O PHPTOV_OPERATE
PHPTOV2_OPERATE B2
PHPTOV3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-BECFC2B1-EF62-45B3-87E3-0400340A8BB5 V1 EN
PHPTUV1
SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_U BLOCK OPERATE PHPTUV1_OPERATE
START PHPTUV1_START
PHPTUV2
SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_U BLOCK OPERATE PHPTUV2_OPERATE
START PHPTUV2_START
PHPTUV3
SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_U BLOCK OPERATE PHPTUV3_OPERATE
START PHPTUV3_START
OR6
PHPTUV1_OPERATE B1 O PHPTUV_OPERATE
PHPTUV2_OPERATE B2
PHPTUV3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-6E332AB0-7555-45A7-B622-BA1061C18D0B V1 EN
208 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
ROVPTOV1
BLOCK OPERATE ROVPTOV1_OPERATE
START ROVPTOV1_START
ROVPTOV2
BLOCK OPERATE ROVPTOV2_OPERATE
START ROVPTOV2_START
ROVPTOV3
BLOCK OPERATE ROVPTOV3_OPERATE
START ROVPTOV3_START
OR6
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O ROVPTOV_OPERATE
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B2
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-95D18A13-DA98-4822-B5DE-4A044A48C940 V1 EN
NSPTOV1
SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_U BLOCK OPERATE NSPTOV1_OPERATE
START NSPTOV1_START
GUID-385727B9-A09E-40C1-A51D-630C0400338D V1 EN
PSPTUV1
SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_U BLOCK OPERATE PSPTUV1_OPERATE
START PSPTUV1_START
GUID-656C28DB-7231-45CD-8864-15F39FF2C6A4 V1 EN
General start and operate signals from all the functions are connected to pulse timer
TPGAPC1 for setting the minimum pulse length for the outputs. The output from
TPGAPC1 is connected to binary outputs.
REF615 209
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
OR6 OR6
DPHLPDOC1_START B1 O B1 O
DPHLPDOC2_START B2 B2
DPHHPDOC1_START B3 B3
PHIPTOC1_START B4 B4
NSPTOC1_START B5 B5
NSPTOC2_START B6 B6
TPGAPC1
IN1 OUT1 GENERAL_START_PULSE
IN2 OUT2 GENERAL_OPERATE_PULSE
OR6 OR6 OR6
DEFLPDEF1_START B1 O DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O
DEFLPDEF2_START B2 DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE B2 B2
DEFHPDEF1_START B3 DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE B3 B3
B4 NSPTOC1_OPERATE B4 B4
EFHPTOC1_START B5 NSPTOC2_OPERATE B5 B5
PDNSPTOC1_START B6 PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B6 B6
OR6 OR6
PHPTOV1_START B1 O DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O
PHPTOV2_START B2 DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B2
PHPTOV3_START B3 DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B3
PSPTUV1_START B4 B4
NSPTOV1_START B5 EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B5
PHPTUV1_START B6 PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B6
OR6 OR6
PHPTUV2_START B1 O EFPADM1_OPERATE B1 O
PHPTUV3_START B2 EFPADM2_OPERATE B2
ROVPTOV1_START B3 EFPADM3_OPERATE B3
ROVPTOV2_START B4 ARCSARC1_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV3_START B5 ARCSARC2_OPERATE B5
B6 ARCSARC3_OPERATE B6
OR6 OR6
EFPADM1_START B1 O PHPTUV1_OPERATE B1 O
EFPADM2_START B2 PHPTUV2_OPERATE B2
EFPADM3_START B3 PHPTUV3_OPERATE B3
WPWDE1_START B4 NSPTOV1_OPERATE B4
WPWDE2_START B5 PSPTUV1_OPERATE B5
WPWDE3_START B6 PHPTOV1_OPERATE B6
OR6
PHPTOV2_OPERATE B1 O
PHPTOV3_OPERATE B2
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B3
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B5
B6
OR6
WPWDE1_OPERATE B1 O
WPWDE2_OPERATE B2
WPWDE3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-B801C8EA-74F0-432F-A115-E882F4A6D10A V1 EN
The operate signals from the protection functions are connected to the two trip
logics TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2. The output of these trip logic functions is
available at binary output X100:PO3 and X100:PO4. The trip logic functions are
provided with a lockout and latching function, event generation and the trip signal
duration setting. If the lockout operation mode is selected, binary input has been
assigned to RST_LKOUT input of both the trip logic to enable external reset with a
push button.
Three other trip logics TRPPTRC3...4 are also available if the IED is ordered with
high speed binary outputs options.
210 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
TRPPTRC1
OR6 OR6
BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC1_TRIP
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O OPERATE CL_LKOUT
DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE B2 B2 RST_LKOUT
DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE B3 B3
DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE B4 B4
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B5 B5
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B6 B6
OR6
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B2
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B3
EFPADM1_OPERATE B4
EFPADM2_OPERATE B5
EFPADM3_OPERATE B6
OR6
B1 O
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B3
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B5
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B6
OR6
WPWDE1_OPERATE B1 O
WPWDE2_OPERATE B2
WPWDE3_OPERATE B3
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B4
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B5
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B6
OR6
PHPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O
PHPTOV2_OPERATE B2
PHPTOV3_OPERATE B3
PSPTUV1_OPERATE B4
NSPTOV1_OPERATE B5
PHPTUV1_OPERATE B6
OR6
PHPTUV2_OPERATE B1 O
PHPTUV3_OPERATE B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-BC0E8E4F-D844-4DF2-96F8-D7FB4AE196EF V1 EN
REF615 211
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
TRPPTRC2
OR6 OR6
BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC2_TRIP
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O OPERATE CL_LKOUT
DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE B2 B2 RST_LKOUT
DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE B3 B3
DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE B4 B4
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B5 B5
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B6 B6
OR6
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B2
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B3
EFPADM1_OPERATE B4
EFPADM2_OPERATE B5
EFPADM3_OPERATE B6
OR6
B1 O
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B3
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B5
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B6
OR6
NSPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O
CCBRBRF1_TRRET B2
WPWDE1_OPERATE B3
WPWDE2_OPERATE B4
WPWDE3_OPERATE B5
PSPTUV1_OPERATE B6
OR6
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B1 O
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
PHPTUV1_OPERATE B4
PHPTUV2_OPERATE B5
PHPTUV3_OPERATE B6
OR6
PHPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O
PHPTOV2_OPERATE B2
PHPTOV3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-C616460D-0D6B-426B-8222-C8058AAF8332 V1 EN
The START and the OPERATE outputs from the protection stages are routed to
trigger the disturbance recorder or, alternatively, only to be recorded by the
disturbance recorder depending on the parameter settings. Additionally, the
selected signals from different functions and the few binary inputs are also
connected to the disturbance recorder.
212 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
OR6
DEFLPDEF1_START B1 O
EFPADM1_START B2
WPWDE1_START B3
B4
B5
B6 RDRE1
DPHLPDOC1_START C1 TRIGGERED DISTURB_RECORD_TRIGGERED
DPHLPDOC2_START C2
OR6 DPHHPDOC1_START C3
OR6 PHIPTOC1_START C4
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O NSPTOC1_START C5
DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE B2 DEFLPDEF2_START B1 O NSPTOC2_START C6
DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE B3 EFPADM2_START B2 C7
DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE B4 WPWDE2_START B3 C8
B5 B4 C9
B6 B5 EFHPTOC1_START C10
B6 PDNSPTOC1_START C11
T1PTTR1_START C12
PHPTOV1_START C13
PHPTOV2_START C14
OR OR6 PHPTOV3_START C15
PSPTUV1_START C16
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O DEFHPDEF1_START B1 O NSPTOV1_START C17
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B2 EFPADM3_START B2 PHPTUV1_START C18
WPWDE3_START B3 PHPTUV2_START C19
B4 PHPTUV3_START C20
B5 ROVPTOV1_START C21
B6 ROVPTOV2_START C22
OR6 ROVPTOV3_START C23
CCBRBRF1_TRRET C24
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O CCBRBRF1_TRBU C25
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B2 OR C26
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B3 C27
EFPADM1_OPERATE B4 B1 O C28
EFPADM2_OPERATE B5 B2 EFHPTOC1_OPERATE C29
EFPADM3_OPERATE B6 PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE C30
OR6 INRPHAR1_BLK2H C31
T1PTTR1_OPERATE C32
PHPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O C33
PHPTOV2_OPERATE B2 C34
OR6 PHPTOV3_OPERATE B3 C35
B4 SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_3PH C36
B1 O B5 SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_U C37
WPWDE1_OPERATE B2 B6 CCRDIF1_FAIL C38
WPWDE2_OPERATE B3 X110_BI1_CB_CLOSED C39
WPWDE3_OPERATE B4 X110_BI2_CB_OPENED C40
B5 C41
B6 ARCSARC1_OPERATE C42
OR6 ARCSARC2_OPERATE C43
ARCSARC3_OPERATE C44
PHPTUV1_OPERATE B1 O DARREC1_INPRO C45
PHPTUV2_OPERATE B2 DARREC1_CLOSE_CB C46
PHPTUV3_OPERATE B3 DARREC1_UNSUC_RECL C47
B4 C48
B5 C49
B6 C50
C51
OR6 C52
C53
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O C54
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B2 C55
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B3 OR6 C56
PSPTUV1_OPERATE B4 C57
NSPTOV1_OPERATE B5 ARCSARC1_ARC_FLT_DET B1 O C58
B6 ARCSARC2_ARC_FLT_DET B2 C59
ARCSARC3_ARC_FLT_DET B3 C60
B4 C61
B5 C62
B6 C63
C64
GUID-AD347F5E-3943-4EC9-A1AF-0A771AEEFB1F V2 EN
CCRDIF1
BLOCK FAIL CCRDIF1_FAIL
ALARM CCRDIF1_ALARM
GUID-77C89F9A-924D-4470-AEB0-4CAEDC3E5123 V1 EN
SEQRFUF1
BLOCK FUSEF_3PH SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_3PH
X110_BI1_CB_CLOSED CB_CLOSED FUSEF_U SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_U
X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_TEST DISCON_OPEN
MINCB_OPEN
GUID-4678332E-EF5C-40E6-861A-44DD9492DCAD V1 EN
REF615 213
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
The circuit breaker condition monitoring function SSCBR1 supervises the switch
status based on the connected binary input information and the measured current
levels. SSCBR1 introduces various supervision methods.
SSCBR1
BLOCK TRV_T_OP_ALM SSCBR1_TRV_T_OP_ALM
X110_BI2_CB_OPENED POSOPEN TRV_T_CL_ALM SSCBR1_TRV_T_CL_ALM
X110_BI1_CB_CLOSED POSCLOSE SPR_CHR_ALM SSCBR1_SPR_CHR_ALM
CB_OPEN_COMMAND OPEN_CB_EXE OPR_ALM SSCBR1_OPR_ALM
CB_CLOSE_COMMAND CLOSE_CB_EXE OPR_LO SSCBR1_OPR_LO
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM PRES_ALM_IN IPOW_ALM SSCBR1_IPOW_ALM
PRES_LO_IN IPOW_LO SSCBR1_IPOW_LO
CB_SPRING_DISCHARGED SPR_CHR_ST CB_LIFE_ALM SSCBR1_CB_LIFE_ALM
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED SPR_CHR MON_ALM SSCBR1_MON_ALM
RST_IPOW PRES_ALM SSCBR1_PRES_ALM
RST_CB_WEAR PRES_LO SSCBR1_PRES_LO
RST_TRV_T OPENPOS
RST_SPR_T INVALIDPOS
CLOSEPOS
GUID-1EC6CBD8-1531-47A1-811C-A5BCA7136B96 V1 EN
OR6
SSCBR1_TRV_T_OP_ALM B1 O
SSCBR1_TRV_T_CL_ALM B2
SSCBR1_SPR_CHR_ALM B3
SSCBR1_OPR_ALM B4
SSCBR1_OPR_LO B5 OR
SSCBR1_IPOW_ALM B6
B1 O SSCBR1_ALARMS
B2
OR6
SSCBR1_IPOW_LO B1 O
SSCBR1_CB_LIFE_ALM B2
SSCBR1_MON_ALM B3
SSCBR1_PRES_ALM B4
SSCBR1_PRES_LO B5
B6
GUID-E7A9FFF5-42E4-4CE8-A90E-76BCECC137E4 V1 EN
NOT
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED IN OUT CB_SPRING_DISCHARGED
GUID-64DCF106-5116-4603-BF0F-52B9D282F56D V1 EN
Two separate trip circuit supervision functions are included: TCSSCBR1 for power
output X100:PO3 and TCSSCBR2 for power output X100:PO4. Both functions are
blocked by the Master Trip TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2 and the circuit breaker
open signal.
214 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
TCSSCBR1
TCSSCBR_BLOCKING BLOCK ALARM TCSSCBR1_ALARM
TCSSCBR2
TCSSCBR_BLOCKING BLOCK ALARM TCSSCBR2_ALARM
OR
TCSSCBR1_ALARM B1 O TCSSCBR_ALARM
TCSSCBR2_ALARM B2
GUID-0CABD7BB-7809-43A2-A4EB-2077524785DD V1 EN
OR6
TRPPTRC1_TRIP B1 O TCSSCBR_BLOCKING
TRPPTRC2_TRIP B2
X110_BI2_CB_OPENED B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-480DFCBE-6A94-46BC-8A90-7A0049C425F1 V1 EN
Two types of disconnector and earthing switch function blocks are available.
DCSXSWI1...3 and ESSXSWI1...2 are status only type and DCXSWI1...2 and
ESXSWI1 are controllable type. By default, the status only blocks are connected in
a standard configuration. The disconnector (CB truck) and line side earthing switch
status information is connected to DCSXSWI1 and ESSXSI1.
DCSXSWI1
X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_TEST POSOPEN OPENPOS
X110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_SERVICE POSCLOSE CLOSEPOS
OKPOS DCSXSWI1_OKPOS
GUID-EB7FC96F-DCE0-4F6D-A563-4B782736A68E V1 EN
REF615 215
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
ESSXSWI1
X110_BI8_ES1_OPENED POSOPEN OPENPOS ESSXSWI1_OPENPOS
X110_BI7_ES1_CLOSED POSCLOSE CLOSEPOS
OKPOS
GUID-E6CDEFAC-D921-4392-A83C-D5366B8A41BA V1 EN
The circuit breaker closing is enabled when the ENA_CLOSE input is activated.
The input can be activated using the configuration logic, which is a combination of
the disconnector or breaker truck and the earth-switch position status, status of the
trip logics, gas pressure alarm and circuit breaker spring charging status.
The OKPOS output from DCSXSWI defines whether the disconnector or breaker
truck is definitely either open (in test position) or close (in service position). This
output, together with the open earth-switch and non-active trip signals, activates
the close-enable signal to the circuit breaker control function block. The open
operation for circuit breaker is always enabled.
The ITL_BYPASS input can be used, for example, to always enable the closing of
the circuit breaker when the circuit breaker truck is in the test position.
ITL_BYPASS overrides, for example, active interlocking conditions when the
circuit breaker truck is closed in service position.
CBXCBR1
X110_BI2_CB_OPENED POSOPEN SELECTED CBXCBR1_SELECTED
X110_BI1_CB_CLOSED POSCLOSE EXE_OP CBXCBR1_EXE_OP
TRUE ENA_OPEN EXE_CL CBXCBR1_EXE_CL
CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSE ENA_CLOSE OPENPOS
FALSE BLK_OPEN CLOSEPOS
CBXCBR1_BLK_CLOSE BLK_CLOSE OKPOS
CBXBCR1_AU_OPEN AU_OPEN OPEN_ENAD
CBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE AU_CLOSE CLOSE_ENAD
ITL_BYPASS
GUID-A818BB7E-A52B-40EB-B75E-4E5980FE0188 V1 EN
OR
CBXCBR1_EXE_CL B1 O CB_CLOSE_COMMAND
DARREC1_CLOSE_CB B2
GUID-AAD5050A-FBE7-490E-91F5-A1B3EC9249D1 V1 EN
216 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
OR6
CBXCBR1_EXE_OP B1 O CB_OPEN_COMMAND
TRPPTRC1_TRIP B2
DARREC1_OPEN_CB B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-63DB00F4-441B-4B7E-8F02-500921B8C9C6 V1 EN
AND6
DCSXSWI1_OKPOS B1 O CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSE
ESSXSWI1_OPENPOS B2
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED B3
B4
NOT B5
B6
TRPPTRC1_TRIP IN OUT
NOT
TRPPTRC2_TRIP IN OUT
NOT
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM IN OUT
GUID-B74256B7-3CF6-464D-A6BB-90B83D2732E9 V1 EN
OR6
T1PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE B1 O CBXCBR1_BLK_CLOSE
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-3E75311B-A42A-4A5D-9122-D93FBD773BB3 V1 EN
The configuration includes the logic for generating circuit breaker external closing
and opening command with the IED in local or remote mode.
Check the logic for the external circuit breaker closing command
and modify it according to the application.
REF615 217
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
AND
CONTROL_LOCAL B1 O
FALSE B2
OR
B1 O CBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE
B2
AND
CONTROL_REMOTE B1 O
FALSE B2
GUID-41DEF2A2-16E7-4C8C-A8C6-81F1D751EC08 V1 EN
AND
CONTROL_LOCAL B1 O
FALSE B2
OR
B1 O CBXBCR1_AU_OPEN
B2
AND
CONTROL_REMOTE B1 O
FALSE B2
GUID-B21EBD05-83F6-45E0-A956-9FB4BF079A9C V1 EN
The phase current inputs to the IED are measured by the three-phase current
measurement function CMMXU1. The three-phase current input is connected to
the X131, X132 and X133 card in the back panel for three phases. The sequence
current measurement CSMSQI1 measures the sequence current and the residual
current measurement RESCMMXU1 measures the residual current. Residual
current input is connected to the X130 card in the back panel.
The three-phase bus side phase voltage inputs to the IED are measured by voltage
measurement function VMMXU1. The three-phase current input is connected to
the X131, X132 and X133 card in the back panel for three phases. The sequence
voltage measurement VSMSQI1 measures the sequence voltage and the residual
voltage measurement RESVMMXU1 measures the residual voltage.
The measurements can be seen in the LHMI and they are available under the
measurement option in the menu selection. Based on the settings, function blocks
can generate low alarm or warning and high alarm or warning signals for the
measured current values.
The frequency measurement FMMXU1 of the power system and the three-phase
power measurement PEMMXU1 are available. The load profile function
LDPMSTA1 is included in the measurements sheet. LDPMSTA1 offers the ability
to observe the loading history of the corresponding feeder.
CMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
LOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM
GUID-D1FE0E27-0DBA-4BCB-9BAF-B82846224BCD V1 EN
218 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
CSMSQI1
GUID-03A8D15A-B365-41A6-9888-177A22D366CB V1 EN
RESCMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
GUID-9A19A4D2-2931-4710-8AD2-9CE31907A4AC V1 EN
VMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
LOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM
GUID-828D7D6F-D9AE-4BE7-AFAD-305B93CF9086 V1 EN
VSMSQI1
GUID-C414A0B3-7EDB-40E9-AF57-8327612D3032 V1 EN
FMMXU1
GUID-A5958CA9-4CAF-4518-B84C-6F3E5817D46A V1 EN
PEMMXU1
RSTACM
GUID-EC25EDC8-164C-498D-A5D0-C60FB8898060 V1 EN
FLTMSTA1
BLOCK
CB_CLRD
GUID-72ACB664-009C-4165-9C87-8CBC45ABCF9E V1 EN
LDPMSTA1
RSTMEM MEM_WARN
MEM_ALARM
GUID-95FB00EA-FBA3-4946-9192-1E7C5047D148 V1 EN
REF615 219
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 1 OR
B1 O X110_BI1_CB_CLOSED
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 1
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 2 OR
B1 O X110_BI2_CB_OPENED
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 2
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 3 OR
B1 O X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 3
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 4 OR
B1 O X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 4
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 5 OR
B1 O X110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_SERVICE
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 5
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 6 OR
B1 O X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_TEST
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 6
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 7 OR
B1 O X110_BI7_ES1_CLOSED
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 7
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 8 OR
B1 O X110_BI8_ES1_OPENED
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 8
GUID-A2B1E62C-7697-4D30-8D2A-D05174C519CB V1 EN
220 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
UPSTEAM_OC_BLOCKING
X110 (BIO).X110-SO1
TRPPTRC3_TRIP
X110 (BIO-H).X110-HSO1
OC_OPERATE_PULSE
X110 (BIO).X110-SO2
TRPPTRC4_TRIP
X110 (BIO-H).X110-HSO2
EF_OPERATE_PULSE
X110 (BIO).X110-SO3
TRPPTRC5_TRIP
X110 (BIO-H).X110-HSO3
VOLTAGE_OPERATE_PULSE
X110 (BIO).X110-SO4
GUID-A5F194C9-0208-467C-A115-6BF12F28FDA5 V1 EN
CB_CLOSE_COMMAND
X100 (PSM).X100-PO1
CCBRBRF1_TRBU
X100 (PSM).X100-PO2
GENERAL_START_PULSE
X100 (PSM).X100-SO1
GENERAL_OPERATE_PULSE
X100 (PSM).X100-SO2
CB_OPEN_COMMAND
X100 (PSM).X100-PO3
TRPPTRC2_TRIP
X100 (PSM).X100-PO4
GUID-6A66701A-488B-4A27-8447-3F325B846D43 V1 EN
REF615 221
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
LED1
OR
OK
DPHxPDOC_OPERATE B1 O ALARM
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B2 RESET
LED2
OR6
OK
ROVPTOV_OPERATE B1 O ALARM
EFPADM_OPERATE B2 RESET
WPWDE_OPERATE B3
DEFxPDEF_OPERATE B4
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B5
B6
LED3
OR6
OK
NSPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O ALARM
PSPTUV1_OPERATE B2 RESET
PHPTOV_OPERATE B3
PHPTUV_OPERATE B4
B5
B6
LED4
OR
OK
NSPTOC_OPERATE B1 O ALARM
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B2 RESET
LED5
OK
T1PTTR1_ALARM ALARM
RESET
GUID-5B504FC4-612E-4D4C-8762-154A53926CD7 V1 EN
222 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
LED6
OK
CCBRBRF1_TRBU ALARM
RESET
LED7
OK
DISTURB_RECORD_TRIGGERED ALARM
RESET
LED8
OK
SSCBR1_ALARMS ALARM
RESET
LED9
OR6
OK
TCSSCBR_ALARM B1 O ALARM
SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_3PH B2 RESET
SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_U B3
CCRDIF1_ALARM B4
B5
B6
LED10
OK
ARCSARC_OPERATE ALARM
RESET
LED11
OK
DARREC1_INPRO ALARM
RESET
GUID-A62814FF-C1DF-4757-B544-B55351058164 V1 EN
The configuration also includes overcurrent operate, earth-fault operate and voltage
operate logic. The operate logics are connected to the pulse timer TPGAPC for
setting the minimum pulse length for the outputs. The output from TPGAPC is
connected to the binary outputs.
REF615 223
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
OR TPGAPC2
DPHxPDOC_OPERATE B1 O IN1 OUT1 OC_OPERATE_PULSE
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B2 IN2 OUT2 EF_OPERATE_PULSE
OR6
DEFxPDEF_OPERATE B1 O
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
EFPADM_OPERATE B3
ROVPTOV_OPERATE B4
WPWDE_OPERATE B5
B6
GUID-95B55C0E-FA24-4643-81C6-E14BE342C734 V1 EN
Figure 331: Timer logic for overcurrent and earth-fault operate pulse
OR6 TPGAPC3
PSPTUV1_OPERATE B1 O IN1 OUT1 VOLTAGE_OPERATE_PULSE
NSPTOV1_OPERATE B2 IN2 OUT2
PHPTUV_OPERATE B3
PHPTOV_OPERATE B4
B5
B6
GUID-600E062D-9AAB-444B-A7ED-4A8FF894C55A V1 EN
3.10.1 Applications
The standard configuration for non-directional overcurrent and non-directional earth-
fault protection with phase voltage-based measurements, undervoltage and
overvoltage protection, frequency protection and measurement functions is mainly
intended for cable and overhead-line feeder applications in directly or resistance-
earthed distribution networks.
The IED with a standard configuration is delivered from the factory with default
settings and parameters. The end user flexibility for incoming, outgoing and
internal signal designation within the IED enables this configuration to be further
adapted to different primary circuit layouts and the related functionality needs by
modifying the internal functionality using PCM600.
224 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
3.10.2 Functions
UL1UL2UL3
Uo
Lockout relay A
O
- IED self-supervision
R
L
94/86
U12 0. 0 kV
P 0.00 kW
Q 0.00 kVAr
IL2 0 A
- Local/Remote push button on LHMI
- User management
I ESC Clear
- Web HMI
2×
AND
I2> I2/I1> 3I>>> O R
OR 46 46PD 50P/51P
L
OR
3I
3× 3×
ARC 3I>/Io>BF
50L/50NL CONDITION MONITORING COMMUNICATION
51BF/51NBF
3I AND SUPERVISION
Protocols:
0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 2× IEC 61850-8-1 1 0
61850-8-1/-9-2LE 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0
1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 3I> 3I>> 3I2f> FUSEF CBCM MCS 3I Modbus®® 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0
0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
51P-1 51P-2 68 60 CBCM MCS 3I IEC 60870-5-103 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 DNP3 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0
0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 Interfaces: 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 U12 Io Io 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
C) Ethernet: TX (RJ45), FX (LC)
(ST), Serial: Serial glass fiber (ST),
2/485 RS-485, RS-232/485
2× 2× D-sub 9, IRIG-B
Io>>> Io> Io>> PHIZ OPTS TCS Redundant protocols:
50N/51N 51N-1 51N-2 HIZ OPTM TCM HSR
PRP
Io RSTP
Io
2)
Control and indication function for
primary object Voltage transformer 5
3)
Status indication function for
primary object
1)
Conventional transformer inputs
UL1UL2UL3 3× 3× 3× 3×
3U< 3U> Uo> f>/f<, SYNC O→I
df/dt
27 59 59G 25 79
81
U12
Uo
REMARKS
18× Optional 3× No. of Calculated OR Alternative
MAP function instances value function to be
MAP Io/Uo defined when
2xRTD ordering
1xmA
GUID-345574F5-1790-43CF-BCD8-FE2C4EFF1CE5 V1 EN
Connector
PROTECTION
pins for each input and output are presented in the IED physical
LOCAL HMI
connections section. Configuration
System
HMI
Time
Authorization
A
I ESC Clear
A
O R
L
U12 0. 0 kV
P 0.00 kW
Q 0.00 kVAr
IL2 0 A
I ESC Clear
AND
O R
OR L
OR
226 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
LED Description
7 Disturbance recorder triggered
8 Circuit breaker condition monitoring alarm
9 Supervision alarm
10 Arc fault detected
11 Autoreclose in progress
REF615 227
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
228 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
The analog channels have fixed connections to the different function blocks inside
the IED’s standard configuration. However, the 12 analog channels available for
the disturbance recorder function are freely selectable as a part of the disturbance
recorder’s parameter settings.
The phase currents to the IED are fed from a current transformer. The residual
current to the IED is fed from either residually connected CTs, an external core
balance CT, neutral CT or internally calculated.
The phase voltages to the IED are fed from a voltage transformer. The residual
voltage to the IED is fed from either residually connected VTs, an open delta
connected VT or internally calculated.
The IED offers six different settings groups which can be set based on individual
needs. Each group can be activated or deactivated using the setting group settings
available in the IED.
REF615 229
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
fixed Boolean signals TRUE and FALSE which can be used according to the
application needs.
The functional diagrams describe the IEDs protection functionality in detail and
according to the factory set default connections.
Four non-directional overcurrent stages are offered for overcurrent and short-
circuit protection. The non-directional instantaneous stage PHIPTOC1 can be
blocked by energizing the binary input X120:BI1.
PHIPTOC1
X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING BLOCK OPERATE PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START PHIPTOC1_START
PHHPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE PHHPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START PHHPTOC1_START
PHHPTOC2
BLOCK OPERATE PHHPTOC2_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START PHHPTOC2_START
PHLPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE PHLPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START PHLPTOC1_START
OR6
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O PHxPTOC_OPERATE
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE B3
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B4
B5
B6
GUID-4418FE50-A21E-4DA3-B13C-97D408EB4CFA V1 EN
The upstream blocking from the start of the overcurrent second high stage
PHHPTOC2 is connected to the binary output X110:SO1. This output can be used
for sending a blocking signal to the relevant overcurrent protection stage of the
IED at the infeeding bay.
230 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
OR6
PHHPTOC2_START B1 O UPSTEAM_OC_BLOCKING
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-9B85F4BF-82D4-4867-B89B-1E73F145341C V1 EN
The inrush detection block's (INRPHAR1) output BLK2H enables either blocking
the function or multiplying the active settings for any of the available overcurrent
or earth-fault function blocks.
INRPHAR1
BLOCK BLK2H INRPHAR1_BLK2H
GUID-984A0C31-460F-48F5-AA9D-FD0F798DB0EE V1 EN
Two negative sequence overcurrent stages NSPTOC1 and NSPTOC2 are provided
for phase unbalance protection. These functions are used to protect the feeder
against phase unbalance. Both negative sequence overcurrent protections are
blocked in case of detection of a failure in secondary circuit of current transformer.
NSPTOC1
CCRDIF1_FAIL BLOCK OPERATE NSPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START NSPTOC1_START
NSPTOC2
CCRDIF1_FAIL BLOCK OPERATE NSPTOC2_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START NSPTOC2_START
OR
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O NSPTOC_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B2
GUID-7C84F97A-94E1-4D1F-87CD-942C8D9088A1 V1 EN
Four stages are provided for non-directional earth-fault protection. One stage is
dedicated to sensitive earth-fault protection.
REF615 231
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
EFIPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE EFIPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START EFIPTOC1_START
EFHPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE EFHPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START EFHPTOC1_START
EFLPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE EFLPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START EFLPTOC1_START
EFLPTOC2
BLOCK OPERATE EFLPTOC2_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START EFLPTOC2_START
OR6
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O EFxPTOC_OPERATE
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE B3
EFLPTOC2_OPERATE B4
B5
B6
GUID-15DB4C4F-9B2C-483D-A066-6011F8535402 V1 EN
PDNSPTOC1
CCRDIF1_FAIL BLOCK OPERATE PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE
START PDNSPTOC1_START
GUID-816DE51C-0F1F-4CD9-AA1B-8D88BB8490D7 V1 EN
The breaker failure protection CCBRBRF1 is initiated via the START input by
number of different protection functions available in the IED. The breaker-failure
protection function offers different operating modes associated with the circuit
breaker position and the measured phase and residual currents.
The breaker failure protection function has two operating outputs: TRRET and
TRBU. The TRRET operate output is used for retripping its own breaker through
TRPPTRC2_TRIP. The TRBU output is used to give a backup trip to the breaker
feeding upstream. For this purpose, the TRBU operate output signal is connected to
the binary output X100:PO2.
232 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
CCBRBRF1
OR6 OR6
BLOCK CB_FAULT_AL
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O START TRBU CCBRBRF1_TRBU
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B2 B2 POSCLOSE TRRET CCBRBRF1_TRRET
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE B3 B3 CB_FAULT
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE B4 B4
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B5 B5
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE B6 B6
OR6
EFLPTOC2_OPERATE B1 O
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B3
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B4
B5
B6
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
GUID-789C6973-BCEC-4D58-922A-27075ECACFE9 V1 EN
The operate signals from ARCSARC1...3 are connected to both trip logic
TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2. If the IED has been ordered with high speed binary
outputs, the individual operate signals from ARCSARC1...3 are connected to
dedicated trip logic TRPPTRC3..5. The output of TRPPTRC3...5 is available at
high speed outputs X110:HSO1, X110:HSO2 and X110:HSO3.
REF615 233
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
ARCSARC1
BLOCK OPERATE ARCSARC1_OPERATE
REM_FLT_ARC ARC_FLT_DET ARCSARC1_ARC_FLT_DET
OPR_MODE
ARCSARC2
BLOCK OPERATE ARCSARC2_OPERATE
REM_FLT_ARC ARC_FLT_DET ARCSARC2_ARC_FLT_DET
OPR_MODE
ARCSARC3
BLOCK OPERATE ARCSARC3_OPERATE
REM_FLT_ARC ARC_FLT_DET ARCSARC3_ARC_FLT_DET
OPR_MODE
OR6
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B1 O ARCSARC_OPERATE
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-6737760B-14D7-469A-99FF-6E2C523B6E44 V1 EN
TRPPTRC3
BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC3_TRIP
ARCSARC1_OPERATE OPERATE CL_LKOUT
X120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT RST_LKOUT
TRPPTRC4
BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC4_TRIP
ARCSARC2_OPERATE OPERATE CL_LKOUT
X120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT RST_LKOUT
TRPPTRC5
BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC5_TRIP
ARCSARC3_OPERATE OPERATE CL_LKOUT
X120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT RST_LKOUT
GUID-F549336F-F636-4F32-8619-BC69E5A53259 V1 EN
234 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
control command to the circuit breaker, either local or remote, also blocks the
autorecloser function via the CBXCBR1-SELECTED signal.
The circuit breaker availability for the autorecloser sequence is expressed using the
CB_READY input in DARREC1. The signal, and other required signals, are
connected to the CB spring charged binary inputs in this configuration. The open
command from the autorecloser is connected directly to binary output X100:PO3,
whereas the close command is connected directly to binary output X100:PO1.
DARREC1
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE INIT_1 OPEN_CB DARREC1_OPEN_CB
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE INIT_2 CLOSE_CB DARREC1_CLOSE_CB
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE INIT_3 CMD_WAIT
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE INIT_4 INPRO DARREC1_INPRO
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE INIT_5 LOCKED
INIT_6 PROT_CRD
DEL_INIT_2 UNSUC_RECL DARREC1_UNSUC_RECL
DEL_INIT_3 AR_ON
DEL_INIT_4 READY
BLK_RECL_T ACTIVE
BLK_RCLM_T
BLK_THERM
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED CB_POS
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED CB_READY
INC_SHOTP
INHIBIT_RECL
OR6 RECL_ON
SECRSYN1_SYNC_OK SYNC
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B2
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B3
CBXCBR1_SELECTED B4
B5 OR
B6
B1 O
B2
OR6
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B1 O
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM B4
B5
B6
GUID-8569C1BF-C7CF-4853-901E-9C5871B85919 V1 EN
REF615 235
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
PHPTOV1
BLOCK OPERATE PHPTOV1_OPERATE
START PHPTOV1_START
PHPTOV2
BLOCK OPERATE PHPTOV2_OPERATE
START PHPTOV2_START
PHPTOV3
BLOCK OPERATE PHPTOV3_OPERATE
START PHPTOV3_START
OR6
PHPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O PHPTOV_OPERATE
PHPTOV2_OPERATE B2
PHPTOV3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-168B0ECA-EC3A-4E24-BB38-040D20F5EEFF V1 EN
PHPTUV1
SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_U BLOCK OPERATE PHPTUV1_OPERATE
START PHPTUV1_START
PHPTUV2
SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_U BLOCK OPERATE PHPTUV2_OPERATE
START PHPTUV2_START
PHPTUV3
SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_U BLOCK OPERATE PHPTUV3_OPERATE
START PHPTUV3_START
OR6
PHPTUV1_OPERATE B1 O PHPTUV_OPERATE
PHPTUV2_OPERATE B2
PHPTUV3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-98D35F8A-6408-467E-88C2-15475BC6574E V1 EN
236 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
ROVPTOV1
BLOCK OPERATE ROVPTOV1_OPERATE
START ROVPTOV1_START
ROVPTOV2
BLOCK OPERATE ROVPTOV2_OPERATE
START ROVPTOV2_START
ROVPTOV3
BLOCK OPERATE ROVPTOV3_OPERATE
START ROVPTOV3_START
OR6
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O ROVPTOV_OPERATE
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B2
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-521EA0D0-2332-4E90-A1FE-C405463CDBCF V1 EN
REF615 237
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
FRPFRQ1
BLOCK OPERATE FRPFRQ1_OPERATE
OPR_OFRQ
OPR_UFRQ
OPR_FRG
START FRPFRQ1_START
ST_OFRQ
ST_UFRQ
ST_FRG
FRPFRQ2
BLOCK OPERATE FRPFRQ2_OPERATE
OPR_OFRQ
OPR_UFRQ
OPR_FRG
START FRPFRQ2_START
ST_OFRQ
ST_UFRQ
ST_FRG
FRPFRQ3
BLOCK OPERATE FRPFRQ3_OPERATE
OPR_OFRQ
OPR_UFRQ
OPR_FRG
START FRPFRQ3_START
ST_OFRQ
ST_UFRQ
ST_FRG
OR6
FRPFRQ1_OPERATE B1 O FREQUENCY_OPERATE
FRPFRQ2_OPERATE B2
FRPFRQ3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-9C73EAD7-5797-4E5A-BDBB-D3734BF1D8DB V1 EN
General start and operate signals from all the functions are connected to pulse timer
TPGAPC1 for setting the minimum pulse length for the outputs. The output from
TPGAPC1 is connected to binary outputs.
238 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
OR6 OR6
PHLPTOC1_START B1 O B1 O
PHHPTOC1_START B2 B2
PHHPTOC2_START B3 B3
PHIPTOC1_START B4 B4
NSPTOC1_START B5 B5
NSPTOC2_START B6 B6
TPGAPC1
IN1 OUT1 GENERAL_START_PULSE
IN2 OUT2 GENERAL_OPERATE_PULSE
OR6
EFLPTOC1_START B1 O
EFLPTOC2_START B2
EFHPTOC1_START B3
EFIPTOC1_START B4 OR6 OR6
PDNSPTOC1_START B5
B6 PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B2 B2
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE B3 B3
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B4 B4
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B5 B5
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B6 B6
OR6
PHPTOV1_START B1 O
PHPTOV2_START B2
PHPTOV3_START B3 OR6
PHPTUV1_START B4
PHPTUV2_START B5 PHPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O
PHPTUV3_START B6 PHPTOV2_OPERATE B2
PHPTOV3_OPERATE B3
PHPTUV1_OPERATE B4
PHPTUV2_OPERATE B5
PHPTUV3_OPERATE B6
OR6
ROVPTOV1_START B1 O
ROVPTOV2_START B2
ROVPTOV3_START B3 OR6
FRPFRQ1_START B4
FRPFRQ2_START B5 EFLPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O
FRPFRQ3_START B6 EFLPTOC2_OPERATE B2
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B3
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE B4
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B5
B6
OR6
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B2
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B3
FRPFRQ1_OPERATE B4
FRPFRQ2_OPERATE B5
FRPFRQ3_OPERATE B6
OR6
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B1 O
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-71B45E9A-077E-45BD-8306-8D6DDCCE745A V1 EN
The operate signals from the protection functions are connected to the two trip
logics TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2. The output of these trip logic functions is
available at binary output X100:PO3 and X100:PO4. The trip logic functions are
provided with a lockout and latching function, event generation and the trip signal
duration setting. If the lockout operation mode is selected, binary input X120:BI4
has been assigned to RST_LKOUT input of both the trip logic to enable external
reset with a push button.
Three other trip logics TRPPTRC3...4 are also available if the IED is ordered with
high speed binary outputs options.
REF615 239
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
TRPPTRC1
OR6 OR6
BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC1_TRIP
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O OPERATE CL_LKOUT
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B2 B2 RST_LKOUT
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B3 B3
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE B4 B4
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B5 B5
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B6 B6
OR6
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE B3
EFLPTOC2_OPERATE B4
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B5
B6
OR6
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B1 O
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B5
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B6
OR6
PHPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O
PHPTOV2_OPERATE B2
PHPTOV3_OPERATE B3
PHPTUV1_OPERATE B4
PHPTUV2_OPERATE B5
PHPTUV3_OPERATE B6
OR6
FRPFRQ1_OPERATE B1 O
FRPFRQ2_OPERATE B2
FRPFRQ3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
X120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT
GUID-640AC68E-4932-4ACF-9AF1-CC6D640F0F7D V1 EN
240 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
TRPPTRC2
OR6 OR6
BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC2_TRIP
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O OPERATE CL_LKOUT
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B2 B2 RST_LKOUT
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B3 B3
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE B4 B4
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B5 B5
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B6 B6
OR6
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE B3
EFLPTOC2_OPERATE B4
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B5
B6
OR6
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B1 O
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B5
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B6
OR6
PHPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O
PHPTOV2_OPERATE B2
PHPTOV3_OPERATE B3
PHPTUV1_OPERATE B4
PHPTUV2_OPERATE B5
PHPTUV3_OPERATE B6
OR6
FRPFRQ1_OPERATE B1 O
FRPFRQ2_OPERATE B2
FRPFRQ3_OPERATE B3
CCBRBRF1_TRRET B4
B5
B6
X120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT
GUID-724B2B2B-C697-47F3-84DC-5D244CC8725F V1 EN
The START and the OPERATE outputs from the protection stages are routed to
trigger the disturbance recorder or, alternatively, only to be recorded by the
disturbance recorder depending on the parameter settings. Additionally, the
selected signals from different functions and the few binary inputs are also
connected to the disturbance recorder.
REF615 241
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
OR6
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE B3
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B4 RDRE1
B5
B6 PHLPTOC1_START C1 TRIGGERED DISTURB_RECORD_TRIGGERED
OR PHHPTOC1_START C2
PHHPTOC2_START C3
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O PHIPTOC1_START C4
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B2 NSPTOC1_START C5
NSPTOC2_START C6
OR6 EFLPTOC1_START C7
EFLPTOC2_START C8
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O EFHPTOC1_START C9
EFLPTOC2_OPERATE B2 EFIPTOC1_START C10
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B3 PDNSPTOC1_START C11
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE B4 PHPTOV1_START C12
B5 PHPTOV2_START C13
B6 PHPTOV3_START C14
PHPTUV1_START C15
PHPTUV2_START C16
PHPTUV3_START C17
ROVPTOV1_START C18
OR6 ROVPTOV2_START C19
ROVPTOV3_START C20
PHPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O FRPFRQ1_START C21
PHPTOV2_OPERATE B2 FRPFRQ2_START C22
PHPTOV3_OPERATE B3 FRPFRQ3_START C23
B4 CCBRBRF1_TRRET C24
B5 CCBRBRF1_TRBU C25
B6 C26
C27
C28
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE C29
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE C30
OR6 INRPHAR1_BLK2H C31
C32
PHPTUV1_OPERATE B1 O C33
PHPTUV2_OPERATE B2 C34
PHPTUV3_OPERATE B3 C35
B4 SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_3PH C36
B5 SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_U C37
B6 CCRDIF1_FAIL C38
X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING C39
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED C40
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED C41
SECRSYN1_SYNC_INPRO C42
OR6 SECRSYN1_SYNC_OK C43
SECRSYN1_CL_FAIL_AL C44
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O SECRSYN1_CMD_FAIL_AL C45
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B2 C46
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B3 ARCSARC1_OPERATE C47
B4 ARCSARC2_OPERATE C48
B5 ARCSARC3_OPERATE C49
B6 DARREC1_INPRO C50
DARREC1_CLOSE_CB C51
DARREC1_UNSUC_RECL C52
C53
C54
OR6 C55
C56
FRPFRQ1_OPERATE B1 O C57
FRPFRQ2_OPERATE B2 C58
FRPFRQ3_OPERATE B3 C59
B4 C60
B5 C61
B6 C62
C63
C64
OR6
ARCSARC1_ARC_FLT_DET B1 O
ARCSARC2_ARC_FLT_DET B2
ARCSARC3_ARC_FLT_DET B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-BBC21615-E283-4B10-9001-967A19C5896F V1 EN
CCRDIF1
BLOCK FAIL CCRDIF1_FAIL
ALARM CCRDIF1_ALARM
GUID-5D2B0679-06B9-43AE-86DE-5438AB2D9C17 V1 EN
242 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
SEQRFUF1
BLOCK FUSEF_3PH SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_3PH
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED CB_CLOSED FUSEF_U SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_U
DISCON_OPEN
X110_BI1_BUS_VT_MCB_OPEN MINCB_OPEN
GUID-36463825-15E3-43EB-8747-6B52FEB5CCC9 V1 EN
The circuit breaker condition monitoring function SSCBR1 supervises the switch
status based on the connected binary input information and the measured current
levels. SSCBR1 introduces various supervision methods.
SSCBR1
BLOCK TRV_T_OP_ALM SSCBR1_TRV_T_OP_ALM
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED POSOPEN TRV_T_CL_ALM SSCBR1_TRV_T_CL_ALM
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED POSCLOSE SPR_CHR_ALM SSCBR1_SPR_CHR_ALM
CB_OPEN_COMMAND OPEN_CB_EXE OPR_ALM SSCBR1_OPR_ALM
CB_CLOSE_COMMAND CLOSE_CB_EXE OPR_LO SSCBR1_OPR_LO
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM PRES_ALM_IN IPOW_ALM SSCBR1_IPOW_ALM
PRES_LO_IN IPOW_LO SSCBR1_IPOW_LO
CB_SPRING_DISCHARGED SPR_CHR_ST CB_LIFE_ALM SSCBR1_CB_LIFE_ALM
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED SPR_CHR MON_ALM SSCBR1_MON_ALM
RST_IPOW PRES_ALM SSCBR1_PRES_ALM
RST_CB_WEAR PRES_LO SSCBR1_PRES_LO
RST_TRV_T OPENPOS
RST_SPR_T INVALIDPOS
CLOSEPOS
GUID-3E1BA906-5D1B-4FAC-AA2A-F6C70CAE5BEC V1 EN
OR6
SSCBR1_TRV_T_OP_ALM B1 O
SSCBR1_TRV_T_CL_ALM B2
SSCBR1_SPR_CHR_ALM B3
SSCBR1_OPR_ALM B4
SSCBR1_OPR_LO B5 OR
SSCBR1_IPOW_ALM B6
B1 O SSCBR1_ALARMS
B2
OR6
SSCBR1_IPOW_LO B1 O
SSCBR1_CB_LIFE_ALM B2
SSCBR1_MON_ALM B3
SSCBR1_PRES_ALM B4
SSCBR1_PRES_LO B5
B6
GUID-CEC2B30C-9E82-4842-902A-7997A31A6E46 V1 EN
REF615 243
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
NOT
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED IN OUT CB_SPRING_DISCHARGED
GUID-2E6D31BF-26F4-47CF-8E05-295BB466E4AD V1 EN
Two separate trip circuit supervision functions are included: TCSSCBR1 for power
output X100:PO3 and TCSSCBR2 for power output X100:PO4. Both functions are
blocked by the Master Trip TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2 and the circuit breaker
open signal.
TCSSCBR1
TCSSCBR_BLOCKING BLOCK ALARM TCSSCBR1_ALARM
TCSSCBR2
TCSSCBR_BLOCKING BLOCK ALARM TCSSCBR2_ALARM
OR
TCSSCBR1_ALARM B1 O TCSSCBR_ALARM
TCSSCBR2_ALARM B2
GUID-F5BCA344-DDE2-4504-91E7-B5A0EB19A8A3 V1 EN
244 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
OR6
TRPPTRC1_TRIP B1 O TCSSCBR_BLOCKING
TRPPTRC2_TRIP B2
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-75C22AA4-4F3D-4F1E-9E7F-82C1AB76D23F V1 EN
SECRSYN measures the bus and line voltages and compares them to the set
conditions. When all the measured quantities are within set limits, the output
SYNC_OK is activated for allowing closing or closing the circuit breaker. The
SYNC_OK output signal of SECRSYN is connected to ENA_CLOSE input of
CBXCBR through control logic. The function is block in case of line side or bus
side MCB is open.
SECRSYN1
BLOCK_SECRSYN1 BLOCK SYNC_INPRO SECRSYN1_SYNC_INPRO
CL_COMMAND SYNC_OK SECRSYN1_SYNC_OK
BYPASS CL_FAIL_AL SECRSYN1_CL_FAIL_AL
CMD_FAIL_AL SECRSYN1_CMD_FAIL_AL
LLDB
LLLB
DLLB
DLDB
OR
X110_BI2_LINE_VT_MCB_OPEN B1 O BLOCK_SECRSYN1
X110_BI1_BUS_VT_MCB_OPEN B2
GUID-1054A5E9-E611-4D4B-82B5-5FD0AFE8CF66 V1 EN
Two types of disconnector and earthing switch function blocks are available.
DCSXSWI1...3 and ESSXSWI1...2 are status only type, and DCXSWI1...2 and
ESXSWI1 are controllable type. By default, the status only blocks are connected in
standard configuration. The disconnector (CB truck) and line side earthing switch
status information is connected to DCSXSWI1 and ESSXSI1.
DCSXSWI1
X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_TEST POSOPEN OPENPOS
X110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_SERVICE POSCLOSE CLOSEPOS
OKPOS DCSXSWI1_OKPOS
GUID-A84A3976-BDA8-4343-96F1-1E436AF74BBE V1 EN
REF615 245
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
ESSXSWI1
X110_BI8_ES1_OPENED POSOPEN OPENPOS ESSXSWI1_OPENPOS
X110_BI7_ES1_CLOSED POSCLOSE CLOSEPOS
OKPOS
GUID-5BC3FC2D-0BBF-40F3-84FD-34804A0A9354 V1 EN
The circuit breaker closing is enabled when the ENA_CLOSE input is activated.
The input can be activated by the configuration logic, which is a combination of
the disconnector or breaker truck and earth-switch position status, status of the trip
logics, gas pressure alarm, circuit-breaker spring charging and synchronizing ok
status.
The OKPOS output from DCSXSWI defines if the disconnector or breaker truck is
definitely either open (in test position) or close (in service position). This, together
with the open earth-switch and non-active trip signals, activates the close-enable
signal to the circuit breaker control function block. The open operation for circuit
breaker is always enabled.
The ITL_BYPASS input can be used, for example, to always enable the closing of
the circuit breaker when the circuit breaker truck is in the test position.
ITL_BYPASS overrides, for example, active interlocking conditions when the
circuit breaker truck is closed in service position.
CBXCBR1
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED POSOPEN SELECTED CBXCBR1_SELECTED
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED POSCLOSE EXE_OP CBXCBR1_EXE_OP
TRUE ENA_OPEN EXE_CL CBXCBR1_EXE_CL
CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSE ENA_CLOSE OPENPOS
FALSE BLK_OPEN CLOSEPOS
BLK_CLOSE OKPOS
CBXBCR1_AU_OPEN AU_OPEN OPEN_ENAD
CBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE AU_CLOSE CLOSE_ENAD
ITL_BYPASS
GUID-FB23770A-8BAD-4112-A6C0-3FC6A147B369 V1 EN
OR
CBXCBR1_EXE_CL B1 O CB_CLOSE_COMMAND
DARREC1_CLOSE_CB B2
GUID-93A451B8-88A1-42EF-91AA-36931009E5C6 V1 EN
246 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
OR6
CBXCBR1_EXE_OP B1 O CB_OPEN_COMMAND
TRPPTRC1_TRIP B2
DARREC1_OPEN_CB B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-A6E3FB5D-548A-4BC0-9CFF-BE0045FF8EC5 V1 EN
AND6
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED B1 O CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSE
SECRSYN1_SYNC_OK B2
B3
B4
B5
NOT B6
TRPPTRC1_TRIP IN OUT
NOT
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM IN OUT
AND
DCSXSWI1_OKPOS B1 O
ESSXSWI1_OPENPOS B2
GUID-65DF4D38-46C0-48E2-B04B-02CB5C300A09 V1 EN
The configuration includes the logic for generating circuit breaker external closing
and opening command with the IED in local or remote mode.
Check the logic for the external circuit breaker closing command
and modify it according to the application.
AND
CONTROL_LOCAL B1 O
FALSE B2
OR
B1 O CBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE
B2
AND
CONTROL_REMOTE B1 O
FALSE B2
GUID-10E8EE71-A656-4915-AE6A-988A14303156 V1 EN
AND
CONTROL_LOCAL B1 O
FALSE B2
OR
B1 O CBXBCR1_AU_OPEN
B2
AND
CONTROL_REMOTE B1 O
FALSE B2
GUID-9F4607E1-4630-4C64-BD19-AA14BF6BFE16 V1 EN
REF615 247
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
The phase current inputs to the IED are measured by the three-phase current
measurement function CMMXU1. The current input is connected to the X120 card
in the back panel. The sequence current measurement CSMSQI1 measures the
sequence current and the residual current measurement RESCMMXU1 measures
the residual current.
The three-phase bus side phase voltage and single phase line side phase voltage
inputs to the IED are measured by voltage measurement function VMMXU1 and
VMMXU2. The voltage input is connected to the X130 card in the back panel. The
sequence voltage measurement VSMSQI1 measures the sequence voltage and the
residual voltage measurement RESVMMXU1 measures the residual voltage.
The measurements can be seen from the LHMI and they are available under the
measurement option in the menu selection. Based on the settings, function blocks
can generate low alarm or warning and high alarm or warning signals for the
measured current values.
The frequency measurement FMMXU1 of the power system and the three-phase
power measurement PEMMXU1 are available. The load profile function
LDPMSTA1 is included in the measurements sheet. LDPMSTA1 offers the ability
to observe the loading history of the corresponding feeder.
CMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
LOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM
GUID-58044A48-84FA-4E5E-9CEF-962184380C35 V1 EN
CSMSQI1
GUID-6F4AF6B3-2DBD-4BF8-8915-4226EA3FF1F8 V1 EN
RESCMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
GUID-119FD230-A037-434D-8A86-375BE112675E V1 EN
VMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
LOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM
GUID-A0A7875D-7234-4435-A673-0878D1176605 V1 EN
248 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
VSMSQI1
GUID-AE2F63C6-4370-4D54-881E-0F9B39B3A528 V1 EN
RESVMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
GUID-816E4CE2-6D0E-4608-B26D-DD624B2534F8 V1 EN
VMMXU2
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
LOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM
GUID-41E615E2-EBA2-4540-8B56-1F686E8AD2A5 V1 EN
FMMXU1
GUID-C3BCC8EA-4599-44E6-B243-477458BCFD0A V1 EN
PEMMXU1
RSTACM
GUID-FF640519-F00C-4B5E-940A-116E9FDB242B V1 EN
Figure 375: Other measurement: Three phase power and energy measurement
FLTMSTA1
BLOCK
CB_CLRD
GUID-6EC9DC3E-40D6-4CBE-934E-54413CF6CC00 V1 EN
LDPMSTA1
RSTMEM MEM_WARN
MEM_ALARM
GUID-F73B8068-4E12-4578-B988-C1AC326D5F8F V1 EN
REF615 249
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 1 OR
B1 O X110_BI1_BUS_VT_MCB_OPEN
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 1
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 2 OR
B1 O X110_BI2_LINE_VT_MCB_OPEN
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 2
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 3 OR
B1 O X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 3
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 4 OR
B1 O X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 4
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 5 OR
B1 O X110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_SERVICE
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 5
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 6 OR
B1 O X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_TEST
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 6
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 7 OR
B1 O X110_BI7_ES1_CLOSED
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 7
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 8 OR
B1 O X110_BI8_ES1_OPENED
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 8
GUID-02227A18-A1C5-4974-AA2E-7EDE98EE1777 V1 EN
250 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING
X120 (AIM).X120-Input 1
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
X120 (AIM).X120-Input 2
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED
X120 (AIM).X120-Input 3
X120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT
X120 (AIM).X120-Input 4
GUID-4BAA9A5D-93C8-4DB9-937F-05BE3716E9F2 V1 EN
UPSTEAM_OC_BLOCKING
X110 (BIO).X110-SO1
TRPPTRC3_TRIP
X110 (BIO-H).X110-HSO1
OC_OPERATE_PULSE
X110 (BIO).X110-SO2
TRPPTRC4_TRIP
X110 (BIO-H).X110-HSO2
EF_OPERATE_PULSE
X110 (BIO).X110-SO3
TRPPTRC5_TRIP
X110 (BIO-H).X110-HSO3
VOLTAGE_AND_FREQ_OPERATE_PULSE
X110 (BIO).X110-SO4
GUID-971007B0-0D89-4D4A-927A-82E43C25BD24 V1 EN
CB_CLOSE_COMMAND
X100 (PSM).X100-PO1
CCBRBRF1_TRBU
X100 (PSM).X100-PO2
GENERAL_START_PULSE
X100 (PSM).X100-SO1
GENERAL_OPERATE_PULSE
X100 (PSM).X100-SO2
CB_OPEN_COMMAND
X100 (PSM).X100-PO3
TRPPTRC2_TRIP
X100 (PSM).X100-PO4
GUID-450761DF-7C25-462C-9057-343E83108300 V1 EN
REF615 251
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
LED1
OK
PHxPTOC_OPERATE ALARM
RESET
LED2
OR
OK
EFxPTOC_OPERATE B1 O ALARM
ROVPTOV_OPERATE B2 RESET
LED3
OR6
OK
NSPTOC_OPERATE B1 O ALARM
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B2 RESET
PHPTOV_OPERATE B3
PHPTUV_OPERATE B4
B5
B6
LED4
AND
OK
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED B1 O ALARM
SECRSYN1_SYNC_OK B2 RESET
LED5
OK
FREQUENCY_OPERATE ALARM
RESET
GUID-C6926FBC-66DB-4EF0-BFA9-26D9D24FC3DA V1 EN
252 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
LED6
OK
CCBRBRF1_TRBU ALARM
RESET
LED7
OK
DISTURB_RECORD_TRIGGERED ALARM
RESET
LED8
OK
SSCBR1_ALARMS ALARM
RESET
LED9
OR6
OK
TCSSCBR_ALARM B1 O ALARM
SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_3PH B2 RESET
SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_U B3
CCRDIF1_ALARM B4
B5
B6
LED10
OK
ARCSARC_OPERATE ALARM
RESET
LED11
OK
DARREC1_INPRO ALARM
RESET
GUID-80EA7DF8-1DBE-4BFA-9086-E9202A417FB1 V1 EN
OR
EFxPTOC_OPERATE B1 O
ROVPTOV_OPERATE B2
GUID-FCD29EFB-54DE-459E-94FB-F459C6E94443 V1 EN
Figure 383: Timer logic for overcurrent and earth-fault operate pulse
REF615 253
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
OR6 TPGAPC3
PHPTOV_OPERATE B1 O IN1 OUT1 VOLTAGE_AND_FREQ_OPERATE_PULSE
PHPTUV_OPERATE B2 IN2 OUT2
FREQUENCY_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-A3CADE4F-E483-4565-883D-8F8B63B1968E V1 EN
Figure 384: Timer logic for voltage and frequency operate pulse
3.11.1 Applications
The standard configuration for directional overcurrent and directional earth-fault
protection with phase voltage-based measurements, undervoltage and overvoltage
protection, frequency protection and measurement functions is mainly intended for
cable and overhead-line feeder applications in isolated or resonant-earthed
distribution networks. The configuration also includes additional options for
selecting earth-fault protection based on admittance, wattmetric or harmonic-based
principles.
The IED with a standard configuration is delivered from the factory with default
settings and parameters. The end user flexibility for incoming, outgoing and
internal signal designation within the IED enables this configuration to be further
adapted to different primary circuit layouts and the related functionality needs by
modifying the internal functionality using PCM600.
254 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
3.11.2 Functions
UL1UL2UL3
Uo
Lockout relay A
O
- IED self-supervision
R
L
94/86
U12 0. 0 kV
P 0.00 kW
Q 0.00 kVAr
IL2 0 A
- Local/Remote push button on LHMI
- User management
I ESC Clear
- Web HMI
2×
AND
I2> I2/I1> 3Ith>F 3I>>> O R
OR 46 46PD 49F 50P/51P
L
OR
3I
3× 3×
ARC 3I>/Io>BF
50L/50NL CONDITION MONITORING COMMUNICATION
51BF/51NBF
AND SUPERVISION
Protocols:
0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 2× IEC 61850-8-1 1 0
61850-8-1/-9-2LE 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0
1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 3I>→ 3I>>→ 3I2f> 3I FUSEF CBCM MCS 3I Modbus®® 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0
0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
67-1 67-2 68 60 CBCM MCS 3I IEC 60870-5-103 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 DNP3 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0
0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 UL1UL2UL3 Interfaces: 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 Io Io 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
C) U12 Ethernet: TX (RJ45), FX (LC)
(ST), Serial: Serial glass fiber (ST),
2×
2/485 RS-485, RS-232/485
Io>> OPTS TCS
D-sub 9, IRIG-B
51N-2 OPTM TCM
Redundant protocols:
HSR
PRP
Io RSTP
Io
2×
Io>→ Io>>→ Io>IEF→
CONTROL AND INDICATION 1) MEASUREMENT
67N-1 67N-2 67NIEF
3× 3×
Uo> f>/f<, SYNC O→I PQM3I PQM3U PQMU
UL1UL2UL3 59G
df/dt
25 79 PQM3I PQM3V PQMV
81
U12
REMARKS
18× Optional 3× No. of Calculated OR Alternative
MAP function instances value function to be
MAP Io/Uo defined when
2xRTD ordering
1xmA
GUID-8736C89A-53BA-49B3-95A1-3984B605504F V1 EN
Connector
PROTECTION
pins for each input and output are presented in the IED physical
LOCAL HMI
connections section. Configuration
System
HMI
Time
Authorization
A
I ESC Clear
A
O R
L
U12 0. 0 kV
P 0.00 kW
Q 0.00 kVAr
IL2 0 A
I ESC Clear
AND
O R
OR L
OR
256 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
LED Description
7 Disturbance recorder triggered
8 Circuit breaker condition monitoring
9 Circuit supervision alarm
10 Arc fault detected
11 Autoreclose in progress
REF615 257
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
258 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
REF615 259
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
The analog channels have fixed connections to the different function blocks inside
the IED’s standard configuration. However, the 12 analog channels available for
the disturbance recorder function are freely selectable as a part of the disturbance
recorder’s parameter settings.
The phase currents to the IED are fed from a current transformer. The residual
current to the IED is fed from either residually connected CTs, an external core
balance CT, neutral CT or internally calculated.
The phase voltages to the IED are fed from a voltage transformer. The residual
voltage to the IED is fed from either residually connected VTs, an open delta
connected VT or internally calculated.
The IED offers six different settings groups which can be set based on individual
needs. Each group can be activated or deactivated using the setting group settings
available in the IED.
The functional diagrams describe the IEDs protection functionality in detail and
according to the factory set default connections.
Four overcurrent stages are offered for overcurrent and short-circuit protection.
Three of these include directional functionality DPHxPDOC. The non-directional
instantaneous stage PHIPTOC1 can be blocked by energizing the binary input
X120:BI1.
PHIPTOC1
X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING BLOCK OPERATE PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START PHIPTOC1_START
GUID-B16AE694-A1BF-450D-AFA8-BE6CDEC14F31 V1 EN
260 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
DPHHPDOC1
BLOCK OPERATE DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START DPHHPDOC1_START
NON_DIR
DPHLPDOC1
BLOCK OPERATE DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START DPHLPDOC1_START
NON_DIR
DPHLPDOC2
BLOCK OPERATE DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START DPHLPDOC2_START
NON_DIR
OR6
DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE B1 O DPHxPDOC_OPERATE
DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE B2
DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-D8B8656A-F5D7-4449-94B4-CFE402EDE482 V1 EN
The upstream blocking from the start of the directional overcurrent second low
stage DPHLPDOC2 is connected to the binary output X110:SO1. This output can
be used for sending a blocking signal to the relevant overcurrent protection stage of
the IED at the infeeding bay.
OR6
DPHLPDOC2_START B1 O UPSTEAM_OC_BLOCKING
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-E879BBBA-BEA6-4F5B-B22D-D183E8B345AA V1 EN
The inrush detection block's (INRPHAR1) output BLK2H enables either blocking
the function or multiplying the active settings for any of the available overcurrent
or earth-fault function blocks.
INRPHAR1
BLOCK BLK2H INRPHAR1_BLK2H
GUID-5F2F3BE0-927A-42F0-9413-CDA6C0FEC0F8 V1 EN
REF615 261
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
Two negative sequence overcurrent stages NSPTOC1 and NSPTOC2 are provided
for phase unbalance protection. These functions are used to protect the feeder
against phase unbalance.
NSPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE NSPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START NSPTOC1_START
NSPTOC2
BLOCK OPERATE NSPTOC2_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START NSPTOC2_START
OR
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O NSPTOC_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B2
GUID-7196E7DF-D646-46E6-926E-736FA68E1350 V1 EN
Three stages are provided for directional earth-fault protection. According to the
IED's order code, the directional earth-fault protection method can be based on
conventional directional earth-fault DEFxPDEF only or alternatively together with
admittance criteria EFPADM, wattmetric earth-fault protection WPWDE or
harmonic based earth-fault protection HAEFPTOC. In addition, there is a dedicated
protection stage INTRPTEF either for transient-based earth-fault protection or for
cable intermittent earth-fault protection in compensated networks.
262 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
DEFLPDEF1
BLOCK OPERATE DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START DEFLPDEF1_START
RCA_CTL
DEFLPDEF2
BLOCK OPERATE DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START DEFLPDEF2_START
RCA_CTL
DEFHPDEF1
BLOCK OPERATE DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START DEFHPDEF1_START
RCA_CTL
OR6
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O DEFxPDEF_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B2
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-935D2178-A838-4D7B-BB64-98F1AEB3150A V1 EN
INTRPTEF1
BLOCK OPERATE INTRPTEF1_OPERATE
START INTRPTEF1_START
BLK_EF
GUID-D4BE5EE6-0CD3-417E-99C6-88CE3B942A73 V1 EN
REF615 263
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
WPWDE1
BLOCK OPERATE WPWDE1_OPERATE
RCA_CTL START WPWDE1_START
WPWDE2
BLOCK OPERATE WPWDE2_OPERATE
RCA_CTL START WPWDE2_START
WPWDE3
BLOCK OPERATE WPWDE3_OPERATE
RCA_CTL START WPWDE3_START
OR6
WPWDE1_OPERATE B1 O WPWDE_OPERATE
WPWDE2_OPERATE B2
WPWDE3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-088C6730-9479-4A5F-BB6B-4D6C674530DC V1 EN
EFPADM1
BLOCK OPERATE EFPADM1_OPERATE
RELEASE START EFPADM1_START
EFPADM2
BLOCK OPERATE EFPADM2_OPERATE
RELEASE START EFPADM2_START
EFPADM3
BLOCK OPERATE EFPADM3_OPERATE
RELEASE START EFPADM3_START
OR6
EFPADM1_OPERATE B1 O EFPADM_OPERATE
EFPADM2_OPERATE B2
EFPADM3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-02FD43E2-5135-4D7C-BFBB-C12381B6FAA1 V1 EN
264 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
EFHPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE EFHPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START EFHPTOC1_START
GUID-D03A063B-438B-4282-B6B9-A61C404C25F5 V1 EN
PDNSPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE
START PDNSPTOC1_START
GUID-7D77A0CB-7E59-4161-9451-F93E1B7D34CF V1 EN
The thermal overload protection T1PTTR1 detects overloads under varying load
conditions. The BLK_CLOSE output of the function is used to block the closing
operation of circuit breaker.
T1PTTR1
BLK_OPR OPERATE T1PTTR1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START T1PTTR1_START
TEMP_AMB ALARM T1PTTR1_ALARM
BLK_CLOSE T1PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE
GUID-52DD9079-0F13-411A-8C7E-B5A89065765E V1 EN
The breaker failure protection CCBRBRF1 is initiated via the START input by
number of different protection functions available in the IED. The breaker failure
protection function offers different operating modes associated with the circuit
breaker position and the measured phase and residual currents.
The breaker failure protection function has two operating outputs: TRRET and
TRBU. The TRRET operate output is used for retripping its own breaker through
TRPPTRC2_TRIP. The TRBU output is used to give a backup trip to the breaker
feeding upstream. For this purpose, the TRBU operate output signal is connected to
the binary output X100:PO2.
REF615 265
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
CCBRBRF1
OR6 OR6
BLOCK CB_FAULT_AL
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O START TRBU CCBRBRF1_TRBU
DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE B2 B2 POSCLOSE TRRET CCBRBRF1_TRRET
DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE B3 B3 CB_FAULT
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B4 B4
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B5 B5
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B6 B6
OR6
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B2
WPWDE2_OPERATE B3
WPWDE3_OPERATE B4
EFPADM2_OPERATE B5
EFPADM3_OPERATE B6
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
GUID-8976FE81-F587-449A-95AA-7A7770B939A1 V1 EN
The operate signals from ARCSARC1...3 are connected to both trip logic
TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2. If the IED has been ordered with high speed binary
outputs, the individual operate signals from ARCSARC1...3 are connected to the
dedicated trip logic TRPPTRC3..5. The output of TRPPTRC3...5 is available at
high speed outputs X110:HSO1, X110:HSO2 and X110:HSO3.
266 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
ARCSARC1
BLOCK OPERATE ARCSARC1_OPERATE
REM_FLT_ARC ARC_FLT_DET ARCSARC1_ARC_FLT_DET
OPR_MODE
ARCSARC2
BLOCK OPERATE ARCSARC2_OPERATE
REM_FLT_ARC ARC_FLT_DET ARCSARC2_ARC_FLT_DET
OPR_MODE
ARCSARC3
BLOCK OPERATE ARCSARC3_OPERATE
REM_FLT_ARC ARC_FLT_DET ARCSARC3_ARC_FLT_DET
OPR_MODE
OR6
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B1 O ARCSARC_OPERATE
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-F3C5D80F-F26B-4B34-9C26-1F2F3FA0CA36 V1 EN
TRPPTRC3
BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC3_TRIP
ARCSARC1_OPERATE OPERATE CL_LKOUT
X120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT RST_LKOUT
TRPPTRC4
BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC4_TRIP
ARCSARC2_OPERATE OPERATE CL_LKOUT
X120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT RST_LKOUT
TRPPTRC5
BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC5_TRIP
ARCSARC3_OPERATE OPERATE CL_LKOUT
X120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT RST_LKOUT
GUID-B7398C9F-D767-4749-8AC2-149EEE9F478D V1 EN
REF615 267
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
control command to the circuit breaker, either local or remote, also blocks the
autorecloser function via the CBXCBR1-SELECTED signal.
The circuit breaker availability for the autorecloser sequence is expressed with the
CB_READY input in DARREC1. The signal, and other required signals, are
connected to the CB spring charged binary inputs in this configuration. The open
command from the autorecloser is connected directly to binary output X100:PO3,
whereas the close command is connected directly to binary output X100:PO1.
DARREC1
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE INIT_1 OPEN_CB DARREC1_OPEN_CB
OR6 DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE INIT_2 CLOSE_CB DARREC1_CLOSE_CB
DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE INIT_3 CMD_WAIT
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B1 O INIT_4 INPRO DARREC1_INPRO
EFPADM2_OPERATE B2 INIT_5 LOCKED
WPWDE2_OPERATE B3 INIT_6 PROT_CRD
B4 DEL_INIT_2 UNSUC_RECL DARREC1_UNSUC_RECL
B5 DEL_INIT_3 AR_ON
B6 DEL_INIT_4 READY
BLK_RECL_T ACTIVE
BLK_RCLM_T
BLK_THERM
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED CB_POS
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED CB_READY
OR6 INC_SHOTP
INHIBIT_RECL
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O RECL_ON
EFPADM3_OPERATE B2 SECRSYN1_SYNC_OK SYNC
WPWDE3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
OR6
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B2
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B3
CBXCBR1_SELECTED B4
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE B5 OR
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM B6
B1 O
B2
OR6
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B1 O
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-78730CDA-0F82-45A0-8789-A140F7490E50 V1 EN
268 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
PHPTOV1
BLOCK OPERATE PHPTOV1_OPERATE
START PHPTOV1_START
PHPTOV2
BLOCK OPERATE PHPTOV2_OPERATE
START PHPTOV2_START
PHPTOV3
BLOCK OPERATE PHPTOV3_OPERATE
START PHPTOV3_START
OR6
PHPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O PHPTOV_OPERATE
PHPTOV2_OPERATE B2
PHPTOV3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-45958B3A-52BD-4FDB-BEBA-97E966DFF9CF V1 EN
PHPTUV1
SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_U BLOCK OPERATE PHPTUV1_OPERATE
START PHPTUV1_START
PHPTUV2
SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_U BLOCK OPERATE PHPTUV2_OPERATE
START PHPTUV2_START
PHPTUV3
SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_U BLOCK OPERATE PHPTUV3_OPERATE
START PHPTUV3_START
OR6
PHPTUV1_OPERATE B1 O PHPTUV_OPERATE
PHPTUV2_OPERATE B2
PHPTUV3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-1FD21003-8B8B-4C27-8C36-6E6B7785DCA7 V1 EN
REF615 269
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
ROVPTOV1
BLOCK OPERATE ROVPTOV1_OPERATE
START ROVPTOV1_START
ROVPTOV2
BLOCK OPERATE ROVPTOV2_OPERATE
START ROVPTOV2_START
ROVPTOV3
BLOCK OPERATE ROVPTOV3_OPERATE
START ROVPTOV3_START
OR6
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O ROVPTOV_OPERATE
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B2
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-C6B6B1B9-0333-4C5E-B5C4-CBEF0393EA5E V1 EN
NSPTOV1
SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_U BLOCK OPERATE NSPTOV1_OPERATE
START NSPTOV1_START
GUID-C1F46B39-F8B7-410A-8EB2-3002D4DC009D V1 EN
PSPTUV1
SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_U BLOCK OPERATE PSPTUV1_OPERATE
START PSPTUV1_START
GUID-8D6416CF-9503-48F1-8B0E-82AFB0C0828B V1 EN
270 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
FRPFRQ1
BLOCK OPERATE FRPFRQ1_OPERATE
OPR_OFRQ
OPR_UFRQ
OPR_FRG
START FRPFRQ1_START
ST_OFRQ
ST_UFRQ
ST_FRG
FRPFRQ2
BLOCK OPERATE FRPFRQ2_OPERATE
OPR_OFRQ
OPR_UFRQ
OPR_FRG
START FRPFRQ2_START
ST_OFRQ
ST_UFRQ
ST_FRG
FRPFRQ3
BLOCK OPERATE FRPFRQ3_OPERATE
OPR_OFRQ
OPR_UFRQ
OPR_FRG
START FRPFRQ3_START
ST_OFRQ
ST_UFRQ
ST_FRG
OR6
FRPFRQ1_OPERATE B1 O FREQUENCY_OPERATE
FRPFRQ2_OPERATE B2
FRPFRQ3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-A37BDC66-1D13-4782-8EDA-B6A0E6BF51AF V1 EN
General start and operate signals from all the functions are connected to pulse timer
TPGAPC1 for setting the minimum pulse length for the outputs. The output from
TPGAPC1 is connected to binary outputs.
REF615 271
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
OR6 OR6
DPHLPDOC1_START B1 O B1 O
DPHLPDOC2_START B2 B2
DPHHPDOC1_START B3 B3
PHIPTOC1_START B4 B4
NSPTOC1_START B5 B5
NSPTOC2_START B6 B6
TPGAPC1
IN1 OUT1 GENERAL_START_PULSE
IN2 OUT2 GENERAL_OPERATE_PULSE
OR6 OR6 OR6
DEFLPDEF1_START B1 O DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O
DEFLPDEF2_START B2 DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE B2 B2
DEFHPDEF1_START B3 DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE B3 B3
INTRPTEF1_START B4 NSPTOC1_OPERATE B4 B4
EFHPTOC1_START B5 NSPTOC2_OPERATE B5 B5
PDNSPTOC1_START B6 PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B6 B6
OR6 OR6
PHPTOV1_START B1 O DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O
PHPTOV2_START B2 DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B2
PHPTOV3_START B3 DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B3
PSPTUV1_START B4 INTRPTEF1_OPERATE B4
NSPTOV1_START B5 EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B5
PHPTUV1_START B6 PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B6
OR6 OR6
PHPTUV2_START B1 O EFPADM1_OPERATE B1 O
PHPTUV3_START B2 EFPADM2_OPERATE B2
ROVPTOV1_START B3 EFPADM3_OPERATE B3
ROVPTOV2_START B4 ARCSARC1_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV3_START B5 ARCSARC2_OPERATE B5
B6 ARCSARC3_OPERATE B6
OR6 OR6
EFPADM1_START B1 O PHPTUV1_OPERATE B1 O
EFPADM2_START B2 PHPTUV2_OPERATE B2
EFPADM3_START B3 PHPTUV3_OPERATE B3
WPWDE1_START B4 NSPTOV1_OPERATE B4
WPWDE2_START B5 PSPTUV1_OPERATE B5
WPWDE3_START B6 PHPTOV1_OPERATE B6
OR6 OR6
FRPFRQ1_START B1 O PHPTOV2_OPERATE B1 O
FRPFRQ2_START B2 PHPTOV3_OPERATE B2
FRPFRQ3_START B3 ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B3
B4 ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B4
B5 ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B5
B6 B6
OR6
WPWDE1_OPERATE B1 O
WPWDE2_OPERATE B2
WPWDE3_OPERATE B3
FRPFRQ1_OPERATE B4
FRPFRQ2_OPERATE B5
FRPFRQ3_OPERATE B6
GUID-4AE89BBA-5712-4794-BD10-F7633357B2DC V1 EN
The operate signals from the protection functions are connected to the two trip
logics TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2. The output of these trip logic functions is
available at binary output X100:PO3 and X100:PO4. The trip logic functions are
provided with a lockout and latching function, event generation and the trip signal
duration setting. If the lockout operation mode is selected, binary input X120:BI4
has been assigned to RST_LKOUT input of both the trip logic to enable external
reset with a push button.
Three other trip logics TRPPTRC3...4 are also available if the IED is ordered with
high speed binary outputs options.
272 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
TRPPTRC1
OR6 OR6
BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC1_TRIP
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O OPERATE CL_LKOUT
DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE B2 B2 RST_LKOUT
DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE B3 B3
DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE B4 B4
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B5 B5
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B6 B6
OR6
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B2
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B3
EFPADM1_OPERATE B4
EFPADM2_OPERATE B5
EFPADM3_OPERATE B6
OR6
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE B1 O
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B3
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B5
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B6
OR6
WPWDE1_OPERATE B1 O
WPWDE2_OPERATE B2
WPWDE3_OPERATE B3
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B4
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B5
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B6
OR6
PHPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O
PHPTOV2_OPERATE B2
PHPTOV3_OPERATE B3
PSPTUV1_OPERATE B4
NSPTOV1_OPERATE B5
PHPTUV1_OPERATE B6
OR6
PHPTUV2_OPERATE B1 O
PHPTUV3_OPERATE B2
FRPFRQ1_OPERATE B3
FRPFRQ2_OPERATE B4
FRPFRQ3_OPERATE B5
B6
X120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT
GUID-6EC7CE50-1FDF-41DE-9846-42279F6657A4 V1 EN
REF615 273
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
TRPPTRC2
OR6 OR6
BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC2_TRIP
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O OPERATE CL_LKOUT
DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE B2 B2 RST_LKOUT
DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE B3 B3
DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE B4 B4
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B5 B5
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B6 B6
OR6
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B2
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B3
EFPADM1_OPERATE B4
EFPADM2_OPERATE B5
EFPADM3_OPERATE B6
OR6
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE B1 O
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B3
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B5
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B6
OR6
NSPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O
CCBRBRF1_TRRET B2
WPWDE1_OPERATE B3
WPWDE2_OPERATE B4
WPWDE3_OPERATE B5
PSPTUV1_OPERATE B6
OR6
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B1 O
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
PHPTUV1_OPERATE B4
PHPTUV2_OPERATE B5
PHPTUV3_OPERATE B6
OR6
PHPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O
PHPTOV2_OPERATE B2
PHPTOV3_OPERATE B3
FRPFRQ1_OPERATE B4
FRPFRQ2_OPERATE B5
FRPFRQ3_OPERATE B6
X120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT
GUID-F96CA689-B27A-4743-B3FF-9622054B771F V1 EN
The START and the OPERATE outputs from the protection stages are routed to
trigger the disturbance recorder or, alternatively, only to be recorded by the
disturbance recorder depending on the parameter settings. Additionally, the
selected signals from the different functions and the few binary inputs are also
connected to the disturbance recorder.
274 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
OR6
DEFLPDEF1_START B1 O
EFPADM1_START B2
WPWDE1_START B3
B4 RDRE
B5
B6
RDRE1
DPHLPDOC1_START C1 TRIGGERED DISTURB_RECORD_TRIGGERED
OR6 DPHLPDOC2_START C2
DPHHPDOC1_START C3
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O OR6 PHIPTOC1_START C4
DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE B2 NSPTOC1_START C5
DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE B3 DEFLPDEF2_START B1 O NSPTOC2_START C6
DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE B4 EFPADM2_START B2 C7
B5 WPWDE2_START B3 C8
B6 B4 C9
B5 INTRPTEF1_START C10
B6 EFHPTOC1_START C11
PDNSPTOC1_START C12
T1PTTR1_START C13
OR PHPTOV1_START C14
OR6 PHPTOV2_START C15
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O PHPTOV3_START C16
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B2 DEFHPDEF1_START B1 O PSPTUV1_START C17
EFPADM3_START B2 NSPTOV1_START C18
WPWDE3_START B3 PHPTUV1_START C19
B4 PHPTUV2_START C20
B5 PHPTUV3_START C21
OR6 B6 ROVPTOV1_START C22
ROVPTOV2_START C23
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O ROVPTOV3_START C24
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B2 CCBRBRF1_TRRET C25
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B3 CCBRBRF1_TRBU C26
EFPADM1_OPERATE B4 C27
EFPADM2_OPERATE B5 C28
EFPADM3_OPERATE B6 C29
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE C30
OR6 EFHPTOC1_OPERATE C31
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE C32
OR PHPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O INRPHAR1_BLK2H C33
OR6 PHPTOV2_OPERATE B2 T1PTTR1_OPERATE C34
B1 O PHPTOV3_OPERATE B3 C35
B1 O B2 B4 C36
WPWDE1_OPERATE B2 B5 C37
WPWDE2_OPERATE B3 B6 SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_3PH C38
WPWDE3_OPERATE B4 SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_U C39
B5 CCRDIF1_FAIL C40
B6 X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING C41
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED C42
OR6 X120_BI3_CB_OPENED C43
C44
PHPTUV1_OPERATE B1 O C45
PHPTUV2_OPERATE B2 ARCSARC1_OPERATE C46
PHPTUV3_OPERATE B3 ARCSARC2_OPERATE C47
B4 ARCSARC3_OPERATE C48
B5 DARREC1_INPRO C49
B6 FRPFRQ1_START C50
OR6 FRPFRQ2_START C51
FRPFRQ3_START C52
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O C53
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B2 SECRSYN1_SYNC_INPRO C54
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B3 OR6 SECRSYN1_SYNC_OK C55
PSPTUV1_OPERATE B4 SECRSYN1_CL_FAIL_AL C56
NSPTOV1_OPERATE B5 ARCSARC1_ARC_FLT_DET B1 O SECRSYN1_CMD_FAIL_AL C57
B6 ARCSARC2_ARC_FLT_DET B2 C58
ARCSARC3_ARC_FLT_DET B3 C59
B4 C60
B5 C61
B6 C62
OR C63
C64
DARREC1_CLOSE_CB B1 O
DARREC1_UNSUC_RECL B2
OR6
FRPFRQ1_OPERATE B1 O
FRPFRQ2_OPERATE B2
FRPFRQ3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-4B658DCB-02B0-4C19-99C4-B10818FAA883 V1 EN
CCRDIF1
BLOCK FAIL CCRDIF1_FAIL
ALARM CCRDIF1_ALARM
GUID-862FD482-2A71-456E-A9A9-B9502ECF948C V1 EN
SEQRFUF1
BLOCK FUSEF_3PH SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_3PH
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED CB_CLOSED FUSEF_U SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_U
DISCON_OPEN
X110_BI1_BUS_VT_MCB_OPEN MINCB_OPEN
GUID-DDDE0B45-9241-4A6D-9BB8-342D8DA0C295 V1 EN
REF615 275
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
The circuit breaker condition monitoring function SSCBR1 supervises the switch
status based on the connected binary input information and the measured current
levels. SSCBR1 introduces various supervision methods.
SSCBR1
BLOCK TRV_T_OP_ALM SSCBR1_TRV_T_OP_ALM
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED POSOPEN TRV_T_CL_ALM SSCBR1_TRV_T_CL_ALM
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED POSCLOSE SPR_CHR_ALM SSCBR1_SPR_CHR_ALM
CB_OPEN_COMMAND OPEN_CB_EXE OPR_ALM SSCBR1_OPR_ALM
CB_CLOSE_COMMAND CLOSE_CB_EXE OPR_LO SSCBR1_OPR_LO
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM PRES_ALM_IN IPOW_ALM SSCBR1_IPOW_ALM
PRES_LO_IN IPOW_LO SSCBR1_IPOW_LO
CB_SPRING_DISCHARGED SPR_CHR_ST CB_LIFE_ALM SSCBR1_CB_LIFE_ALM
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED SPR_CHR MON_ALM SSCBR1_MON_ALM
RST_IPOW PRES_ALM SSCBR1_PRES_ALM
RST_CB_WEAR PRES_LO SSCBR1_PRES_LO
RST_TRV_T OPENPOS
RST_SPR_T INVALIDPOS
CLOSEPOS
GUID-A891CCB2-2E51-4E87-9F7E-E0AFBFFCBBCA V1 EN
OR6
SSCBR1_TRV_T_OP_ALM B1 O
SSCBR1_TRV_T_CL_ALM B2
SSCBR1_SPR_CHR_ALM B3
SSCBR1_OPR_ALM B4
SSCBR1_OPR_LO B5 OR
SSCBR1_IPOW_ALM B6
B1 O SSCBR1_ALARMS
B2
OR6
SSCBR1_IPOW_LO B1 O
SSCBR1_CB_LIFE_ALM B2
SSCBR1_MON_ALM B3
SSCBR1_PRES_ALM B4
SSCBR1_PRES_LO B5
B6
GUID-DEA89B88-04ED-42EC-BC51-7EDCBD3556CF V1 EN
NOT
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED IN OUT CB_SPRING_DISCHARGED
GUID-D93C83EB-1197-4108-97E1-D13E39536796 V1 EN
Two separate trip circuit supervision functions are included: TCSSCBR1 for power
output X100:PO3 and TCSSCBR2 for power output X100:PO4. The functions are
blocked by the Master Trip TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2 and the circuit breaker
open signal.
276 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
TCSSCBR1
TCSSCBR_BLOCKING BLOCK ALARM TCSSCBR1_ALARM
TCSSCBR2
TCSSCBR_BLOCKING BLOCK ALARM TCSSCBR2_ALARM
OR
TCSSCBR1_ALARM B1 O TCSSCBR_ALARM
TCSSCBR2_ALARM B2
GUID-E92DD696-2EE5-4028-BE57-DA67C73C82C2 V1 EN
OR6
TRPPTRC1_TRIP B1 O TCSSCBR_BLOCKING
TRPPTRC2_TRIP B2
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-8E139357-424E-400B-A463-137229E9B0DC V1 EN
SECRSYN measures the bus and line voltages and compares them to set
conditions. When all the measured quantities are within set limits, the output
SYNC_OK is activated for allowing closing or closing the circuit breaker. The
SYNC_OK output signal of SECRSYN is connected to ENA_CLOSE input of
CBXCBR through control logic. The function is blocked in case if line side or bus
side MCB is open.
REF615 277
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
SECRSYN1
BLOCK_SECRSYN1 BLOCK SYNC_INPRO SECRSYN1_SYNC_INPRO
CL_COMMAND SYNC_OK SECRSYN1_SYNC_OK
BYPASS CL_FAIL_AL SECRSYN1_CL_FAIL_AL
CMD_FAIL_AL SECRSYN1_CMD_FAIL_AL
LLDB
LLLB
DLLB
DLDB
OR
X110_BI2_LINE_VT_MCB_OPEN B1 O BLOCK_SECRSYN1
X110_BI1_BUS_VT_MCB_OPEN B2
GUID-48E8F4CC-1F3E-43F5-AC2A-FBB39A7AF789 V1 EN
Two types of disconnector and earthing switch function blocks are available.
DCSXSWI1...3 and ESSXSWI1...2 are status only type, and DCXSWI1...2 and
ESXSWI1 are controllable type. By default, the status only blocks are connected in
standard configuration. The disconnector (CB truck) and line side earthing switch
status information is connected to DCSXSWI1 and ESSXSI1.
DCSXSWI1
X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_TEST POSOPEN OPENPOS
X110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_SERVICE POSCLOSE CLOSEPOS
OKPOS DCSXSWI1_OKPOS
GUID-4A1CF602-2F56-469C-9893-BDC9F793FA03 V1 EN
ESSXSWI1
X110_BI8_ES1_OPENED POSOPEN OPENPOS ESSXSWI1_OPENPOS
X110_BI7_ES1_CLOSED POSCLOSE CLOSEPOS
OKPOS
GUID-EFCDB6F6-3081-4D3D-BB35-1A525173EE10 V1 EN
The circuit breaker closing is enabled when the ENA_CLOSE input is activated.
The input can be activated by the configuration logic, which is a combination of
the disconnector or breaker truck and earth-switch position status, status of the trip
logics, gas pressure alarm, circuit-breaker spring charging and synchronizing ok
status.
The OKPOS output from DCSXSWI defines if the disconnector or breaker truck is
definitely either open (in test position) or close (in service position). This, together
with the open earth-switch and non-active trip signals, activates the close-enable
signal to the circuit breaker control function block. The open operation for circuit
breaker is always enabled.
The ITL_BYPASS input can be used, for example, to always enable the closing of
the circuit breaker when the circuit breaker truck is in the test position.
ITL_BYPASS overrides, for example, active interlocking conditions when the
circuit breaker truck is closed in service position.
278 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
CBXCBR1
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED POSOPEN SELECTED CBXCBR1_SELECTED
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED POSCLOSE EXE_OP CBXCBR1_EXE_OP
TRUE ENA_OPEN EXE_CL CBXCBR1_EXE_CL
CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSE ENA_CLOSE OPENPOS
FALSE BLK_OPEN CLOSEPOS
CBXCBR1_BLK_CLOSE BLK_CLOSE OKPOS
CBXBCR1_AU_OPEN AU_OPEN OPEN_ENAD
CBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE AU_CLOSE CLOSE_ENAD
ITL_BYPASS
GUID-E24C973A-67F1-48CC-811F-067BFF2CEF28 V1 EN
OR
CBXCBR1_EXE_CL B1 O CB_CLOSE_COMMAND
DARREC1_CLOSE_CB B2
GUID-58728843-DCDD-473D-86E8-487CC8B5204F V1 EN
OR6
CBXCBR1_EXE_OP B1 O CB_OPEN_COMMAND
TRPPTRC1_TRIP B2
DARREC1_OPEN_CB B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-2A26C519-C690-4A30-A7F2-5FF22E25DFFC V1 EN
AND6
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED B1 O CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSE
SECRSYN1_SYNC_OK B2
B3
NOT B4
B5
TRPPTRC1_TRIP IN OUT B6
NOT
TRPPTRC2_TRIP IN OUT
NOT
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM IN OUT
AND
DCSXSWI1_OKPOS B1 O
ESSXSWI1_OPENPOS B2
GUID-58344D20-1E72-48D9-A977-3B88F4E67FD9 V1 EN
REF615 279
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
OR6
T1PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE B1 O CBXCBR1_BLK_CLOSE
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-2B6B90C1-0B92-4F9F-B391-FDB2B58C31CE V1 EN
The configuration includes logic for generating circuit breaker external closing and
opening command with the IED in local or remote mode.
Check the logic for the external circuit breaker closing command
and modify it according to the application.
AND
CONTROL_LOCAL B1 O
FALSE B2
OR
B1 O CBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE
B2
AND
CONTROL_REMOTE B1 O
FALSE B2
GUID-F71C5F96-7155-43CF-830F-96C7EF7B1DC3 V1 EN
AND
CONTROL_LOCAL B1 O
FALSE B2
OR
B1 O CBXBCR1_AU_OPEN
B2
AND
CONTROL_REMOTE B1 O
FALSE B2
GUID-F0B5A090-24EC-42AE-8655-589FABB92683 V1 EN
The phase current inputs to the IED are measured by the three-phase current
measurement function CMMXU1. The current input is connected to the X120 card
in the back panel. The sequence current measurement CSMSQI1 measures the
sequence current and the residual current measurement RESCMMXU1 measures
the residual current.
The three-phase bus side phase voltage and single phase line side phase voltage
inputs to the IED are measured by voltage measurement function VMMXU1 and
VMMXU2. The voltage input is connected to the X130 card in the back panel. The
280 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
sequence voltage measurement VSMSQI1 measures the sequence voltage and the
residual voltage measurement RESVMMXU1 measures the residual voltage.
The measurements can be seen from the LHMI and they are available under the
measurement option in the menu selection. Based on the settings, function blocks
can generate low alarm or warning and high alarm or warning signals for the
measured current values.
The frequency measurement FMMXU1 of the power system and the three-phase
power measurement PEMMXU1 are available. The load profile function
LDPMSTA1 is included in the measurements sheet. LDPMSTA1 offers the ability
to observe the loading history of the corresponding feeder.
The power quality function CMHAI1 and VMHAI1 can be used to measure the
harmonic contents of the phase current and phase voltages. The voltage variation
that is sage and swells can be measured by power quality function PHQVVR1. By
default, these power quality functions are not included in the configuration.
Depending on the application, the needed logic connections can be made by
PCM600.
CMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
LOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM
GUID-B0C3BB58-7029-49D0-9617-E432E26969E8 V1 EN
CSMSQI1
GUID-6AF87ABD-4C95-4753-8827-F9CEC888853E V1 EN
RESCMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
GUID-DC8A9472-37B2-420B-8C67-3257FA9694A2 V1 EN
VMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
LOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM
GUID-D77A125E-DEFF-46DA-8A1B-26E8E0A01888 V1 EN
REF615 281
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
VSMSQI1
GUID-058480EF-6AA8-4109-ABF4-843B260EAB37 V1 EN
RESVMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
GUID-9581AEE9-F675-455C-AA48-63283CB8C97C V1 EN
VMMXU2
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
LOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM
GUID-CB365680-957F-4315-846E-F270429B72F5 V1 EN
FMMXU1
GUID-31F768F6-7FB2-41C6-A75E-A1E847791946 V1 EN
PEMMXU1
RSTACM
GUID-48F72F18-D585-404E-A529-864E7BAA8907 V1 EN
FLTMSTA1
BLOCK
CB_CLRD
GUID-114B06B5-7D33-47B0-9907-7F19931CBA43 V1 EN
LDPMSTA1
RSTMEM MEM_WARN
MEM_ALARM
GUID-6906C86B-8A41-453A-B2AF-E24B37B288BF V1 EN
282 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 1 OR
B1 O X110_BI1_BUS_VT_MCB_OPEN
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 1
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 2 OR
B1 O X110_BI2_LINE_VT_MCB_OPEN
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 2
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 3 OR
B1 O X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 3
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 4 OR
B1 O X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 4
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 5 OR
B1 O X110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_SERVICE
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 5
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 6 OR
B1 O X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_TEST
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 6
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 7 OR
B1 O X110_BI7_ES1_CLOSED
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 7
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 8 OR
B1 O X110_BI8_ES1_OPENED
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 8
GUID-61427C3B-4892-4EB7-843C-B841B51B84DE V1 EN
REF615 283
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING
X120 (AIM).X120-Input 1
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
X120 (AIM).X120-Input 2
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED
X120 (AIM).X120-Input 3
X120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT
X120 (AIM).X120-Input 4
GUID-DBCA4227-D1C9-470A-9ECB-0317EF860796 V1 EN
UPSTEAM_OC_BLOCKING
X110 (BIO).X110-SO1
TRPPTRC3_TRIP
X110 (BIO-H).X110-HSO1
OC_OPERATE_PULSE
X110 (BIO).X110-SO2
TRPPTRC4_TRIP
X110 (BIO-H).X110-HSO2
EF_OPERATE_PULSE
X110 (BIO).X110-SO3
TRPPTRC5_TRIP
X110 (BIO-H).X110-HSO3
VOLTAGE_AND_FREQ_OPERATE_PULSE
X110 (BIO).X110-SO4
GUID-33084EAB-5DF1-4A70-BF4D-95AE4156AA4E V1 EN
CB_CLOSE_COMMAND
X100 (PSM).X100-PO1
CCBRBRF1_TRBU
X100 (PSM).X100-PO2
GENERAL_START_PULSE
X100 (PSM).X100-SO1
GENERAL_OPERATE_PULSE
X100 (PSM).X100-SO2
CB_OPEN_COMMAND
X100 (PSM).X100-PO3
TRPPTRC2_TRIP
X100 (PSM).X100-PO4
GUID-0C588A6D-2D14-452B-A1BB-61EC0150B7EC V1 EN
284 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
REF615 285
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
LED1
OR
OK
DPHxPDOC_OPERATE B1 O ALARM
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B2 RESET
LED2
OR6
OK
ROVPTOV_OPERATE B1 O ALARM
EFPADM_OPERATE B2 RESET
WPWDE_OPERATE B3
DEFxPDEF_OPERATE B4
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE B5
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B6
LED3
OR6 OR
OK
NSPTOC_OPERATE B1 O B1 O ALARM
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B2 B2 RESET
PHPTOV_OPERATE B3
PHPTUV_OPERATE B4
FREQUENCY_OPERATE B5
NSPTOV1_OPERATE B6
PSPTUV1_OPERATE
LED4
AND
OK
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED B1 O ALARM
SECRSYN1_SYNC_OK B2 RESET
LED5
OK
T1PTTR1_ALARM ALARM
RESET
GUID-895A1F18-B4D8-473A-9B7F-4E8348D4A8FB V1 EN
286 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
LED6
OK
CCBRBRF1_TRBU ALARM
RESET
LED7
OK
DISTURB_RECORD_TRIGGERED ALARM
RESET
LED8
OK
SSCBR1_ALARMS ALARM
RESET
LED9
OR6
OK
TCSSCBR_ALARM B1 O ALARM
SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_3PH B2 RESET
SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_U B3
CCRDIF1_ALARM B4
B5
B6
LED10
OK
ARCSARC_OPERATE ALARM
RESET
LED11
OK
DARREC1_INPRO ALARM
RESET
GUID-C15617B6-8B76-4110-991E-813E4030A66E V1 EN
REF615 287
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
OR TPGAPC2
DPHxPDOC_OPERATE B1 O IN1 OUT1 OC_OPERATE_PULSE
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B2 IN2 OUT2 EF_OPERATE_PULSE
OR6
DEFxPDEF_OPERATE B1 O
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE B2
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B3
EFPADM_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV_OPERATE B5
WPWDE_OPERATE B6
GUID-92ECDA59-537E-4B18-9CBA-8844F62DF4B8 V1 EN
Figure 444: Timer logic for overcurrent and earth-fault operate pulse
OR6 TPGAPC3
PHPTUV_OPERATE B1 O IN1 OUT1 VOLTAGE_AND_FREQ_OPERATE_PULSE
PHPTOV_OPERATE B2 IN2 OUT2
FREQUENCY_OPERATE B3
PSPTUV1_OPERATE B4
NSPTOV1_OPERATE B5
B6
GUID-9295344E-02C4-40E7-B098-8A31EBD29F66 V1 EN
Figure 445: Timer logic for voltage and frequency operate pulse
3.12.1 Applications
The standard configuration for directional overcurrent and directional earth-fault
protection with phase voltage-based measurements, high-impendance restricted
earth-fault protection, undervoltage and overvoltage protection, frequency
protection and measurement functions is mainly intended for cable and overhead-
line feeder applications in isolated or resonant-earthed distribution networks. The
configuration also includes additional options for selecting earth-fault protection
based on admittance, wattmetric or harmonic-based principles.
The IED with a standard configuration is delivered from the factory with default
settings and parameters. The end user flexibility for incoming, outgoing and
internal signal designation within the IED enables this configuration to be further
adapted to different primary circuit layouts and the related functionality needs by
modifying the internal functionality using PCM600.
288 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
3.12.2 Functions
UL1UL2UL3
Uo
94/86
U12 0. 0 kV
P 0.00 kW
IL2 0 A
- User management
I ESC Clear
- Web HMI
2×
AND
I2> 3Ith>F 3I>>> O R
46 49F 50P/51P
L
OR
3I
3× 3×
ARC 3I>/Io>BF
50L/50NL CONDITION MONITORING COMMUNICATION
51BF/51NBF
AND SUPERVISION
Protocols:
IEC 61850-8-1 1 0
61850-8-1/-9-2LE 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0
3I> 3I>> 3I>→ 3I>>→ Modbus®® 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0
51P-1 51P-2 67-1 67-2 Io 1 1
IEC 60870-5-103 1 0
0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0
3I 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
DNP3 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0
U12 Interfaces: 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0
3I2f> FUSEF CBCM MCS 3I 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
Ethernet: TX (RJ45), FX (LC)
68 60 CBCM MCS 3I
Serial: Serial glass fiber (ST),
UL1UL2UL3
RS-485, RS-232/485
2× D-sub 9, IRIG-B
OPTS TCS Redundant protocols:
OPTM TCM HSR
PRP
Io
RSTP
Io Io>>>
50N/51N
CONTROL AND INDICATION 1) MEASUREMENT
2×
Iob - I, U, Io, Uo, P, Q, E, pf, f
Io> Io>> Io>→ Io>>→ Object Ctrl 2)
Ind 3)
- Limit value supervision
51N-1 51N-2 67N-1 67N-2
CB 1 - - Load profile record
2 3 - Symmetrical components
DC
ES 1 2
Analog interface types 1)
dIoHi> 1)
Check availability of binary inputs/outputs
87NH from technical documentation Current transformer 4
2)
Control and indication function for
Uo primary object Voltage transformer 5
3)
Status indication function for
primary object
1)
Conventional transformer inputs
2× 2× 2× 3×
3U< 3U> Uo> f>/f<, SYNC O→I PQM3I PQM3U PQMU
df/dt
27 59 59G 25 79 PQM3I PQM3V PQMV
81
U12 U12
REMARKS
18× Optional 3× No. of Calculated OR Alternative
FLOC MAP function instances value function to be
21FL MAP Io/Uo defined when
ordering
GUID-8CD5AE89-755F-489F-8B47-DC1ADF541EE7 V1 EN
Connector pins for each input and output are presented in the IED physical
connections section.
REF615 289
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
290 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
LED Description
7 Disturbance recorder triggered
8 High impedance restricted earth-fault protection operated
9 Circuit breaker condition monitoring or supervision alarm
10 Arc fault detected
11 Autoreclose in progress
REF615 291
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
292 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
The analog channels have fixed connections to the different function blocks inside
the IED’s standard configuration. However, the 12 analog channels available for
the disturbance recorder function are freely selectable as a part of the disturbance
recorder’s parameter settings.
The phase currents to the IED are fed from a current transformer. The residual
current to the IED is fed from either residually connected CTs, an external core
balance CT, neutral CT or internally calculated.
The phase voltages to the IED are fed from a voltage transformer. The residual
voltage to the IED is fed from either residually connected VTs, an open delta
connected VT or internally calculated.
The IED offers six different settings groups which can be set based on individual
needs. Each group can be activated or deactivated using the setting group settings
available in the IED.
REF615 293
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
The functional diagrams describe the protection functionality of the IEDs in detail
and according to the factory set default connections.
Five overcurrent stages are offered for overcurrent and short-circuit protection.
Two of them include directional functionality DPHxPDOC. The non-directional
instantaneous stage PHIPTOC1 can be blocked by energizing the binary input
X130: BI1.
PHIPTOC1
X130_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING BLOCK OPERATE PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START PHIPTOC1_START
PHHPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE PHHPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START PHHPTOC1_START
PHLPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE PHLPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START PHLPTOC1_START
OR6
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O PHxPTOC_OPERATE
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-BD0A9F06-B0A0-4DA9-B6C7-FDED4A790786 V1 EN
DPHHPDOC1
BLOCK OPERATE DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START DPHHPDOC1_START
NON_DIR
DPHLPDOC1
BLOCK OPERATE DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START DPHLPDOC1_START
NON_DIR
OR
DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE B1 O DPHxPDOC_OPERATE
DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE B2
GUID-4F6D1599-A6AE-4742-8599-84B85535E2B5 V1 EN
294 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
The inrush detection block's (INRPHAR1) output BLK2H enables either blocking
the function or multiplying the active settings for any of the available overcurrent
or earth-fault function blocks.
INRPHAR1
BLOCK BLK2H INRPHAR1_BLK2H
GUID-C4B49350-27F3-4310-AC69-1B01CD67F03B V1 EN
Two negative sequence overcurrent stages NSPTOC1 and NSPTOC2 are provided
for phase unbalance protection. These functions are used to protect the feeder
against phase unbalance. Both the negative sequence overcurrent protections are
blocked in case of detection in failure in secondary circuit of current transformer.
NSPTOC1
CCRDIF1_FAIL BLOCK OPERATE NSPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START NSPTOC1_START
NSPTOC2
CCRDIF1_FAIL BLOCK OPERATE NSPTOC2_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START NSPTOC2_START
OR
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O NSPTOC_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B2
GUID-6143300A-A295-45FC-A14A-D0F05747F5E5 V1 EN
Six stages are provided for earth-fault protection. Two stages are dedicated for
directional earth-fault protection. Apart from these earth-fault protection functions,
configuration also includes a dedicated high impedance restricted earth-fault
protection function.
REF615 295
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
EFIPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE EFIPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START EFIPTOC1_START
EFHPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE EFHPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START EFHPTOC1_START
EFLPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE EFLPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START EFLPTOC1_START
EFLPTOC2
BLOCK OPERATE EFLPTOC2_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START EFLPTOC2_START
OR6
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O EFxPTOC_OPERATE
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE B3
EFLPTOC2_OPERATE B4
B5
B6
GUID-352E2951-3663-401F-BC95-B122314EFA0C V1 EN
DEFHPDEF1
BLOCK OPERATE DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START DEFHPDEF1_START
RCA_CTL
DEFLPDEF1
BLOCK OPERATE DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START DEFLPDEF1_START
RCA_CTL
OR
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O DEFxPDEF_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B2
GUID-2075A819-3231-435A-B225-58D2867B062B V1 EN
296 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
HREFPDIF1
BLOCK OPERATE HREFPDIF1_OPERATE
START HREFPDIF1_START
GUID-8034927A-76EB-4106-8ACE-2408181CF096 V1 EN
The thermal overload protection T1PTTR1 detects overloads under varying load
conditions. The BLK_CLOSE output of the function is used to block the closing
operation of circuit breaker.
T1PTTR1
BLK_OPR OPERATE T1PTTR1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START T1PTTR1_START
TEMP_AMB ALARM
BLK_CLOSE T1PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE
GUID-260F8A52-6DC6-41E9-9AA2-F37CBA88AB14 V1 EN
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE
GUID-129824AC-339E-453E-A209-6C2D79259970 V1 EN
The breaker failure protection CCBRBRF1 is initiated via the START input by
number of different protection functions available in the IED. The breaker-failure
protection function offers different operating modes associated with the circuit
breaker position and the measured phase and residual currents.
The breaker failure protection function has two operating outputs: TRRET and
TRBU. The TRRET operate output is used for retripping its own breaker through
TRPPTRC2_TRIP. The TRBU output is used to give a backup trip to the breaker
feeding upstream. For this purpose, the TRBU operate output signal is connected to
the binary output X100:PO2.
REF615 297
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
CCBRBRF1
OR6 OR6
BLOCK CB_FAULT_AL
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O START TRBU CCBRBRF1_TRBU
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B2 B2 POSCLOSE TRRET CCBRBRF1_TRRET
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B3 B3 CB_FAULT
DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE B4 B4
DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE B5 B5
T1PTTR1_OPERATE B6 B6
OR6
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE B3
EFLPTOC2_OPERATE B4
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B5
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B6
OR6
PHPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O
PHPTOV2_OPERATE B2
PHPTUV1_OPERATE B3
PHPTUV2_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B5
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B6
OR6
FRPFRQ1_OPERATE B1 O
FRPFRQ2_OPERATE B2
FRPFRQ3_OPERATE B3
HREFPDIF1_OPERATE B4
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B5
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B6
OR6
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B1 O
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
X130_BI2_CB_CLOSED
GUID-A6BB61D9-2267-4355-866D-55408AF32653 V1 EN
The operate signals from ARCSARC1...3 are connected to both trip logic
TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2. If the IED has been ordered with high speed binary
outputs, the individual operate signals from ARCSARC1...3 are connected to
dedicated trip logic TRPPTRC3...5. The output of TRPPTRC3...5 is available at
high speed outputs X110:HSO1, X110:HSO2 and X110:HSO3.
298 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
ARCSARC1
BLOCK OPERATE ARCSARC1_OPERATE
REM_FLT_ARC ARC_FLT_DET ARCSARC1_ARC_FLT_DET
OPR_MODE
ARCSARC2
BLOCK OPERATE ARCSARC2_OPERATE
REM_FLT_ARC ARC_FLT_DET ARCSARC2_ARC_FLT_DET
OPR_MODE
ARCSARC3
BLOCK OPERATE ARCSARC3_OPERATE
REM_FLT_ARC ARC_FLT_DET ARCSARC3_ARC_FLT_DET
OPR_MODE
OR6
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B1 O ARCSARC_OPERATE
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-AA383A83-5B29-4DF4-B7BB-9F3186903F21 V1 EN
TRPPTRC3
BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC3_TRIP
ARCSARC1_OPERATE OPERATE CL_LKOUT
X130_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT RST_LKOUT
TRPPTRC4
BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC4_TRIP
ARCSARC2_OPERATE OPERATE CL_LKOUT
X130_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT RST_LKOUT
TRPPTRC5
BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC5_TRIP
ARCSARC3_OPERATE OPERATE CL_LKOUT
X130_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT RST_LKOUT
GUID-AFC36F56-2F9B-4C33-8C04-2116CFD0297A V1 EN
REF615 299
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
The circuit breaker availability for the autoreclosure sequence is expressed with the
CB_READY input in DARREC1. The signal, and other required signals, are
connected to the CB spring charged binary inputs in this configuration. The open
command from the autorecloser is connected directly to binary output X100:PO3,
whereas the close command is connected directly to binary output X100:PO1.
DARREC1
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE INIT_1 OPEN_CB DARREC1_OPEN_CB
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE INIT_2 CLOSE_CB DARREC1_CLOSE_CB
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE INIT_3 CMD_WAIT
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE INIT_4 INPRO DARREC1_INPRO
INIT_5 LOCKED
INIT_6 PROT_CRD
DEL_INIT_2 UNSUC_RECL DARREC1_UNSUC_RECL
DEL_INIT_3 AR_ON
DEL_INIT_4 READY
BLK_RECL_T ACTIVE
BLK_RCLM_T
BLK_THERM
X130_BI3_CB_OPENED CB_POS
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED CB_READY
INC_SHOTP
INHIBIT_RECL
OR6 RECL_ON
SECRSYN1_SYNC_OK SYNC
T1PTTR1_OPERATE B1 O
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B2
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B3
CBXCBR1_SELECTED B4
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM B5 OR
B6
B1 O
B2
OR6
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B1 O
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-5BF9F709-886D-4561-8CBB-9DE15AE6E47C V1 EN
300 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
DARREC1
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE INIT_1 OPEN_CB DARREC1_OPEN_CB
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE INIT_2 CLOSE_CB DARREC1_CLOSE_CB
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE INIT_3 CMD_WAIT
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE INIT_4 INPRO DARREC1_INPRO
INIT_5 LOCKED
INIT_6 PROT_CRD
DEL_INIT_2 UNSUC_RECL DARREC1_UNSUC_RECL
DEL_INIT_3 AR_ON
DEL_INIT_4 READY
BLK_RECL_T ACTIVE
BLK_RCLM_T
BLK_THERM
X130_BI3_CB_OPENED CB_POS
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED CB_READY
INC_SHOTP
INHIBIT_RECL
OR6 RECL_ON
SECRSYN1_SYNC_OK SYNC
T1PTTR1_OPERATE B1 O
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B2
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B3
CBXCBR1_SELECTED B4
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM B5 OR
B6
B1 O
B2
OR6
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B1 O
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-873C22AC-CAFC-429D-AD5B-A1CA03F9E526 V1 EN
PHPTUV1
SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_U BLOCK OPERATE PHPTUV1_OPERATE
START PHPTUV1_START
PHPTUV2
SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_U BLOCK OPERATE PHPTUV2_OPERATE
START PHPTUV2_START
OR
PHPTUV1_OPERATE B1 O PHPTUV_OPERATE
PHPTUV2_OPERATE B2
GUID-F2B553C3-1F96-411C-A8A5-197147FD8399 V1 EN
REF615 301
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
ROVPTOV1
BLOCK OPERATE ROVPTOV1_OPERATE
START ROVPTOV1_START
ROVPTOV2
BLOCK OPERATE ROVPTOV2_OPERATE
START ROVPTOV2_START
OR6
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O ROVPTOV_OPERATE
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-02DC3919-900F-41A1-82DA-28B3FE236F56 V1 EN
302 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
FRPFRQ1
BLOCK OPERATE FRPFRQ1_OPERATE
OPR_OFRQ
OPR_UFRQ
OPR_FRG
START FRPFRQ1_START
ST_OFRQ
ST_UFRQ
ST_FRG
FRPFRQ2
BLOCK OPERATE FRPFRQ2_OPERATE
OPR_OFRQ
OPR_UFRQ
OPR_FRG
START FRPFRQ2_START
ST_OFRQ
ST_UFRQ
ST_FRG
FRPFRQ3
BLOCK OPERATE FRPFRQ3_OPERATE
OPR_OFRQ
OPR_UFRQ
OPR_FRG
START FRPFRQ3_START
ST_OFRQ
ST_UFRQ
ST_FRG
OR6
FRPFRQ1_OPERATE B1 O FREQUENCY_OPERATE
FRPFRQ2_OPERATE B2
FRPFRQ3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-9DB8C268-09ED-4691-97DE-09B32356C078 V1 EN
General start and operate signals from all the functions are connected to pulse timer
TPGAPC1 for setting the minimum pulse length for the outputs. The output from
TPGAPC1 is connected to binary outputs
REF615 303
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
OR6
EFLPTOC1_START B1 O
EFLPTOC2_START B2
EFHPTOC1_START B3
EFIPTOC1_START B4 OR6 OR6
DEFHPDEF1_START B5
DEFLPDEF1_START B6 PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B2 B2
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B3 B3
DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE B4 B4
DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE B5 B5
T1PTTR1_OPERATE B6 B6
OR6
PHPTOV1_START B1 O
PHPTOV2_START B2
PHPTUV1_START B3 OR6
PHPTUV2_START B4
ROVPTOV1_START B5 PHPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O
ROVPTOV2_START B6 PHPTOV2_OPERATE B2
PHPTUV1_OPERATE B3
PHPTUV2_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B5
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B6
OR6
FRPFRQ1_START B1 O
FRPFRQ2_START B2
FRPFRQ3_START B3 OR6
HREFPDIF1_START B4
NSPTOC1_START B5 EFLPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O
NSPTOC2_START B6 EFLPTOC2_OPERATE B2
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B3
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE B4
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B5
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B6
OR6
HREFPDIF1_OPERATE B1 O
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B2
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B3
FRPFRQ1_OPERATE B4
FRPFRQ2_OPERATE B5
FRPFRQ3_OPERATE B6
OR6
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B1 O
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-29DD10F3-A445-41EC-825E-B0DDAF31F9EF V1 EN
The operate signals from the protection functions are connected to the two trip
logics TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2. The output of these trip logic functions is
available at binary output X100:PO3 and X100:PO4. The trip logic functions are
provided with a lockout and latching function, event generation and the trip signal
duration setting. If the lockout operation mode is selected, binary input X130:BI4
has been assigned to RST_LKOUT input of both the trip logic to enable external
reset with a push button.
Three other trip logics TRPPTRC3...4 are also available if the IED is ordered with
high speed binary outputs options.
304 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
TRPPTRC1
OR6 OR6
BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC1_TRIP
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O OPERATE CL_LKOUT
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B2 B2 RST_LKOUT
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B3 B3
DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE B4 B4
DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE B5 B5
B6 B6
OR6
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE B3
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B4
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B5
B6
OR6
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B2
T1PTTR1_OPERATE B3
HREFPDIF1_OPERATE B4
B5
B6
OR6
PHPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O
PHPTOV2_OPERATE B2
PHPTUV1_OPERATE B3
PHPTUV2_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B5
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B6
OR6
FRPFRQ1_OPERATE B1 O
FRPFRQ2_OPERATE B2
FRPFRQ3_OPERATE B3
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B4
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B5
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B6
X130_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT
GUID-1BC54F36-8AC5-4EB7-AA07-F0067D846955 V1 EN
REF615 305
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
TRPPTRC2
OR6 OR6
BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC2_TRIP
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O OPERATE CL_LKOUT
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B2 B2 RST_LKOUT
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B3 B3
DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE B4 B4
DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE B5 B5
B6 B6
OR6
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE B3
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B4
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B5
B6
OR6
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B1 O
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B4
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B5
HREFPDIF1_OPERATE B6
OR6
PHPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O
PHPTOV2_OPERATE B2
PHPTUV1_OPERATE B3
PHPTUV2_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B5
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B6
OR6
FRPFRQ1_OPERATE B1 O
FRPFRQ2_OPERATE B2
FRPFRQ3_OPERATE B3
CCBRBRF1_TRRET B4
T1PTTR1_OPERATE B5
B6
X130_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT
GUID-8F89045C-9F78-4696-AC8F-4B261C696B3E V1 EN
The START and the OPERATE outputs from the protection stages are routed to
trigger the disturbance recorder or, alternatively, only to be recorded by the
disturbance recorder depending on the parameter settings. Additionally, the
selected signals from different functions and the few binary inputs are also
connected to the disturbance recorder.
306 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
OR6
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B3
B4 RDRE1
B5
B6 PHLPTOC1_START C1 TRIGGERED DISTURB_RECORD_TRIGGERED
PHHPTOC1_START C2
PHIPTOC1_START C3
DPHLPDOC1_START C4
DPHHPDOC1_START C5
OR NSPTOC1_START C6
NSPTOC2_START C7
DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE B1 O EFLPTOC1_START C8
DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE B2 EFLPTOC2_START C9
EFHPTOC1_START C10
OR EFIPTOC1_START C11
DEFLPDEF1_START C12
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O DEFHPDEF1_START C13
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B2 T1PTTR1_START C14
PHPTOV1_START C15
OR6 PHPTOV2_START C16
PHPTUV1_START C17
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O PHPTUV2_START C18
EFLPTOC2_OPERATE B2 ROVPTOV1_START C19
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B3 ROVPTOV2_START C20
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE B4 FRPFRQ1_START C21
B5 FRPFRQ2_START C22
B6 FRPFRQ3_START C23
OR HREFPDIF1_START C24
CCBRBRF1_TRRET C25
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O CCBRBRF1_TRBU C26
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B2 C27
C28
OR C29
C30
PHPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O C31
PHPTOV2_OPERATE B2 T1PTTR1_OPERATE C32
INRPHAR1_BLK2H C33
C34
C35
C36
OR C37
SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_3PH C38
PHPTUV1_OPERATE B1 O SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_U C39
PHPTUV2_OPERATE B2 CCRDIF1_FAIL C40
X130_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING C41
X130_BI2_CB_CLOSED C42
X130_BI3_CB_OPENED C43
SECRSYN1_SYNC_INPRO C44
OR SECRSYN1_SYNC_OK C45
SECRSYN1_CL_FAIL_AL C46
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O SECRSYN1_CMD_FAIL_AL C47
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B2 C48
ARCSARC1_OPERATE C49
ARCSARC2_OPERATE C50
ARCSARC3_OPERATE C51
DARREC1_INPRO C52
OR6 DARREC1_CLOSE_CB C53
DARREC1_UNSUC_RECL C54
FRPFRQ1_OPERATE B1 O C55
FRPFRQ2_OPERATE B2 C56
FRPFRQ3_OPERATE B3 C57
B4 C58
B5 C59
B6 C60
C61
C62
C63
C64
OR6
ARCSARC1_ARC_FLT_DET B1 O
ARCSARC2_ARC_FLT_DET B2
ARCSARC3_ARC_FLT_DET B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-E051CE94-0FA6-4017-AD62-9DAD14D58501 V1 EN
CCRDIF1
BLOCK FAIL CCRDIF1_FAIL
ALARM CCRDIF1_ALARM
GUID-5544B5AF-888D-4318-AF12-B69C37BCF99A V1 EN
SEQRFUF1
BLOCK FUSEF_3PH SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_3PH
X130_BI2_CB_CLOSED CB_CLOSED FUSEF_U SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_U
DISCON_OPEN
X110_BI1_BUS_VT_MCB_OPEN MINCB_OPEN
GUID-58EAF3FE-89B5-4E66-8EBE-35EDD5887A78 V1 EN
REF615 307
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
The circuit breaker condition monitoring function SSCBR1 supervises the switch
status based on the connected binary input information and the measured current
levels. SSCBR1 introduces various supervision methods.
SSCBR1
BLOCK TRV_T_OP_ALM SSCBR1_TRV_T_OP_ALM
X130_BI3_CB_OPENED POSOPEN TRV_T_CL_ALM SSCBR1_TRV_T_CL_ALM
X130_BI2_CB_CLOSED POSCLOSE SPR_CHR_ALM SSCBR1_SPR_CHR_ALM
CB_OPEN_COMMAND OPEN_CB_EXE OPR_ALM SSCBR1_OPR_ALM
CB_CLOSE_COMMAND CLOSE_CB_EXE OPR_LO SSCBR1_OPR_LO
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM PRES_ALM_IN IPOW_ALM SSCBR1_IPOW_ALM
PRES_LO_IN IPOW_LO SSCBR1_IPOW_LO
CB_SPRING_DISCHARGED SPR_CHR_ST CB_LIFE_ALM SSCBR1_CB_LIFE_ALM
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED SPR_CHR MON_ALM SSCBR1_MON_ALM
RST_IPOW PRES_ALM SSCBR1_PRES_ALM
RST_CB_WEAR PRES_LO SSCBR1_PRES_LO
RST_TRV_T OPENPOS
RST_SPR_T INVALIDPOS
CLOSEPOS
GUID-80C77788-4448-4D27-A555-09847AE3A849 V1 EN
OR6
SSCBR1_TRV_T_OP_ALM B1 O
SSCBR1_TRV_T_CL_ALM B2
SSCBR1_SPR_CHR_ALM B3
SSCBR1_OPR_ALM B4
SSCBR1_OPR_LO B5 OR
SSCBR1_IPOW_ALM B6
B1 O SSCBR1_ALARMS
B2
OR6
SSCBR1_IPOW_LO B1 O
SSCBR1_CB_LIFE_ALM B2
SSCBR1_MON_ALM B3
SSCBR1_PRES_ALM B4
SSCBR1_PRES_LO B5
B6
GUID-8A486EE3-4B7E-4215-9A28-00988D28ACF1 V1 EN
NOT
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED IN OUT CB_SPRING_DISCHARGED
GUID-E80805A2-511D-4DAC-AB63-77FD598E7AD7 V1 EN
Two separate trip circuit supervision functions are included: TCSSCBR1 for power
output X100:PO3 and TCSSCBR2 for power output X100:PO4. Both functions are
blocked by the Master Trip TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2 and the circuit breaker
open signal.
308 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
TCSSCBR1
TCSSCBR_BLOCKING BLOCK ALARM TCSSCBR1_ALARM
TCSSCBR2
TCSSCBR_BLOCKING BLOCK ALARM TCSSCBR2_ALARM
OR
TCSSCBR1_ALARM B1 O TCSSCBR_ALARM
TCSSCBR2_ALARM B2
GUID-24DC11D9-925E-4A66-B557-E98F24BBE186 V1 EN
OR6
TRPPTRC1_TRIP B1 O TCSSCBR_BLOCKING
TRPPTRC2_TRIP B2
X130_BI3_CB_OPENED B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-6CBCCEE3-8358-4C86-A07B-3877DB98679B V1 EN
SECRSYN measures the bus and line voltages and compares them to set
conditions. When all the measured quantities are within set limits, the output
SYNC_OK is activated for allowing closing or closing the circuit breaker. The
SYNC_OK output signal of SECRSYN is connected to ENA_CLOSE input of
CBXCBR through control logic. The function is blocked in case of line side or bus
side MCB is open.
REF615 309
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
SECRSYN1
BLOCK_SECRSYN1 BLOCK SYNC_INPRO SECRSYN1_SYNC_INPRO
CL_COMMAND SYNC_OK SECRSYN1_SYNC_OK
BYPASS CL_FAIL_AL SECRSYN1_CL_FAIL_AL
CMD_FAIL_AL SECRSYN1_CMD_FAIL_AL
LLDB
LLLB
DLLB
DLDB
OR
X110_BI2_LINE_VT_MCB_OPEN B1 O BLOCK_SECRSYN1
X110_BI1_BUS_VT_MCB_OPEN B2
GUID-AC5A98E3-6E38-4375-A1F0-D1BAAB2EF652 V1 EN
Two types of disconnector and earthing switch function blocks are available.
DCSXSWI1...3 and ESSXSWI1...2 are status only type, and DCXSWI1...2 and
ESXSWI1 are controllable type. By default, the status only blocks are connected in
standard configuration. The disconnector (CB truck) and line side earthing switch
status information is connected to DCSXSWI1 and ESSXSI1.
DCSXSWI1
X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_TEST POSOPEN OPENPOS
X110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_SERVICE POSCLOSE CLOSEPOS
OKPOS DCSXSWI1_OKPOS
GUID-64E418EC-C238-4803-ABDE-873BECA27B1B V1 EN
ESSXSWI1
X110_BI8_ES1_OPENED POSOPEN OPENPOS ESSXSWI1_OPENPOS
X110_BI7_ES1_CLOSED POSCLOSE CLOSEPOS
OKPOS
GUID-E115D13F-E322-49D5-BF4D-C4ADE480305D V1 EN
The circuit breaker closing is enabled when the ENA_CLOSE input is activated.
The input can be activated by the configuration logic, which is a combination of
the disconnector or breaker truck and earth-switch position status, status of the trip
logics, gas pressure alarm, circuit-breaker spring charging and synchronizing ok
status.
The OKPOS output from DCSXSWI defines if the disconnector or breaker truck is
definitely either open (in test position) or close (in service position). This output,
together with the open earth-switch and non-active trip signals, activates the close-
enable signal to the circuit breaker control function block. The open operation for
circuit breaker is always enabled.
The ITL_BYPASS input can be used, for example, to always enable the closing of
the circuit breaker when the circuit breaker truck is in the test position.
ITL_BYPASS overrides, for example, active interlocking conditions when the
circuit breaker truck is closed in service position.
310 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
CBXCBR1
X130_BI3_CB_OPENED POSOPEN SELECTED CBXCBR1_SELECTED
X130_BI2_CB_CLOSED POSCLOSE EXE_OP CBXCBR1_EXE_OP
TRUE ENA_OPEN EXE_CL CBXCBR1_EXE_CL
CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSE ENA_CLOSE OPENPOS
FALSE BLK_OPEN CLOSEPOS
CBXCBR1_BLK_CLOSE BLK_CLOSE OKPOS
CBXBCR1_AU_OPEN AU_OPEN OPEN_ENAD
CBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE AU_CLOSE CLOSE_ENAD
ITL_BYPASS
GUID-38527A0A-7F5E-4C8B-8155-2544FA45C4ED V1 EN
OR
CBXCBR1_EXE_CL B1 O CB_CLOSE_COMMAND
DARREC1_CLOSE_CB B2
GUID-84F9FA17-9CAC-4B05-9BBB-041DCB249220 V1 EN
Figure 479: Circuit breaker control logic: Signals for closing coil of circuit
breaker 1
OR6
CBXCBR1_EXE_OP B1 O CB_OPEN_COMMAND
TRPPTRC1_TRIP B2
DARREC1_OPEN_CB B3
EFLPTOC2_OPERATE B4
B5
B6
GUID-C5BCF098-8F91-4484-B7C4-C737DF86A0B3 V1 EN
Figure 480: Circuit breaker control logic: Signals for opening coil of circuit
breaker 1
REF615 311
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
AND6
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED B1 O CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSE
SECRSYN1_SYNC_OK B2
B3
NOT B4
B5
TRPPTRC1_TRIP IN OUT B6
NOT
TRPPTRC2_TRIP IN OUT
NOT
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM IN OUT
AND
DCSXSWI1_OKPOS B1 O
ESSXSWI1_OPENPOS B2
GUID-6EE55602-0579-4751-A44B-FC1A13105BB7 V1 EN
OR6
T1PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE B1 O CBXCBR1_BLK_CLOSE
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-4D4C77CA-EB68-43E8-A9EB-D1CF7DB35836 V1 EN
The configuration includes logic for generating circuit breaker external closing and
opening command with IED in local or remote mode.
Check the logic for the external circuit breaker closing command
and modify it according to the application.
AND
CONTROL_LOCAL B1 O
FALSE B2
OR
B1 O CBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE
B2
AND
CONTROL_REMOTE B1 O
FALSE B2
GUID-4E30020D-F965-4959-9286-5AD3DDDDC462 V1 EN
312 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
AND
CONTROL_LOCAL B1 O
FALSE B2
OR
B1 O CBXBCR1_AU_OPEN
B2
AND
CONTROL_REMOTE B1 O
FALSE B2
GUID-3D63AADE-4D5E-47D2-B05F-54245A9157E8 V1 EN
The phase current inputs to the IED are measured by the three-phase current
measurement function CMMXU1. The current input is connected to the X120 card
in the back panel. The sequence current measurement CSMSQI1 measures the
sequence current and the residual current measurement RESCMMXU1 measures
the residual current.
The current input to high impedance restricted earth fault protection function is
measured by RESCMMXU2.
The three-phase bus side phase voltage and single phase line side phase voltage
inputs to the IED are measured by voltage measurement function VMMXU1 and
VMMXU2. The voltage input is connected to the X130 card in the back panel. The
sequence voltage measurement VSMSQI1 measures the sequence voltage and the
residual voltage measurement RESVMMXU1 measures the residual voltage.
The measurements can be seen from the LHMI and they are available under the
measurement option in the menu selection. Based on the settings, function blocks
can generate low alarm or warning and high alarm or warning signals for the
measured current values.
The frequency measurement FMMXU1 of the power system and the three-phase
power measurement PEMMXU1 are available. The load profile function
LDPMSTA1 is included in the measurements sheet. LDPMSTA1 offers the ability
to observe the loading history of the corresponding feeder.
The power quality functions CMHAI1 and VMHAI1 can be used to measure the
harmonic contents of the phase current and phase voltages. The voltage variation,
that is, sage and swells can be measured by power quality function PHQVVR1. By
default these power quality functions are not included in the configuration. The
required logic connections can be made depending on the application using
PCM600.
CMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
LOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM
GUID-E62D2A19-1203-43F8-BFD7-D422CCC20304 V1 EN
REF615 313
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
CSMSQI1
GUID-4D375BC8-564E-482C-B177-E3C4D5F9EBE6 V1 EN
RESCMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
GUID-424FF806-E6A8-4646-88E1-BBAFB01C82DF V1 EN
RESCMMXU2
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
GUID-379259F9-519B-46DC-92CB-CE3A85A46243 V1 EN
VMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
LOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM
GUID-7D60D10E-C412-4031-A343-6A4BCE7810F8 V1 EN
VSMSQI1
GUID-C3A052EA-E5B0-471F-94E1-C49CB0174319 V1 EN
RESVMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
GUID-DC329C78-B66C-4730-BAE8-22AE407C758F V1 EN
VMMXU2
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
LOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM
GUID-4E2D2CFC-5410-429F-990D-A2DA07506D00 V1 EN
FMMXU1
GUID-ED9BF264-F1EA-4A40-B9BA-CE67B5B4C46D V1 EN
314 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
PEMMXU1
RSTACM
GUID-D9E08F0F-DC98-462E-BBF8-B06BFA9EA144 V1 EN
Figure 494: Other measurement: Three phase power and energy measurement
FLTMSTA1
BLOCK
CB_CLRD
GUID-E8A8CC10-4013-4CDD-8526-7BB04BF5F04C V1 EN
LDPMSTA1
RSTMEM MEM_WARN
MEM_ALARM
GUID-A6EEC867-36F5-4D71-9024-7F71C97AA8B1 V1 EN
REF615 315
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 1 OR
B1 O X110_BI1_BUS_VT_MCB_OPEN
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 1
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 2 OR
B1 O X110_BI2_LINE_VT_MCB_OPEN
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 2
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 3 OR
B1 O X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 3
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 4 OR
B1 O X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 4
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 5 OR
B1 O X110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_SERVICE
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 5
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 6 OR
B1 O X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_TEST
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 6
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 7 OR
B1 O X110_BI7_ES1_CLOSED
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 7
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 8 OR
B1 O X110_BI8_ES1_OPENED
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 8
GUID-BF5177A7-61AF-4AB5-A41D-A114B728C0BE V1 EN
316 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
X130_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING
X130 (AIM).X130-Input 1
X130_BI2_CB_CLOSED
X130 (AIM).X130-Input 2
X130_BI3_CB_OPENED
X130 (AIM).X130-Input 3
X130_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT
X130 (AIM).X130-Input 4
GUID-83B68F9E-9C82-4634-AABB-FD6276D53FCC V1 EN
TRPPTRC3_TRIP
X110 (BIO-H).X110-HSO1
OC_OPERATE_PULSE
X110 (BIO).X110-SO2
TRPPTRC4_TRIP
X110 (BIO-H).X110-HSO2
EF_OPERATE_PULSE
X110 (BIO).X110-SO3
TRPPTRC5_TRIP
X110 (BIO-H).X110-HSO3
VOLTAGE_AND_FREQ_OPERATE_PULSE
X110 (BIO).X110-SO4
GUID-913C45BD-2D0C-4190-8840-B583CC22480C V1 EN
CB_CLOSE_COMMAND
X100 (PSM).X100-PO1
CCBRBRF1_TRBU
X100 (PSM).X100-PO2
GENERAL_START_PULSE
X100 (PSM).X100-SO1
GENERAL_OPERATE_PULSE
X100 (PSM).X100-SO2
CB_OPEN_COMMAND
X100 (PSM).X100-PO3
OR
TRPPTRC2_TRIP B1 O
EFLPTOC2_OPERATE B2
X100 (PSM).X100-PO4
GUID-B5EEF0BF-79E0-48FD-8992-7C0995E921BF V1 EN
REF615 317
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
LED1
OR
OK
PHxPTOC_OPERATE B1 O ALARM
DPHxPDOC_OPERATE B2 RESET
LED2
OR6
OK
EFxPTOC_OPERATE B1 O ALARM
ROVPTOV_OPERATE B2 RESET
DEFxPDEF_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
LED3
OR6
OK
NSPTOC_OPERATE B1 O ALARM
T1PTTR1_OPERATE B2 RESET
PHPTOV_OPERATE B3
PHPTUV_OPERATE B4
B5
B6
LED4
AND
OK
X130_BI3_CB_OPENED B1 O ALARM
SECRSYN1_SYNC_OK B2 RESET
LED5
OK
FREQUENCY_OPERATE ALARM
RESET
GUID-656238B5-B8BC-4D19-943B-661853C3E8FC V1 EN
318 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
LED6
OK
CCBRBRF1_TRBU ALARM
RESET
LED7
OK
DISTURB_RECORD_TRIGGERED ALARM
RESET
LED8
OK
HREFPDIF1_OPERATE ALARM
RESET
LED9
OR6
OK
TCSSCBR_ALARM B1 O ALARM
SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_3PH B2 RESET
SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_U B3
CCRDIF1_ALARM B4
SSCBR1_ALARMS B5
B6
LED10
OK
ARCSARC_OPERATE ALARM
RESET
LED11
OK
DARREC1_INPRO ALARM
RESET
GUID-C2E52A06-56A7-4873-AFE7-FDFD36BCC39D V1 EN
REF615 319
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
OR
DPHxPDOC_OPERATE B1 O
PHxPTOC_OPERATE B2
TPGAPC2
IN1 OUT1 OC_OPERATE_PULSE
IN2 OUT2 EF_OPERATE_PULSE
OR6
DEFxPDEF_OPERATE B1 O
EFxPTOC_OPERATE B2
HREFPDIF1_OPERATE B3
ROVPTOV_OPERATE B4
B5
B6
GUID-98FEF423-1220-41F3-A88B-6B44E8A1CDF5 V1 EN
Figure 502: Timer logic for overcurrent and earth-fault operate pulse
OR6 TPGAPC3
PHPTOV_OPERATE B1 O IN1 OUT1 VOLTAGE_AND_FREQ_OPERATE_PULSE
PHPTUV_OPERATE B2 IN2 OUT2
FREQUENCY_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-59484B34-0407-4D36-B78B-DBE34269795B V1 EN
Figure 503: Timer logic for voltage and frequency operate pulse
3.13.1 Applications
The standard configuration for directional overcurrent and directional earth-fault
protection with phase voltage-based measurements, undervoltage and overvoltage
protection, frequency protection and measurement functions is mainly intended for
cable and overhead-line feeder applications in isolated or resonant-earthed
distribution networks. The configuration also includes additional options for
selecting earth-fault protection based on admittance, wattmetric or harmonic-based
principles.
The IED with a standard configuration is delivered from the factory with default
settings and parameters. The end user flexibility for incoming, outgoing and
internal signal designation within the IED enables this configuration to be further
adapted to different primary circuit layouts and the related functionality needs by
modifying the internal functionality using PCM600.
320 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
3.13.2 Functions
Lockout relay A
O
- IED self-supervision
R
L
94/86
U12 0. 0 kV
P 0.00 kW
Q 0.00 kVAr
IL2 0 A
- Local/Remote push button on LHMI
- User management
I ESC Clear
- Web HMI
2×
AND
I2> I2/I1> 3Ith>F 3I>>> O R
OR 46 46PD 49F 50P/51P
L
OR
3I
3× 3×
ARC 3I>/Io>BF
50L/50NL CONDITION MONITORING COMMUNICATION
51BF/51NBF
AND SUPERVISION
Protocols:
0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 2× IEC 61850-8-1 1 0
61850-8-1/-9-2LE 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0
1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 3I>→ 3I>>→ 3I2f> 3I FUSEF CBCM MCS 3I Modbus®® 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0
0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
67-1 67-2 68 60 CBCM MCS 3I IEC 60870-5-103 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 DNP3 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0
0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 UL1UL2UL3 Interfaces: 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 Io Io 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
C) Ethernet: TX (RJ45), FX (LC)
(ST), Serial: Serial glass fiber (ST),
2×
2/485 RS-485, RS-232/485
Io>> OPTS TCS
D-sub 9, IRIG-B
51N-2 OPTM TCM
Redundant protocols:
HSR
PRP
Io RSTP
Io
2×
Io>→ Io>>→ Io>IEF→
CONTROL AND INDICATION 1) MEASUREMENT
67N-1 67N-2 67NIEF
- I, U, Io, P, Q, E, pf, f
Object Ctrl 2)
Ind 3)
3× 3× - Limit value supervision
Yo>→ Po>→ Io>HA CB 1 - - Load profile record
21YN 32N 51NHA - Symmetrical components
DC 2 3
OR OR
ES 1 2
1)
Check availability of binary inputs/outputs Analog interface types 1)
input
3× 4×
Uo> f>/f<, O→I PQM3I PQM3U PQMU
df/dt
59G 79 PQM3I PQM3V PQMV
81
REMARKS
18× Optional 3× No. of Calculated OR Alternative
FLOC MAP function instances value function to be
21FL MAP Io/Uo defined when
ordering
GUID-A240AB33-E70D-4471-A934-D2603FE3E6FE V1 EN
Connector pins for each input and output are presented in the IED physical
connections section.
REF615 321
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
322 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
REF615 323
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
324 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
This chapter gives short examples on how to define the correct parameters for
sensors. See the technical manual for detailed information about sensor settings.
REF615 325
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
In
× Kr
I pr
RSV =
fn
GUID-6A480073-5C35-4319-8B38-402608D4C098 V2 EN
150 A
× 150mV
80 A mV
= 5.625
50Hz Hz
GUID-13DE42A0-29C0-4FE0-B00B-1215B37E3B7B V2 EN
With this information, the IED Rogowski sensor settings can be set.
326 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
sensor all parameters are readable directly from its rating plate and conversions are
not needed.
In this example the system phase-to-phase voltage rating is 10 kV. Thus, the
Primary voltage parameter is set to 10 kV. For IEDs with sensor measurement
support the Voltage input type is always set to “CVD sensor” and it cannot be
changed. The same applies for the VT connection parameter which is always set to
“WYE” type. The division ratio for ABB voltage sensors is most often 10000:1.
Thus, the Division ratio parameter is usually set to “10000”. The primary voltage is
proportionally divided by this division ratio.
The analog channels have fixed connections to the different function blocks inside
the IED’s standard configuration. However, the 12 analog channels available for
the disturbance recorder function are freely selectable as a part of the disturbance
recorder’s parameter settings.
The phase currents to the IED are fed from Rogowski or Combi sensors. The
residual current to the IED is fed from either residually connected CTs, an external
core balance CT, neutral CT or internally calculated.
The phase voltages to the IED are fed from Combi sensors. The residual voltage is
internally calculated.
The IED offers six different settings groups which can be set based on individual
needs. Each group can be activated or deactivated using the setting group settings
available in the IED.
REF615 327
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
The functional diagrams describe the IEDs protection functionality in detail and
according to the factory set default connections.
Four overcurrent stages are offered for overcurrent and short-circuit protection.
Three of them include directional functionality DPHxPDOC.
PHIPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START PHIPTOC1_START
GUID-BD8968B4-3161-4D6F-9B9D-FD51C828C872 V1 EN
DPHHPDOC1
BLOCK OPERATE DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START DPHHPDOC1_START
NON_DIR
DPHLPDOC1
BLOCK OPERATE DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START DPHLPDOC1_START
NON_DIR
DPHLPDOC2
BLOCK OPERATE DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START DPHLPDOC2_START
NON_DIR
OR6
DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE B1 O DPHxPDOC_OPERATE
DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE B2
DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-2AC404B1-6335-45C6-B65A-549C6348C40E V1 EN
The upstream blocking from the start of the overcurrent second low stage
DPHLPDOC2 is connected to the binary output. This signal is not connected in the
configuration. This output can be used for sending a blocking signal to the relevant
overcurrent protection stage of the IED at the infeeding bay.
328 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
OR6
DPHLPDOC2_START B1 O
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-7AEA0818-3740-426B-89CB-128FC04D5E3D V1 EN
The inrush detection block's (INRPHAR1) output BLK2H enables either blocking
the function or multiplying the active settings for any of the available overcurrent
or earth-fault function blocks.
INRPHAR1
BLOCK BLK2H INRPHAR1_BLK2H
GUID-8A44950A-08F8-487A-8285-291BBBFC04C7 V1 EN
Two negative sequence overcurrent stages NSPTOC1 and NSPTOC2 are provided
for phase unbalance protection. These functions are used to protect the feeder
against phase unbalance.
NSPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE NSPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START NSPTOC1_START
NSPTOC2
BLOCK OPERATE NSPTOC2_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START NSPTOC2_START
GUID-9F91B557-1412-4CB4-897C-9D4BEBCC31F4 V1 EN
Three stages are provided for directional earth-fault protection. According to the
IED's order code, the directional earth-fault protection method can be based on
conventional directional earth-fault DEFxPDEF only or alternatively together with
admittance criteria EFPADM or wattmetric earth-fault protection WPWDE or
harmonic based earth-fault protection HAEFPTOC. A dedicated protection stage
INTRPTEF is used either for transient-based earth-fault protection or for cable
intermittent earth-fault protection in compensated networks.
REF615 329
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
DEFLPDEF1
BLOCK OPERATE DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START DEFLPDEF1_START
RCA_CTL
DEFLPDEF2
BLOCK OPERATE DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START DEFLPDEF2_START
RCA_CTL
DEFHPDEF1
BLOCK OPERATE DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START DEFHPDEF1_START
RCA_CTL
OR6
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O DEFxPDEF_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B2
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-5DBE7FA7-715A-4972-99C1-D5D5B0E7DEF4 V1 EN
INTRPTEF1
BLOCK OPERATE INTRPTEF1_OPERATE
START INTRPTEF1_START
BLK_EF
GUID-C7EF270A-B48D-4BC2-A108-0E1F0A22A24F V1 EN
330 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
WPWDE1
BLOCK OPERATE WPWDE1_OPERATE
RCA_CTL START WPWDE1_START
WPWDE2
BLOCK OPERATE WPWDE2_OPERATE
RCA_CTL START WPWDE2_START
WPWDE3
BLOCK OPERATE WPWDE3_OPERATE
RCA_CTL START WPWDE3_START
OR6
WPWDE1_OPERATE B1 O WPWDE_OPERATE
WPWDE2_OPERATE B2
WPWDE3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-2415F7DF-2F35-4B56-B26E-A99FD8140D7B V1 EN
EFPADM1
BLOCK OPERATE EFPADM1_OPERATE
RELEASE START EFPADM1_START
EFPADM2
BLOCK OPERATE EFPADM2_OPERATE
RELEASE START EFPADM2_START
EFPADM3
BLOCK OPERATE EFPADM3_OPERATE
RELEASE START EFPADM3_START
OR6
EFPADM1_OPERATE B1 O EFPADM_OPERATE
EFPADM2_OPERATE B2
EFPADM3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-DB548625-AE6E-4629-80D7-65C17D2726B1 V1 EN
REF615 331
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
EFHPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE EFHPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START EFHPTOC1_START
GUID-5F955CEE-D4DA-4562-9D85-A3924AE2E777 V1 EN
PDNSPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE
START PDNSPTOC1_START
GUID-4030CC9B-C67C-4C3F-9735-046BCA54C9A2 V1 EN
The thermal overload protection T1PTTR1 detects overloads under varying load
conditions. The BLK_CLOSE output of the function is used to block the closing
operation of circuit breaker.
T1PTTR1
BLK_OPR OPERATE T1PTTR1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START T1PTTR1_START
TEMP_AMB ALARM T1PTTR1_ALARM
BLK_CLOSE T1PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE
GUID-D24BA182-57B6-45D4-9D7D-DE6431A2D40D V1 EN
The breaker failure protection CCBRBRF1 is initiated via the START input by a
number of different protection functions available in the IED. The breaker failure
protection function offers different operating modes associated with the circuit
breaker position and the measured phase and residual currents.
The breaker failure protection function has two operating outputs: TRRET and
TRBU. The TRRET operate output is used for retripping its own breaker through
TRPPTRC2_TRIP. The same TRRET output is also connected to the binary output
X100:PO4.
CCBRBRF1
OR6 OR6
BLOCK CB_FAULT_AL
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O START TRBU CCBRBRF1_TRBU
DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE B2 B2 POSCLOSE TRRET CCBRBRF1_TRRET
DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE B3 B3 CB_FAULT
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B4 B4
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B5 B5
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B6 B6
OR6
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B2
WPWDE2_OPERATE B3
WPWDE3_OPERATE B4
EFPADM2_OPERATE B5
EFPADM3_OPERATE B6
X110_BI4_CB_CLOSED
GUID-E6CCE23A-E287-45F4-86DF-14AF5240AE95 V1 EN
332 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
The operate signals from ARCSARC1...3 are connected to both trip logic
TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2. If the IED has been ordered with high speed binary
outputs, the individual operate signals from ARCSARC1...3 are connected to
dedicated trip logic TRPPTRC3...5. The output of TRPPTRC3...5 is available at
high speed outputs X110:HSO1, X110:HSO2 and X110:HSO3.
REF615 333
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
ARCSARC1
BLOCK OPERATE ARCSARC1_OPERATE
REM_FLT_ARC ARC_FLT_DET ARCSARC1_ARC_FLT_DET
OPR_MODE
ARCSARC2
BLOCK OPERATE ARCSARC2_OPERATE
REM_FLT_ARC ARC_FLT_DET ARCSARC2_ARC_FLT_DET
OPR_MODE
ARCSARC3
BLOCK OPERATE ARCSARC3_OPERATE
REM_FLT_ARC ARC_FLT_DET ARCSARC3_ARC_FLT_DET
OPR_MODE
OR6
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B1 O ARCSARC_OPERATE
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-B9E0D769-8CF3-4292-AE05-BED577FCEAAA V1 EN
TRPPTRC3
BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC3_TRIP
ARCSARC1_OPERATE OPERATE CL_LKOUT
RST_LKOUT
TRPPTRC4
BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC4_TRIP
ARCSARC2_OPERATE OPERATE CL_LKOUT
RST_LKOUT
TRPPTRC5
BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC5_TRIP
ARCSARC3_OPERATE OPERATE CL_LKOUT
RST_LKOUT
GUID-2C084651-18B3-4B64-A2A8-FA002A7A2789 V1 EN
334 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
control command to the circuit breaker, either local or remote, also blocks the
autorecloser function via the CBXCBR1-SELECTED signal.
The circuit breaker availability for the autorecloser sequence is expressed with the
CB_READY input in DARREC1. The signal, and other required signals, are
connected to the CB spring charged binary inputs in this configuration. The open
command from the autorecloser is connected directly to binary output X100:PO3,
whereas the close command is connected directly to the binary output X100:PO2.
DARREC1
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE INIT_1 OPEN_CB DARREC1_OPEN_CB
OR6 DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE INIT_2 CLOSE_CB DARREC1_CLOSE_CB
DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE INIT_3 CMD_WAIT
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B1 O INIT_4 INPRO DARREC1_INPRO
EFPADM2_OPERATE B2 INIT_5 LOCKED
WPWDE2_OPERATE B3 INIT_6 PROT_CRD
B4 DEL_INIT_2 UNSUC_RECL DARREC1_UNSUC_RECL
B5 DEL_INIT_3 AR_ON
B6 DEL_INIT_4 READY
BLK_RECL_T ACTIVE
BLK_RCLM_T
BLK_THERM
X110_BI3_CB_OPENED CB_POS
CBXCBR1_CLOSE_ENAD CB_READY
OR6 INC_SHOTP
INHIBIT_RECL
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O RECL_ON
EFPADM3_OPERATE B2 SYNC
WPWDE3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
OR6
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B2
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B3
CBXCBR1_SELECTED B4
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE B5
ARCSARCx_OPERATE B6
GUID-D0E92975-43CA-4C06-ADD5-171BC5C5EC2B V1 EN
REF615 335
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
PHPTOV1
BLOCK OPERATE PHPTOV1_OPERATE
START PHPTOV1_START
PHPTOV2
BLOCK OPERATE PHPTOV2_OPERATE
START PHPTOV2_START
PHPTOV3
BLOCK OPERATE PHPTOV3_OPERATE
START PHPTOV3_START
OR6
PHPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O PHPTOV_OPERATE
PHPTOV2_OPERATE B2
PHPTOV3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-132F1D97-2E54-4924-B2BD-AA4FF9188285 V1 EN
PHPTUV1
SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_U BLOCK OPERATE PHPTUV1_OPERATE
START PHPTUV1_START
PHPTUV2
SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_U BLOCK OPERATE PHPTUV2_OPERATE
START PHPTUV2_START
PHPTUV3
SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_U BLOCK OPERATE PHPTUV3_OPERATE
START PHPTUV3_START
OR6
PHPTUV1_OPERATE B1 O PHPTUV_OPERATE
PHPTUV2_OPERATE B2
PHPTUV3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-495CB32C-5BEB-47DB-ADB3-5FE266D3482D V1 EN
336 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
ROVPTOV1
BLOCK OPERATE ROVPTOV1_OPERATE
START ROVPTOV1_START
ROVPTOV2
BLOCK OPERATE ROVPTOV2_OPERATE
START ROVPTOV2_START
ROVPTOV3
BLOCK OPERATE ROVPTOV3_OPERATE
START ROVPTOV3_START
OR6
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O ROVPTOV_OPERATE
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B2
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-2155DB79-DEBD-4DD9-9384-FD5352967608 V1 EN
NSPTOV1
SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_U BLOCK OPERATE NSPTOV1_OPERATE
START NSPTOV1_START
GUID-911F6005-2A2B-4012-85F8-BC6D88B453B6 V1 EN
PSPTUV1
SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_U BLOCK OPERATE PSPTUV1_OPERATE
START PSPTUV1_START
GUID-A60BCAA1-D381-4F34-9C15-56DD20DA737E V1 EN
REF615 337
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
FRPFRQ1
BLOCK OPERATE FRPFRQ1_OPERATE
OPR_OFRQ
OPR_UFRQ
OPR_FRG
START FRPFRQ1_START
ST_OFRQ
ST_UFRQ
ST_FRG
FRPFRQ2
BLOCK OPERATE FRPFRQ2_OPERATE
OPR_OFRQ
OPR_UFRQ
OPR_FRG
START FRPFRQ2_START
ST_OFRQ
ST_UFRQ
ST_FRG
FRPFRQ3
BLOCK OPERATE FRPFRQ3_OPERATE
OPR_OFRQ
OPR_UFRQ
OPR_FRG
START FRPFRQ3_START
ST_OFRQ
ST_UFRQ
ST_FRG
OR6
FRPFRQ1_OPERATE B1 O FREQUENCY_OPERATE
FRPFRQ2_OPERATE B2
FRPFRQ3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-F8133DC0-F5B6-4B19-993B-A88C87927D48 V1 EN
General start and operate signals from all functions are connected to pulse timer
TPGAPC for setting the minimum pulse length for the outputs. The output from
TPGAPC can be connected to binary outputs. However, these are not connected in
the configuration.
338 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
OR6 OR6
DPHLPDOC1_START B1 O B1 O
DPHLPDOC2_START B2 B2
DPHHPDOC1_START B3 B3
PHIPTOC1_START B4 B4
NSPTOC1_START B5 B5
NSPTOC2_START B6 B6
TPGAPC1
IN1 OUT1
IN2 OUT2
OR6 OR6 OR6
DEFLPDEF1_START B1 O DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O
DEFLPDEF2_START B2 DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE B2 B2
DEFHPDEF1_START B3 DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE B3 B3
INTRPTEF1_START B4 NSPTOC1_OPERATE B4 B4
EFHPTOC1_START B5 NSPTOC2_OPERATE B5 B5
PDNSPTOC1_START B6 PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B6 B6
OR6 OR6
PHPTOV1_START B1 O DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O
PHPTOV2_START B2 DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B2
PHPTOV3_START B3 DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B3
PSPTUV1_START B4 INTRPTEF1_OPERATE B4
NSPTOV1_START B5 EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B5
PHPTUV1_START B6 PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B6
OR6 OR6
PHPTUV2_START B1 O EFPADM1_OPERATE B1 O
PHPTUV3_START B2 EFPADM2_OPERATE B2
ROVPTOV1_START B3 EFPADM3_OPERATE B3
ROVPTOV2_START B4 ARCSARC1_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV3_START B5 ARCSARC2_OPERATE B5
B6 ARCSARC3_OPERATE B6
OR6 OR6
EFPADM1_START B1 O PHPTUV1_OPERATE B1 O
EFPADM2_START B2 PHPTUV2_OPERATE B2
EFPADM3_START B3 PHPTUV3_OPERATE B3
WPWDE1_START B4 NSPTOV1_OPERATE B4
WPWDE2_START B5 PSPTUV1_OPERATE B5
WPWDE3_START B6 PHPTOV1_OPERATE B6
OR6 OR6
FRPFRQ1_START B1 O PHPTOV2_OPERATE B1 O
FRPFRQ2_START B2 PHPTOV3_OPERATE B2
FRPFRQ3_START B3 ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B3
B4 ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B4
B5 ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B5
B6 B6
OR6
WPWDE1_OPERATE B1 O
WPWDE2_OPERATE B2
WPWDE3_OPERATE B3
FRPFRQ1_OPERATE B4
FRPFRQ2_OPERATE B5
FRPFRQ3_OPERATE B6
GUID-97753A90-F609-4FF1-BE07-E1E93BFC70E6 V1 EN
The operate signals from the protection functions are connected to the two trip
logics TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2. The output from TRPPTRC1 trip logic
functions is available at binary output X100:PO3. The trip logic functions are
provided with a lockout and latching function, event generation and the trip signal
duration setting. If the lockout operation mode is required, the binary input has
been assigned to RST_LKOUT input of both the trip logic to enable external reset
with a push button.
Three other trip logics TRPPTRC3..4 are also available if the IED is ordered with
high speed binary outputs options.
REF615 339
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
TRPPTRC1
OR6 OR6
BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC1_TRIP
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O OPERATE CL_LKOUT
DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE B2 B2 RST_LKOUT
DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE B3 B3
DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE B4 B4
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B5 B5
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B6 B6
OR6
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B2
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B3
EFPADM1_OPERATE B4
EFPADM2_OPERATE B5
EFPADM3_OPERATE B6
OR6
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE B1 O
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B3
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B5
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B6
OR6
WPWDE1_OPERATE B1 O
WPWDE2_OPERATE B2
WPWDE3_OPERATE B3
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B4
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B5
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B6
OR6
PHPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O
PHPTOV2_OPERATE B2
PHPTOV3_OPERATE B3
PSPTUV1_OPERATE B4
NSPTOV1_OPERATE B5
PHPTUV1_OPERATE B6
OR6
PHPTUV2_OPERATE B1 O
PHPTUV3_OPERATE B2
FRPFRQ1_OPERATE B3
FRPFRQ2_OPERATE B4
FRPFRQ3_OPERATE B5
B6
GUID-67E2C6C0-D9A7-438A-824C-80B14965AE5E V1 EN
340 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
TRPPTRC2
OR6 OR6
BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC2_TRIP
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O OPERATE CL_LKOUT
DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE B2 B2 RST_LKOUT
DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE B3 B3
DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE B4 B4
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B5 B5
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B6 B6
OR6
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B2
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B3
EFPADM1_OPERATE B4
EFPADM2_OPERATE B5
EFPADM3_OPERATE B6
OR6
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE B1 O
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B3
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B5
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B6
OR6
NSPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O
CCBRBRF1_TRRET B2
WPWDE1_OPERATE B3
WPWDE2_OPERATE B4
WPWDE3_OPERATE B5
PSPTUV1_OPERATE B6
OR6
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B1 O
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
PHPTUV1_OPERATE B4
PHPTUV2_OPERATE B5
PHPTUV3_OPERATE B6
OR6
PHPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O
PHPTOV2_OPERATE B2
PHPTOV3_OPERATE B3
FRPFRQ1_OPERATE B4
FRPFRQ2_OPERATE B5
FRPFRQ3_OPERATE B6
GUID-C7506F05-1EE1-466B-B904-923D2568A6EC V1 EN
The START and OPERATE outputs from the protection stages are routed to trigger
the disturbance recorder or, alternatively, only to be recorded by the disturbance
recorder depending on the parameter settings. Additionally, the selected signals
from different functions and few binary inputs are also connected to the
disturbance recorder.
REF615 341
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
OR6
DEFLPDEF1_START B1 O
EFPADM1_START B2
WPWDE1_START B3
B4
B5
B6 RDRE1
DPHLPDOC1_START C1 TRIGGERED
OR6 DPHLPDOC2_START C2
DPHHPDOC1_START C3
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O OR6 PHIPTOC1_START C4
DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE B2 NSPTOC1_START C5
DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE B3 DEFLPDEF2_START B1 O NSPTOC2_START C6
DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE B4 EFPADM2_START B2 C7
B5 WPWDE2_START B3 C8
B6 B4 C9
B5 INTRPTEF1_START C10
B6 EFHPTOC1_START C11
PDNSPTOC1_START C12
T1PTTR1_START C13
OR PHPTOV1_START C14
OR6 PHPTOV2_START C15
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O PHPTOV3_START C16
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B2 DEFHPDEF1_START B1 O PSPTUV1_START C17
EFPADM3_START B2 NSPTOV1_START C18
WPWDE3_START B3 PHPTUV1_START C19
B4 PHPTUV2_START C20
B5 PHPTUV3_START C21
OR6 B6 ROVPTOV1_START C22
ROVPTOV2_START C23
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O ROVPTOV3_START C24
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B2 CCBRBRF1_TRRET C25
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B3 CCBRBRF1_TRBU C26
EFPADM1_OPERATE B4 C27
EFPADM2_OPERATE B5 C28
EFPADM3_OPERATE B6 C29
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE C30
OR6 EFHPTOC1_OPERATE C31
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE C32
OR PHPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O INRPHAR1_BLK2H C33
OR6 PHPTOV2_OPERATE B2 T1PTTR1_OPERATE C34
B1 O PHPTOV3_OPERATE B3 C35
B1 O B2 B4 C36
WPWDE1_OPERATE B2 B5 C37
WPWDE2_OPERATE B3 B6 SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_3PH C38
WPWDE3_OPERATE B4 SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_U C39
B5 CCRDIF1_FAIL C40
B6 X110_BI4_CB_CLOSED C41
X110_BI3_CB_OPENED C42
OR6 C43
C44
PHPTUV1_OPERATE B1 O ARCSARC1_OPERATE C45
PHPTUV2_OPERATE B2 ARCSARC2_OPERATE C46
PHPTUV3_OPERATE B3 ARCSARC3_OPERATE C47
B4 DARREC1_INPRO C48
B5 FRPFRQ1_START C49
B6 FRPFRQ2_START C50
OR6 FRPFRQ3_START C51
C52
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O C53
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B2 C54
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B3 OR6 C55
PSPTUV1_OPERATE B4 C56
NSPTOV1_OPERATE B5 ARCSARC1_ARC_FLT_DET B1 O C57
B6 ARCSARC2_ARC_FLT_DET B2 C58
ARCSARC3_ARC_FLT_DET B3 C59
B4 C60
B5 C61
B6 C62
OR C63
C64
DARREC1_CLOSE_CB B1 O
DARREC1_UNSUC_RECL B2
OR6
FRPFRQ1_OPERATE B1 O
FRPFRQ2_OPERATE B2
FRPFRQ3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-61109734-AD19-4B16-A9AF-B54576A65C0C V1 EN
CCRDIF1 detects the failure in the current measuring circuits. When a failure is
detected, it can be used to block the current protection functions that measure the
calculated sequence component currents to avoid unnecessary operation. However,
it is not connected in the configuration.
CCRDIF1
BLOCK FAIL CCRDIF1_FAIL
ALARM CCRDIF1_ALARM
GUID-A83F6FE3-8FB5-4364-B2CF-C4660FCE0E45 V1 EN
342 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
SEQRFUF1
BLOCK FUSEF_3PH SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_3PH
X110_BI4_CB_CLOSED CB_CLOSED FUSEF_U SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_U
DISCON_OPEN
MINCB_OPEN
GUID-DDF6EFE9-7547-4CAD-8158-4A1A568C6B76 V1 EN
The circuit breaker condition monitoring function SSCBR1 supervises the switch
status based on the connected binary input information and the measured current
levels. SSCBR1 introduces various supervision methods.
SSCBR1
BLOCK TRV_T_OP_ALM SSCBR1_TRV_T_OP_ALM
X110_BI3_CB_OPENED POSOPEN TRV_T_CL_ALM SSCBR1_TRV_T_CL_ALM
X110_BI4_CB_CLOSED POSCLOSE SPR_CHR_ALM SSCBR1_SPR_CHR_ALM
CB_OPEN_COMMAND OPEN_CB_EXE OPR_ALM SSCBR1_OPR_ALM
CB_CLOSE_COMMAND CLOSE_CB_EXE OPR_LO SSCBR1_OPR_LO
PRES_ALM_IN IPOW_ALM SSCBR1_IPOW_ALM
PRES_LO_IN IPOW_LO SSCBR1_IPOW_LO
X110_BI2_CB_SPRING_DISCHARGED SPR_CHR_ST CB_LIFE_ALM SSCBR1_CB_LIFE_ALM
CB_SPRING_CHARGED SPR_CHR MON_ALM SSCBR1_MON_ALM
RST_IPOW PRES_ALM SSCBR1_PRES_ALM
RST_CB_WEAR PRES_LO SSCBR1_PRES_LO
RST_TRV_T OPENPOS
RST_SPR_T INVALIDPOS
CLOSEPOS
GUID-E3A89E30-4683-4F71-9306-6549552846DE V1 EN
OR6
SSCBR1_TRV_T_OP_ALM B1 O
SSCBR1_TRV_T_CL_ALM B2
SSCBR1_SPR_CHR_ALM B3
SSCBR1_OPR_ALM B4
SSCBR1_OPR_LO B5 OR
SSCBR1_IPOW_ALM B6
B1 O SSCBR1_ALARMS
B2
OR6
SSCBR1_IPOW_LO B1 O
SSCBR1_CB_LIFE_ALM B2
SSCBR1_MON_ALM B3
SSCBR1_PRES_ALM B4
SSCBR1_PRES_LO B5
B6
GUID-8DDFC2EE-F3B0-4CB9-9230-FC0D1493C37F V1 EN
NOT
X110_BI2_CB_SPRING_DISCHARGED IN OUT CB_SPRING_CHARGED
GUID-90C81E51-8D41-46C0-A945-49469661F78F V1 EN
Two separate trip circuit supervision functions are included: TCSSCBR1 for power
output X100:PO3 and TCSSCBR2 for power output X100:PO4. The functions are
blocked by the Master Trip, TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2, and the binary input
X110:BI1 indicating IED plug out.
REF615 343
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
TCSSCBR1
TCSSCBR_BLOCKING BLOCK ALARM TCSSCBR1_ALARM
TCSSCBR2
TCSSCBR_BLOCKING BLOCK ALARM TCSSCBR2_ALARM
OR
TCSSCBR1_ALARM B1 O TCSSCBR_ALARM
TCSSCBR2_ALARM B2
GUID-5248E2A0-0212-41A0-9124-40151EA71FA9 V1 EN
OR6
TRPPTRC1_TRIP B1 O TCSSCBR_BLOCKING
TRPPTRC2_TRIP B2
X110_BI3_CB_OPENED B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-1C0AD672-5573-4348-AADA-DB5EA1326A76 V1 EN
Two types of disconnector and earthing switch function blocks are available.
DCSXSWI1...3 and ESSXSWI1...2 are status only type, and DCXSWI1...2 and
ESXSWI1 are controllable type. By default, the status only blocks are connected in
standard configuration. The disconnector (CB truck) and line side earthing switch
status information are connected to DCSXSWI1 and ESSXSI1.
The configuration includes closed enable interlocking logic for disconnector and
earthing switch. These signals are available for binary outputs X100:SO1 and
X100:SO2.
344 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
DCSXSWI1
X110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_TEST POSOPEN OPENPOS
X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_SERVICE POSCLOSE CLOSEPOS
OKPOS DCSXSWI1_OKPOS
AND6
CBXCBR1_OPENPOS B1 O DC1_CLOSE_ENABLE
ESSXSWI1_OPENPOS B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-142CE220-F290-41CB-9E39-1B7080026BEB V1 EN
ESSXSWI1
X110_BI7_ES1_OPENED POSOPEN OPENPOS ESSXSWI1_OPENPOS
X110_BI8_ES1_CLOSED POSCLOSE CLOSEPOS
OKPOS
OR6
X110_BI1_PLUG_OUT B1 O ES1_CLOSE_ENABLED
X110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_TEST B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-C582C1A4-2E92-40E3-A812-CC44D1A1FE46 V1 EN
The circuit breaker closing is enabled when the ENA_CLOSE input is activated.
The input can be activated by the configuration logic, which is a combination of
the disconnector or breaker truck and earth-switch position status, status of the trip
logics, gas pressure alarm and circuit-breaker spring charging status.
The OKPOS output from DCSXSWI defines whether disconnector or breaker truck
is either open (in test position) or close (in service position). This output, together
with the open earth-switch and non-active trip signals, activates the close-enable
signal to the circuit breaker control function block. The open operation for circuit
breaker is always enabled.
The ITL_BYPASS input can be used, for example, to always enable the closing of
the circuit breaker when the circuit breaker truck is in the test position.
ITL_BYPASS overrides, for example, active interlocking conditions when the
circuit breaker truck is closed in service position.
REF615 345
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
CBXCBR1
X110_BI3_CB_OPENED POSOPEN SELECTED CBXCBR1_SELECTED
X110_BI4_CB_CLOSED POSCLOSE EXE_OP CBXCBR1_EXE_OP
TRUE ENA_OPEN EXE_CL CBXCBR1_EXE_CL
CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSE ENA_CLOSE OPENPOS CBXCBR1_OPENPOS
FALSE BLK_OPEN CLOSEPOS
CBXCBR1_BLK_CLOSE BLK_CLOSE OKPOS
CBXBCR1_AU_OPEN AU_OPEN OPEN_ENAD
CBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE AU_CLOSE CLOSE_ENAD CBXCBR1_CLOSE_ENAD
ITL_BYPASS
GUID-41D06A2F-930F-4252-8791-66809C2B53A5 V1 EN
OR
CBXCBR1_EXE_CL B1 O CB_CLOSE_COMMAND
DARREC1_CLOSE_CB B2
GUID-13E343ED-6BDF-4C49-B87C-9102858743F6 V1 EN
Figure 540: Circuit breaker control logic: Signal for closing coil of circuit breaker
1
OR6
CBXCBR1_EXE_OP B1 O CB_OPEN_COMMAND
TRPPTRC1_TRIP B2
DARREC1_OPEN_CB B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-C50B912E-F0EE-4D07-8BB5-3BCCF0706C4F V1 EN
Figure 541: Circuit breaker control logic: Signal for opening coil of circuit
breaker 1
AND6
CB_SPRING_CHARGED B1 O CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSE
B2
NOT B3
B4
TRPPTRC1_TRIP IN OUT B5
B6
NOT
TRPPTRC2_TRIP IN OUT
AND
DCSXSWI1_OKPOS B1 O
ESSXSWI1_OPENPOS B2
TCSSCBR_ALARM
GUID-29BE55F8-E969-45D3-A784-E733A8E28552 V2 EN
346 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
OR6
T1PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE B1 O CBXCBR1_BLK_CLOSE
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-ADBC0393-0928-425B-BD65-5AC7F54440EA V1 EN
The configuration includes logic for generating circuit breaker external closing and
opening command with the IED in local or remote mode.
Check the logic for the external circuit breaker closing command
and modify it according to the application.
AND
CONTROL_LOCAL B1 O
FALSE B2
OR
B1 O CBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE
B2
AND
CONTROL_REMOTE B1 O
FALSE B2
GUID-3C821932-5AE1-49F7-9179-4414221BC7A8 V1 EN
AND
CONTROL_LOCAL B1 O
FALSE B2
OR
B1 O CBXBCR1_AU_OPEN
B2
AND
CONTROL_REMOTE B1 O
FALSE B2
GUID-7BBD30FE-55C8-4869-8680-91BFF424703E V1 EN
The phase current inputs to the IED are measured by the three-phase current
measurement function CMMXU1. The three phase current input is connected to the
X131, X132 and X133 card in the back panel for three phases. The sequence
current measurement CSMSQI1 measures the sequence current and the residual
current measurement RESCMMXU1 measures the residual current. Residual
current input is connected to the X130 card in the back panel.
The three-phase bus side phase voltage inputs to the IED are measured by voltage
measurement function VMMXU1. The three-phase current input is connected to
REF615 347
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
the X131, X132 and X133 card in the back panel for three-phases. The sequence
voltage measurement VSMSQI1 measures the sequence voltage and the residual
voltage measurement RESCMMXU1 measures the voltage current.
The measurements can be seen in the LHMI and they are available under the
measurement option in the menu selection. Based on the settings, function blocks
can generate low alarm or warning and high alarm or warning signals for the
measured current values.
The frequency measurement FMMXU1 of the power system and the three-phase
power measurement PEMMXU1 are available. The load profile function
LDPMSTA1 is included in the measurements sheet. LDPMSTA1 offers the ability
to observe the loading history of the corresponding feeder.
The power quality functions CMHAI1 and VMHAI1 can be used to measure the
harmonic contents of the phase current and phase voltages. The voltage variation,
that is, sage and swells can be measured by power quality function PHQVVR1. By
default, these power quality functions are not included in the configuration. The
required logic connections can be made depending on the application by PCM600.
CMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
LOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM
GUID-5CF6151E-675F-4D52-A05B-76747273B4C3 V1 EN
CSMSQI1
GUID-174871F1-2798-4488-858C-65138C7DAAA5 V1 EN
RESCMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
GUID-1256C1B6-5D8B-463D-B7D3-037188280FCE V1 EN
VMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
LOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM
GUID-A7110FEF-3870-45F8-B88B-3D93F2930B03 V1 EN
348 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
VSMSQI1
GUID-690B0379-F909-4B29-B4E0-9CFE7E2D04A9 V1 EN
FMMXU1
GUID-9CA9AC9F-F655-4388-B8DF-D7F3976303E8 V1 EN
PEMMXU1
RSTACM
GUID-F0DE06C2-085C-4D22-A335-BCD31825A860 V1 EN
FLTMSTA1
BLOCK
CB_CLRD
GUID-AF81ADD7-B8B0-4909-A853-BB2833B97F4C V1 EN
LDPMSTA1
RSTMEM MEM_WARN
MEM_ALARM
GUID-EEB651DB-EF5B-4AC5-A36C-5DD219289DAE V1 EN
REF615 349
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 1 OR
B1 O X110_BI1_PLUG_OUT
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 1
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 2 OR
B1 O X110_BI2_CB_SPRING_DISCHARGED
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 2
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 3 OR
B1 O X110_BI3_CB_OPENED
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 3
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 4 OR
B1 O X110_BI4_CB_CLOSED
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 4
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 5 OR
B1 O X110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_TEST
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 5
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 6 OR
B1 O X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_SERVICE
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 6
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 7 OR
B1 O X110_BI7_ES1_OPENED
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 7
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 8 OR
B1 O X110_BI8_ES1_CLOSED
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 8
GUID-F81BB3AC-2639-42F9-ABA0-2078F82B6371 V1 EN
350 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
TRPPTRC3_TRIP
X110 (BIO-H).X110-HSO1
TRPPTRC4_TRIP
X110 (BIO-H).X110-HSO2
TRPPTRC5_TRIP
X110 (BIO-H).X110-HSO3
GUID-666BBFAD-0EF6-4707-99A3-7A5BF35CC725 V1 EN
CBXCBR1_CLOSE_ENAD
X100 (PSM).X100-PO1
CB_CLOSE_COMMAND
X100 (PSM).X100-PO2
DC1_CLOSE_ENABLE
X100 (PSM).X100-SO1
ES1_CLOSE_ENABLED
X100 (PSM).X100-SO2
CB_OPEN_COMMAND
X100 (PSM).X100-PO3
CCBRBRF1_TRRET
X100 (PSM).X100-PO4
GUID-E3B54637-D2EA-41F7-9C10-645647E5F8D6 V1 EN
REF615 351
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
LED1
OK
CBXCBR1_CLOSE_ENAD ALARM
RESET
LED2
OR
OK
DPHxPDOC_OPERATE B1 O ALARM
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B2 RESET
LED3
OR6
OK
EFPADM_OPERATE B1 O ALARM
WPWDE_OPERATE B2 RESET
DEFxPDEF_OPERATE B3
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE B4
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B5
B6
LED4
OR6
OK
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O ALARM
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B2 RESET
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
LED5
OR
OK
NSPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O ALARM
PSPTUV1_OPERATE B2 RESET
GUID-BCE4BD5B-5020-4EDB-9AE0-51D6BFE8C7C6 V1 EN
352 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
LED6
OR
OK
ROVPTOV_OPERATE B1 O ALARM
PHPTOV_OPERATE B2 RESET
LED7
OK
T1PTTR1_ALARM ALARM
RESET
LED8
OR
OK
PHPTUV_OPERATE B1 O ALARM
FRPFRQ_OPERATE B2 RESET
LED9
OR6
OK
TCSSCBR_ALARM B1 O ALARM
SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_3PH B2 RESET
SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_U B3
CCRDIF1_ALARM B4
B5
B6
LED10
OR
OK
CB_OPEN_COMMAND B1 O ALARM
SSCBR1_ALARMS B2 RESET
GUID-6D8DB1A3-1324-42F8-8128-9C5970CDF40A V1 EN
OR6
DEFxPDEF_OPERATE B1 O
ROVPTOV_OPERATE B2
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE B3
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B4
EFPADM_OPERATE B5
WPWDE_OPERATE B6
GUID-7C6F304B-7652-4BC3-9CBE-996F73C8DBA7 V1 EN
Figure 559: Timer logic for overcurrent and earth-fault operate pulse
REF615 353
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
OR6 TPGAPC3
PHPTOV_OPERATE B1 O IN1 OUT1
PHPTUV_OPERATE B2 IN2 OUT2
FRPFRQ_OPERATE B3
PSPTUV1_OPERATE B4
NSPTOV1_OPERATE B5
B6
GUID-C791951B-7C53-4683-8683-F0DDB1CD50AF V1 EN
Figure 560: Timer logic for voltage and frequency operate pulse
3.14.1 Applications
The standard configuration N provides the highest functionality level of all the
REF615 standard configurations. Standard configuration N is delivered as pre-
configured with the same configuration as standard configuration D. Standard
configuration N provides the possibility to standardize on one type of REF615.
Depending on the specific feeder application, the appropriate functionality can be
selected and an own configuration created with the Application Configuration tool
in PCM600. Standard configuration N is not designed to utilize at once all the
available functionality content in one IED. To ensure the performance of the IED,
the user specific configuration load needs to be verified with the Application
Configuration tool in PCM600.
354 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
3.14.2 Functions
UL1UL2UL3
Uo
94/86
U12 0. 0 kV
P 0.00 kW
IL2 0 A
- User management
I ESC Clear
- Web HMI
2×
AND
I2> I2/I1> 3Ith>F 3I>>> O R
OR 46 46PD 49F 50P/51P
L
OR
3I
3× 3×
ARC 3I>/Io>BF
50L/50NL CONDITION MONITORING COMMUNICATION
51BF/51NBF
AND SUPERVISION
Protocols:
0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 2× 2× IEC 61850-8-1 1 0
61850-8-1/-9-2LE 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0
1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 3I> 3I>> 3I>→ 3I>>→ 3I FUSEF CBCM Modbus®® 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0
0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
51P-1 51P-2 67-1 67-2 60 CBCM IEC 60870-5-103 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 DNP3 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0
UL1UL2UL3 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0
0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 Interfaces: 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
C) U12 2× Ethernet: TX (RJ45), FX (LC)
(ST), 3I2f> MCS 3I OPTS TCS Serial: Serial glass fiber (ST),
2/485 68 Io MCS 3I OPTM TCM RS-485, RS-232/485
D-sub 9, IRIG-B
Redundant protocols:
HSR
Io PRP
RSTP
2×
Io Io>>> Io> Io>> PHIZ
50N/51N 51N-1 51N-2 HIZ
CONTROL AND INDICATION 1) MEASUREMENT
Uo Object Ctrl 2)
Ind 3)
- I, U, Io, Uo, P, Q, E, pf, f
2× - Limit value supervision
Io>→ Io>>→ Io>IEF→ CB 1 -
- Load profile record
67N-1 67N-2 67NIEF
DC 2 3 - RTD/mA measurement (optional)
- Symmetrical components
ES 1 2
3× 3×
Yo>→ Po>→ Io>HA 1)
Check availability of binary inputs/outputs Analog interface types 1)
3× 3×
3U< U2> U1< 3U> SYNC O→I PQM3I PQM3U PQMU
27 47O- 47U+ 59 25 79 PQM3I PQM3V PQMV
U12
3× 4×
Uo> f>/f<,
df/dt
UL1UL2UL3 59G
81
REMARKS
Optional 3× No. of Calculated OR Alternative
function instances value function to be
18× Io/Uo
2xRTD
FLOC MAP defined when
1xmA ordering
21FL MAP
GUID-33D8F0DD-5B76-40C1-8FAB-EF75271C1F88 V1 EN
Connector pins for each input and output are presented in the IED physical
connections section.
REF615 355
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
356 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
LED Description
9 Trip circuit supervision alarm
10 Arc protection operate
11 Autoreclose in progress
REF615 357
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
The analog channels have fixed connections to the different function blocks inside
the IED’s standard configuration. However, the 12 analog channels available for
the disturbance recorder function are freely selectable as a part of the disturbance
recorder’s parameter settings.
The phase currents to the IED are fed from a current transformer. The residual
current to the IED is fed from either residually connected CTs, an external core
balance CT, neutral CT or internally calculated.
358 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
The phase voltages to the IED are fed from a voltage transformer. The residual
voltage to the IED is fed from either residually connected VTs, an open delta
connected VT or internally calculated.
The IED offers six different settings groups which can be set based on individual
needs. Each group can be activated or deactivated using the setting group settings
available in the IED.
The functional diagrams describe the IEDs protection functionality in detail and
according to the factory set default connections.
Four non-directional overcurrent stage and three directional overcurrent stages are
offered for overcurrent and short-circuit protection. The non-directional
instantaneous stage PHIPTOC1 can be blocked by energizing the binary input
X120: BI1.
PHIPTOC1
X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING BLOCK OPERATE PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START PHIPTOC1_START
PHHPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE PHHPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START PHHPTOC1_START
PHLPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE PHLPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START PHLPTOC1_START
PHLPTOC2
BLOCK OPERATE PHLPTOC2_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START PHLPTOC2_START
OR6
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O PHxPTOC_OPERATE
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B3
PHLPTOC2_OPERATE B4
B5
B6
GUID-6C6E7FFE-4CA7-4DFF-BA88-36F4C1EE19DA V1 EN
REF615 359
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
The upstream blocking from the start of the overcurrent second low stage
PHLPTOC2 is connected to the binary output X110:SO1. This output can be used
for sending a blocking signal to the relevant overcurrent protection stage of the
IED at the infeeding bay.
OR6
PHLPTOC2_START B1 O UPSTEAM_OC_BLOCKING
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-97C38BE4-34C3-408A-95E1-3AD7BEBD8588 V1 EN
The inrush detection block's (INRPHAR1) output BLK2H enables either blocking
the function or multiplying the active settings for any of the available overcurrent
or earth-fault function blocks.
INRPHAR1
BLOCK BLK2H INRPHAR1_BLK2H
GUID-4BBC0DE7-8C67-4E17-A6CF-F0D0E5535D53 V1 EN
Two negative sequence overcurrent stages NSPTOC1 and NSPTOC2 are provided
for phase unbalance protection. These functions are used to protect the feeder
against phase unbalance.
NSPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE NSPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START NSPTOC1_START
NSPTOC2
BLOCK OPERATE NSPTOC2_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START NSPTOC2_START
OR
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O NSPTOC_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B2
GUID-D2BCBB3A-C69C-438B-BC3F-31C77B49BCC5 V1 EN
Four non-directional earth-fault stages and three directional earth-fault stages are
offered earth-fault protection. However in the configuration three non-directional
earth fault stages are considered. One stage is dedicated to sensitive earth-fault
protection EFLPTOC2. According to the IED's order code, the directional earth-
fault protection method can be based on conventional directional earth-fault
DEFxPDEF only or alternatively together with admittance criteria EFPADM,
wattmetric earth-fault protection WPWDE or harmonic based earth-fault protection
360 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
EFIPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE EFIPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START EFIPTOC1_START
EFHPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE EFHPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START EFHPTOC1_START
EFLPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE EFLPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START EFLPTOC1_START
OR6
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O EFxPTOC_OPERATE
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE B2
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-0C05F72B-4EF4-4926-89AA-23AC67B1272C V1 EN
EFLPTOC2
BLOCK OPERATE EFLPTOC2_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START EFLPTOC2_START
GUID-65E9D918-294A-4936-9F02-65AD242EA181 V1 EN
PDNSPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE
START PDNSPTOC1_START
GUID-02B0B781-07E0-4ED2-B30B-E88EB378D6C6 V1 EN
The thermal overload protection T1PTTR1 detects overloads under varying load
conditions. The BLK_CLOSE output of the function can be used to block the
closing operation of circuit breaker.
REF615 361
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
T1PTTR1
BLK_OPR OPERATE T1PTTR1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START T1PTTR1_START
TEMP_AMB ALARM T1PTTR1_ALARM
BLK_CLOSE
GUID-5995DF50-E527-4A1A-8704-5D0E283131CF V1 EN
The breaker failure protection CCBRBRF1 is initiated via the START input by
number of different protection functions available in the IED. The breaker failure
protection function offers different operating modes associated with the circuit
breaker position and the measured phase and residual currents.
The breaker failure protection function has two operating outputs: TRRET and
TRBU. The TRRET operate output is used for retripping its own breaker through
TRPPTRC2_TRIP. The TRBU output is used to give a backup trip to the breaker
feeding upstream. For this purpose, the TRBU operate output signal is connected to
the binary output X100:PO2.
CCBRBRF1
OR6 OR6
BLOCK CB_FAULT_AL
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O START TRBU CCBRBRF1_TRBU
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B2 B2 POSCLOSE TRRET CCBRBRF1_TRRET
PHLPTOC2_OPERATE B3 B3 CB_FAULT
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE B4 B4
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B5 B5
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE B6 B6
OR6
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B1 O
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
GUID-39F151C5-77E0-4268-99D6-0F172571155C V1 EN
The operate signals from ARCSARC1...3 are connected to both trip logic
TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2. If the IED has been ordered with high speed binary
outputs, the individual operate signals from ARCSARC1...3 are connected to
dedicated trip logic TRPPTRC3...5. The outputs of TRPPTRC3...5 are available at
high speed outputs X110:HSO1, X110:HSO2 and X110:HSO3.
362 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
ARCSARC1
BLOCK OPERATE ARCSARC1_OPERATE
REM_FLT_ARC ARC_FLT_DET ARCSARC1_ARC_FLT_DET
OPR_MODE
ARCSARC2
BLOCK OPERATE ARCSARC2_OPERATE
REM_FLT_ARC ARC_FLT_DET ARCSARC2_ARC_FLT_DET
OPR_MODE
ARCSARC3
BLOCK OPERATE ARCSARC3_OPERATE
REM_FLT_ARC ARC_FLT_DET ARCSARC3_ARC_FLT_DET
OPR_MODE
OR6
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B1 O ARCSARC_OPERATE
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-2B82370A-5D2B-4CAE-A858-6F04CC83058B V1 EN
TRPPTRC3
BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC3_TRIP
ARCSARC1_OPERATE OPERATE CL_LKOUT
X120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT RST_LKOUT
TRPPTRC4
BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC4_TRIP
ARCSARC2_OPERATE OPERATE CL_LKOUT
X120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT RST_LKOUT
TRPPTRC5
BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC5_TRIP
ARCSARC3_OPERATE OPERATE CL_LKOUT
X120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT RST_LKOUT
GUID-0F1C0838-790F-4526-801E-DBA88E061C80 V1 EN
REF615 363
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
control command to the circuit breaker, either local or remote, also blocks the
autorecloser function via the CBXCBR1-SELECTED signal.
The circuit breaker availability for the autorecloser sequence is expressed with the
CB_READY input in DARREC1. The signal, and other required signals, are
connected to the CB spring charged binary inputs in this configuration. The open
command from the autorecloser is connected directly to binary output X100:PO3,
whereas the close command is connected directly to the binary output X100:PO1.
DARREC1
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE INIT_1 OPEN_CB DARREC1_OPEN_CB
PHLPTOC2_OPERATE INIT_2 CLOSE_CB DARREC1_CLOSE_CB
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE INIT_3 CMD_WAIT
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE INIT_4 INPRO DARREC1_INPRO
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE INIT_5 LOCKED
X110_BI2_EXT_START_AUTORECLOSE INIT_6 PROT_CRD
DEL_INIT_2 UNSUC_RECL DARREC1_UNSUC_RECL
DEL_INIT_3 AR_ON
DEL_INIT_4 READY
BLK_RECL_T ACTIVE
BLK_RCLM_T
BLK_THERM
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED CB_POS
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED CB_READY
INC_SHOTP
INHIBIT_RECL
OR6 RECL_ON
SYNC
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B2
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B3
CBXCBR1_SELECTED B4
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM B5 OR
B6
B1 O
B2
OR6
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B1 O
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-54D649CF-D62C-45B9-8371-06270522AB89 V1 EN
General start and operate from all the functions are connected to pulse timer
TPGAPC1 for setting the minimum pulse length for the outputs. The output from
TPGAPC1 is connected to binary outputs
364 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
OR6
PHLPTOC1_START B1 O
PHHPTOC1_START B2
PHLPTOC2_START B3
PHIPTOC1_START B4
NSPTOC1_START B5
NSPTOC2_START B6
OR6
OR6
B1 O
EFLPTOC1_START B1 O B2
EFLPTOC2_START B2 B3
EFIPTOC1_START B3 B4
EFHPTOC1_START B4 B5 TPGAPC1
PDNSPTOC1_START B5 B6
B6 IN1 OUT1 GENERAL_START_PULSE
IN2 OUT2 GENERAL_OPERATE_PULSE
OR6 OR6
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B2 B2
PHLPTOC2_OPERATE B3 B3
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B4 B4
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B5 B5
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B6 B6
OR6
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B3
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE B4
EFLPTOC2_OPERATE B5
B6
OR6
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B1 O
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-6BA9A7FE-D984-48C6-B8E2-704C4C38FA44 V1 EN
The operate signals from the protection functions are connected to the two trip
logics TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2. The output of these trip logic functions is
available at binary output X100:PO3 and X100:PO4. The trip logic functions are
provided with a lockout and latching function, event generation and the trip signal
duration setting. If the lockout operation mode is selected, binary input X120:BI4
has been assigned to RST_LKOUT input of both the trip logic to enable external
reset with a push button.
Three other trip logics TRPPTRC3...4 are also available if the IED is ordered with
high speed binary outputs options.
REF615 365
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
TRPPTRC1
OR6 OR6
BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC1_TRIP
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O OPERATE CL_LKOUT
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B2 B2 RST_LKOUT
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B3 B3
PHLPTOC2_OPERATE B4 B4
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B5 B5
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B6 B6
OR6
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE B3
EFLPTOC2_OPERATE B4
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B5
B6
OR6
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B1 O
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
X120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT
GUID-782738AD-0B54-496D-BD22-8DE67454A545 V1 EN
TRPPTRC2
OR6 OR6
BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC2_TRIP
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O OPERATE CL_LKOUT
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B2 B2 RST_LKOUT
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B3 B3
PHLPTOC2_OPERATE B4 B4
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B5 B5
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B6 B6
OR6
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B2
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE B3
EFLPTOC2_OPERATE B4
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE B5
CCBRBRF1_TRRET B6
OR6
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B1 O
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
X120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT
GUID-F22B7AB4-4791-4726-8AE6-04EA9D09F96B V1 EN
The START and the OPERATE outputs from the protection stages are routed to
trigger the disturbance recorder or, alternatively, only to be recorded by the
disturbance recorder depending on the parameter settings. Additionally, the
selected signals from different functions and few binary inputs are also connected
to the disturbance recorder.
366 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
RDRE1
PHLPTOC1_START C1 TRIGGERED DISTURB_RECORD_TRIGGERED
PHHPTOC1_START C2
PHLPTOC2_START C3
PHIPTOC1_START C4
NSPTOC1_START C5
NSPTOC2_START C6
EFLPTOC1_START C7
EFHPTOC1_START C8
EFIPTOC1_START C9
EFLPTOC2_START C10
C11
PDNSPTOC1_START C12
T1PTTR1_START C13
OR6 CCBRBRF1_TRRET C14
CCBRBRF1_TRBU C15
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O C16
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B2 C17
PHLPTOC2_OPERATE B3 C18
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B4 X110_BI2_EXT_START_AUTORECLOSE C19
B5 EFLPTOC2_OPERATE C20
B6 PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE C21
INRPHAR1_BLK2H C22
T1PTTR1_OPERATE C23
C24
ARCSARC1_OPERATE C25
OR ARCSARC2_OPERATE C26
ARCSARC3_OPERATE C27
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O DARREC1_INPRO C28
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B2 DARREC1_CLOSE_CB C29
DARREC1_UNSUC_RECL C30
X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING C31
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED C32
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED C33
OR6 C34
C35
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O C36
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2 C37
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE B3 C38
B4 C39
B5 C40
B6 C41
C42
C43
C44
C45
OR6 C46
C47
ARCSARC1_ARC_FLT_DET B1 O C48
ARCSARC2_ARC_FLT_DET B2 C49
ARCSARC3_ARC_FLT_DET B3 C50
B4 C51
B5 C52
B6 C53
C54
C55
C56
C57
C58
C59
C60
C61
C62
C63
C64
GUID-2821DA29-8905-4A62-AA2C-91C1F979B841 V1 EN
The circuit breaker condition monitoring function SSCBR1 supervises the switch
status based on the connected binary input information and the measured current
levels. SSCBR1 introduces various supervision methods.
REF615 367
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
SSCBR1
BLOCK TRV_T_OP_ALM SSCBR1_TRV_T_OP_ALM
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED POSOPEN TRV_T_CL_ALM SSCBR1_TRV_T_CL_ALM
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED POSCLOSE SPR_CHR_ALM SSCBR1_SPR_CHR_ALM
CB_OPEN_COMMAND OPEN_CB_EXE OPR_ALM SSCBR1_OPR_ALM
CB_CLOSE_COMMAND CLOSE_CB_EXE OPR_LO SSCBR1_OPR_LO
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM PRES_ALM_IN IPOW_ALM SSCBR1_IPOW_ALM
PRES_LO_IN IPOW_LO SSCBR1_IPOW_LO
CB_SPRING_DISCHARGED SPR_CHR_ST CB_LIFE_ALM SSCBR1_CB_LIFE_ALM
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED SPR_CHR MON_ALM SSCBR1_MON_ALM
RST_IPOW PRES_ALM SSCBR1_PRES_ALM
RST_CB_WEAR PRES_LO SSCBR1_PRES_LO
RST_TRV_T OPENPOS
RST_SPR_T INVALIDPOS
CLOSEPOS
GUID-A18DA22E-BEF5-4C12-89A7-4F02E304561E V1 EN
OR6
SSCBR1_TRV_T_OP_ALM B1 O
SSCBR1_TRV_T_CL_ALM B2
SSCBR1_SPR_CHR_ALM B3
SSCBR1_OPR_ALM B4
SSCBR1_OPR_LO B5 OR
SSCBR1_IPOW_ALM B6
B1 O SSCBR1_ALARMS
B2
OR6
SSCBR1_IPOW_LO B1 O
SSCBR1_CB_LIFE_ALM B2
SSCBR1_MON_ALM B3
SSCBR1_PRES_ALM B4
SSCBR1_PRES_LO B5
B6
GUID-001C6E30-A6E4-475D-9142-2CB675A26FCC V1 EN
NOT
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED IN OUT CB_SPRING_DISCHARGED
GUID-BE312318-2FBB-4272-BE2B-835BD63D592E V1 EN
Two separate trip circuit supervision functions are included: TCSSCBR1 for power
output X100:PO3 and TCSSCBR2 for power output X100:PO4. Both functions are
blocked by the Master Trip TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2 and the circuit breaker
open signal.
368 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
TCSSCBR1
TCSSCBR_BLOCKING BLOCK ALARM TCSSCBR1_ALARM
TCSSCBR2
TCSSCBR_BLOCKING BLOCK ALARM TCSSCBR2_ALARM
OR
TCSSCBR1_ALARM B1 O TCSSCBR_ALARM
TCSSCBR2_ALARM B2
GUID-D9B2A8EF-4B42-48D5-AD1D-E4A5131C2874 V1 EN
OR6
TRPPTRC1_TRIP B1 O TCSSCBR_BLOCKING
TRPPTRC2_TRIP B2
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-CABC7A2A-8406-44EA-8AE9-34E3EB7B1FA6 V1 EN
Two types of disconnector and earthing switch function blocks are available.
DCSXSWI1...3 and ESSXSWI1...2 are status only type, and DCXSWI1...2 and
ESXSWI1 are controllable type. By default, the status only blocks are connected in
the standard configuration. The disconnector (CB truck) and line side earthing
switch status information are connected to DCSXSWI1 and ESSXSI1.
DCSXSWI1
X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_TEST POSOPEN OPENPOS
X110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_SERVICE POSCLOSE CLOSEPOS
OKPOS DCSXSWI1_OKPOS
GUID-88089155-4117-4BF7-BEAD-8EB5D61595E1 V1 EN
ESSXSWI1
X110_BI8_ES1_OPENED POSOPEN OPENPOS ESSXSWI1_OPENPOS
X110_BI7_ES1_CLOSED POSCLOSE CLOSEPOS
OKPOS
GUID-52A1CCBB-9AD0-467E-9673-72905B03507C V
The circuit breaker closing is enabled when the ENA_CLOSE input is activated.
The input can be activated by the configuration logic, which is a combination of
REF615 369
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
the disconnector or breaker truck and earth-switch position status, status of the trip
logics, gas pressure alarm and circuit-breaker spring charging status.
The OKPOS output from DCSXSWI defines whether the disconnector or breaker
truck is either open (in test position) or close (in service position). This output,
together with the open earth-switch and non-active trip signals, activates the close-
enable signal to the circuit breaker control function block. The open operation for
circuit breaker is always enabled.
The ITL_BYPASS input can be used, for example, to always enable the closing of
the circuit breaker when the circuit breaker truck is in the test position.
ITL_BYPASS overrides, for example, active interlocking conditions when the
circuit breaker truck is closed in service position.
CBXCBR1
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED POSOPEN SELECTED CBXCBR1_SELECTED
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED POSCLOSE EXE_OP CBXCBR1_EXE_OP
TRUE ENA_OPEN EXE_CL CBXCBR1_EXE_CL
CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSE ENA_CLOSE OPENPOS
FALSE BLK_OPEN CLOSEPOS
BLK_CLOSE OKPOS
CBXBCR1_AU_OPEN AU_OPEN OPEN_ENAD
CBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE AU_CLOSE CLOSE_ENAD
ITL_BYPASS
GUID-A9EA74A8-8931-4A9A-B602-C5940687A28E V1 EN
Connect the addition signals required for the application for closing
and opening of circuit breaker.
OR
CBXCBR1_EXE_CL B1 O CB_CLOSE_COMMAND
DARREC1_CLOSE_CB B2
GUID-A30683B8-1318-48BE-851C-9F56B071E150 V1 EN
Figure 585: Circuit breaker control logic: Signals for closing coil of circuit breaker
OR6
CBXCBR1_EXE_OP B1 O CB_OPEN_COMMAND
TRPPTRC1_TRIP B2
DARREC1_OPEN_CB B3
B4
B5
B6
GUID-6834DCB2-126F-40BF-A10B-23B4E5E02534 V1 EN
Figure 586: Circuit breaker control logic: Signals for opening coil of circuit breaker
370 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
AND6
DCSXSWI1_OKPOS B1 O CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSE
ESSXSWI1_OPENPOS B2
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED B3
B4
NOT B5
B6
TRPPTRC1_TRIP IN OUT
NOT
TRPPTRC2_TRIP IN OUT
NOT
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM IN OUT
GUID-4BD1BA07-C7A7-4510-BAB9-DBF3BABD1A02 V1 EN
The configuration includes the logic for generating circuit breaker external closing
and opening command with the IED in local or remote mode.
Check the logic for the external circuit breaker closing command
and modify it according to the application.
AND
CONTROL_LOCAL B1 O
FALSE B2
OR
B1 O CBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE
B2
AND
CONTROL_REMOTE B1 O
FALSE B2
GUID-065B8F38-D535-4FBF-B2B5-9FB82191614C V1 EN
AND
CONTROL_LOCAL B1 O
FALSE B2
OR
B1 O CBXBCR1_AU_OPEN
B2
AND
CONTROL_REMOTE B1 O
FALSE B2
GUID-0978DD77-5996-4E3C-BFCE-E0726ED2BC9A V1 EN
The phase current inputs to the IED are measured by the three-phase current
measurement function CMMXU1. The current input is connected to the X120 card
in the back panel. The sequence current measurement CSMSQI1 measures the
sequence current and the residual current measurement RESCMMXU1 measures
the residual current.
REF615 371
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
The measurements can be seen in the LHMI and they are available under the
measurement option in the menu selection. Based on the settings, function blocks
can generate low alarm or warning and high alarm or warning signals for the
measured current values.
The power quality functions CMHAI1 and VMHAI1 can be used to measure the
harmonic contents of the phase current and phase voltages. The voltage variation,
that is, sage and swells can be measured by power quality function PHQVVR1. By
default, these power quality functions are not included in the configuration. The
required logic connections can be made depending on the application by PCM600.
The three-phase bus side phase voltage and single phase line side phase voltage
inputs to the IED can be measured by voltage measurement function VMMXU1
and VMMXU2. The voltage input is connected to the X130 card in the back panel.
The sequence voltage measurement VSMSQI1 measures the sequence voltage and
the residual voltage measurement RESVMMXU1 measures the residual voltage.
The frequency measurement FMMXU1 of the power system and the three-phase
power measurement PEMMXU1 are available.
CMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
LOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM
GUID-77B3EBC2-B1B3-45B9-A87D-994D23CD6CCF V1 EN
CSMSQI1
GUID-6AA5792D-D33A-459E-B38C-C42BA50E56A6 V1 EN
RESCMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
GUID-15030D32-F6B4-4234-8B89-1129B3A86DB7 V1 EN
372 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
VMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
LOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM
GUID-3B972DE4-6494-4F05-A3A6-889B2C107CAC V1 EN
VSMSQI1
GUID-B73E15A5-5F01-4C52-B6CF-FC253E9C73CC V1 EN
VMMXU2
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
LOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM
GUID-47E4200D-7795-4437-94FB-24B1385E8DF8 V1 EN
FMMXU1
GUID-D9F7BF94-F97E-4DE9-8F52-1EE26998B098 V1 EN
PEMMXU1
RSTACM
GUID-C81ADCD4-65DF-477A-93D1-B272754B312B V1 EN
FLTMSTA1
BLOCK
CB_CLRD
GUID-CA3D6392-494E-4BC9-BBB9-9F98D96BE196 V1 EN
LDPMSTA1
RSTMEM MEM_WARN
MEM_ALARM
GUID-4982BDFA-AD01-4C0C-A14B-EA098362AE51 V1 EN
REF615 373
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 2 OR
B1 O X110_BI2_EXT_START_AUTORECLOSE
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 2
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 3 OR
B1 O X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 3
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 4 OR
B1 O X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 4
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 5 OR
B1 O X110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_SERVICE
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 5
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 6 OR
B1 O X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_TEST
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 6
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 7 OR
B1 O X110_BI7_ES1_CLOSED
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 7
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 8 OR
B1 O X110_BI8_ES1_OPENED
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 8
GUID-46F2BC2B-B863-4F13-8EFE-E10E5D695CE8 V1 EN
X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING
X120 (AIM).X120-Input 1
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
X120 (AIM).X120-Input 2
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED
X120 (AIM).X120-Input 3
X120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT
X120 (AIM).X120-Input 4
GUID-56BDDBE9-A1DF-4D1B-9AD4-4501D67E40EB V1 EN
374 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
UPSTEAM_OC_BLOCKING
X110 (BIO).X110-SO1
TRPPTRC3_TRIP
X110 (BIO-H).X110-HSO1
OC_OPERATE_PULSE
X110 (BIO).X110-SO2
TRPPTRC4_TRIP
X110 (BIO-H).X110-HSO2
EF_OPERATE_PULSE
X110 (BIO).X110-SO3
TRPPTRC5_TRIP
X110 (BIO-H).X110-HSO3
GUID-3241C034-AC38-41BA-AC50-CA5FC1E9425E V1 EN
CB_CLOSE_COMMAND
X100 (PSM).X100-PO1
CCBRBRF1_TRBU
X100 (PSM).X100-PO2
GENERAL_START_PULSE
X100 (PSM).X100-SO1
GENERAL_OPERATE_PULSE
X100 (PSM).X100-SO2
CB_OPEN_COMMAND
X100 (PSM).X100-PO3
TRPPTRC2_TRIP
X100 (PSM).X100-PO4
GUID-3817524D-C0C1-42F8-A4DC-FB5DA4EFFFD0 V1 EN
REF615 375
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
LED1
OK
PHxPTOC_OPERATE ALARM
RESET
LED2
OK
EFxPTOC_OPERATE ALARM
RESET
LED3
OK
EFLPTOC2_OPERATE ALARM
RESET
LED4
OR
OK
NSPTOC_OPERATE B1 O ALARM
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B2 RESET
LED5
OK
T1PTTR1_ALARM ALARM
RESET
GUID-0A540AFB-3DD1-47A7-AE63-E65932766D34 V1 EN
376 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 3
REF615 standard configurations
LED6
OK
CCBRBRF1_TRBU ALARM
RESET
LED7
OK
DISTURB_RECORD_TRIGGERED ALARM
RESET
LED8
OK
SSCBR1_ALARMS ALARM
RESET
LED9
OK
TCSSCBR_ALARM ALARM
RESET
LED10
OK
ARCSARC_OPERATE ALARM
RESET
LED11
OK
DARREC1_INPRO ALARM
RESET
GUID-76107B29-33D4-4CA1-8F5C-D03382A9D583 V1 EN
The configuration also includes overcurrent operate and earth-fault operate logic.
The operate logics are connected to the pulse timer TPGAPC for setting the
minimum pulse length for the outputs. The output from TPGAPC is connected to
binary outputs.
TPGAPC2
PHxPTOC_OPERATE IN1 OUT1 OC_OPERATE_PULSE
IN2 OUT2 EF_OPERATE_PULSE
OR
EFxPTOC_OPERATE B1 O
EFLPTOC2_OPERATE B2
GUID-5DAD5155-7666-4E05-B6AC-7CD7EB01E6F9 V1 EN
Figure 605: Timer logic for overcurrent and earth-fault operate pulse
REF615 377
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRS756378 N
REF615 standard configurations
378 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 4
Requirements for measurement transformers
The selection of a CT depends not only on the CT specifications but also on the
network fault current magnitude, desired protection objectives, and the actual CT
burden. The protection settings of the IED should be defined in accordance with
the CT performance as well as other factors.
The rated accuracy limit factor (Fn) is the ratio of the rated accuracy limit primary
current to the rated primary current. For example, a protective current transformer
of type 5P10 has the accuracy class 5P and the accuracy limit factor 10. For
protective current transformers, the accuracy class is designed by the highest
permissible percentage composite error at the rated accuracy limit primary current
prescribed for the accuracy class concerned, followed by the letter "P" (meaning
protection).
Table 75: Limits of errors according to IEC 60044-1 for protective current transformers
Accuracy class Current error at Phase displacement at rated primary Composite error at
rated primary current rated accuracy limit
current (%) minutes centiradians primary current (%)
5P ±1 ±60 ±1.8 5
10P ±3 - - 10
The accuracy classes 5P and 10P are both suitable for non-directional overcurrent
protection. The 5P class provides a better accuracy. This should be noted also if
there are accuracy requirements for the metering functions (current metering,
power metering, and so on) of the IED.
REF615 379
Application Manual
Section 4 1MRS756378 N
Requirements for measurement transformers
The CT accuracy primary limit current describes the highest fault current
magnitude at which the CT fulfils the specified accuracy. Beyond this level, the
secondary current of the CT is distorted and it might have severe effects on the
performance of the protection IED.
In practise, the actual accuracy limit factor (Fa) differs from the rated accuracy
limit factor (Fn) and is proportional to the ratio of the rated CT burden and the
actual CT burden.
Sin + Sn
Fa ≈ Fn ×
Sin + S
A071141 V1 EN
The nominal primary current I1n should be chosen in such a way that the thermal
and dynamic strength of the current measuring input of the IED is not exceeded.
This is always fulfilled when
The saturation of the CT protects the measuring circuit and the current input of the
IED. For that reason, in practice, even a few times smaller nominal primary current
can be used than given by the formula.
380 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 4
Requirements for measurement transformers
The factor 0.7 takes into account the protection IED inaccuracy, current
transformer errors, and imperfections of the short circuit calculations.
The adequate performance of the CT should be checked when the setting of the
high set stage overcurrent protection is defined. The operate time delay caused by
the CT saturation is typically small enough when the overcurrent setting is
noticeably lower than Fa.
When defining the setting values for the low set stages, the saturation of the CT
does not need to be taken into account and the start current setting is simply
according to the formula.
With definite time mode of operation, the saturation of CT may cause a delay that
is as long as the time the constant of the DC component of the fault current, when
the current is only slightly higher than the starting current. This depends on the
accuracy limit factor of the CT, on the remanence flux of the core of the CT, and
on the operate time setting.
With inverse time mode of operation, the delay should always be considered as
being as long as the time constant of the DC component.
With inverse time mode of operation and when the high-set stages are not used, the
AC component of the fault current should not saturate the CT less than 20 times the
starting current. Otherwise, the inverse operation time can be further prolonged.
Therefore, the accuracy limit factor Fa should be chosen using the formula:
The Current start value is the primary start current setting of the IED.
The following figure describes a typical medium voltage feeder. The protection is
implemented as three-stage definite time non-directional overcurrent protection.
REF615 381
Application Manual
Section 4 1MRS756378 N
Requirements for measurement transformers
A071142 V1 EN
The maximum three-phase fault current is 41.7 kA and the minimum three-phase
short circuit current is 22.8 kA. The actual accuracy limit factor of the CT is
calculated to be 59.
The start current setting for low-set stage (3I>) is selected to be about twice the
nominal current of the cable. The operate time is selected so that it is selective with
the next IED (not visible in the figure above). The settings for the high-set stage
and instantaneous stage are defined also so that grading is ensured with the
downstream protection. In addition, the start current settings have to be defined so
that the IED operates with the minimum fault current and it does not operate with
the maximum load current. The settings for all three stages are as in the figure above.
For the application point of view, the suitable setting for instantaneous stage (I>>>)
in this example is 3 500 A (5.83 x I2n). For the CT characteristics point of view, the
criteria given by the current transformer selection formula is fulfilled and also the
IED setting is considerably below the Fa. In this application, the CT rated burden
could have been selected much lower than 10 VA for economical reasons.
382 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 5
IED physical connections
5.1 Inputs
REF615 383
Application Manual
Section 5 1MRS756378 N
IED physical connections
Table 81: Reference voltage input for SECRSYN1 included in configurations H, J, K and N
Terminal Description
X130-9,10 U12B
384 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 5
IED physical connections
REF615 385
Application Manual
Section 5 1MRS756378 N
IED physical connections
Terminal Description
X110-4 BI4, +
X110-5 BI4, -
X110-6 BI5, +
X110-10 BI5, -
X110-7 BI6, +
X110-10 BI6, -
X110-8 BI7, +
X110-10 BI7, -
X110-9 BI8, +
X110-10 BI8, -
386 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 5
IED physical connections
Binary inputs of slot X130 are available with configuration K and optionally
available with configurations E, F, H, J and N.
The IED is provided with connection sockets X13, X14 and X15
only if the optional communication module with light sensor inputs
has been installed. If the arc protection option is selected when
ordering an IED, the light sensor inputs are included in the
communication module.
REF615 387
Application Manual
Section 5 1MRS756378 N
IED physical connections
X130-11 Common1)
X130-12 Common2)
X130-13 RTD4 (AI6), +
X130-14 RTD4 (AI6), -
X130-15 RTD5 (AI7), +
X130-16 RTD5 (AI7), -
X130-17 RTD6 (AI8), +
X130-18 RTD6 (AI8), -
388 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 5
IED physical connections
Terminal Description
X130-5 RTD1 (AI2), ground
X130-6 RTD2 (AI3), +
X130-7 RTD2 (AI3), -
X130-8 RTD2 (AI3), ground
5.2 Outputs
REF615 389
Application Manual
Section 5 1MRS756378 N
IED physical connections
Output contacts of slot X130 are available in the optional BIO module (BIO0006).
390 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 5
IED physical connections
5.2.3 IRF
The IRF contact functions as an output contact for the self-supervision system of
the protection IED. Under normal operating conditions, the IED is energized and
the contact is closed (X100/3-5). When a fault is detected by the self-supervision
system or the auxiliary voltage is disconnected, the output contact drops off and the
contact closes (X100/3-4).
REF615 391
Application Manual
392
1MRS756378 N Section 6
Glossary
Section 6 Glossary
REF615 393
Application Manual
Section 6 1MRS756378 N
Glossary
394 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 N Section 6
Glossary
REF615 395
Application Manual
396
397
Contact us
ABB Limited
Distribution Automation
Maneja
Vadodara 390013, India
Phone +91 265 2604032
Fax +91 265 2638922
www.abb.com/substationautomation